JP2022093515A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine permitting suitable soldering when mounting an electronic component, a connector, and the like onto a printed wiring board.

SOLUTION: A main control board 61 includes a printed wiring board 872 on which via holes 793a to 793d are formed. The four via holes 793a to 793d are aligned in a line. A line of connectors are attached onto the printed wiring board 872 while inserting pins into the via holes 793a to 793d. Junction holes 762a to 762d are formed around the via holes 793a to 793d. A separation type short-circuiting prevention hole 874 not communicating with the first junction hole 762a is provided outside the first junction hole 762a, and a separation type short-circuiting prevention hole 871 not communicating with the fourth junction hole 762d is provided outside the fourth junction hole 762d. Pins in a line of connectors are soldered to the junction holes 762a to 762d on a printed wiring board 741.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 99

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control device that controls the main control of the game, a voice emission control device that outputs sound or light for production based on a command received from the main control device, and the like. These main control devices, voice emission control devices, and the like are provided with a board inside, and the board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs and resistors, connectors, and the like on a printed wiring board. Electronic components, connectors, and the like are fixed in a state of being electrically connected to the wiring formed on the printed wiring board by soldering (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-004102

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform soldering when mounting an electronic component, a connector, or the like on a printed wiring board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably soldering when mounting electronic components, connectors, etc. on a printed wiring board. It is the purpose.

The invention according to claim 1 has an insertion hole through which a terminal of a mounting component is inserted and a connection area provided around the insertion hole for the insertion. In a gaming machine provided with a substrate in which the terminals of the mounting component and the connection area are electrically connected by solder in a state where the terminals of the mounting component are inserted through the holes.
The substrate is provided at a position outside the connection region without communicating with the connection region, and is characterized by having a special region to which solder can be fastened.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform soldering when mounting an electronic component, a connector, or the like on a printed wiring board.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of the ball entry detection sensor input to the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric composition of the payout control device and various devices communicating with the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of memory for correspondence relations. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (d) It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 15th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory. It is a flowchart which shows the management output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the data output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition of the input port of the management side I / F in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 12th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing which is executed by the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an opportunity specifying process executed by the main CPU in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specifying process which is executed by the main CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the MPU of the main control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in a twelfth embodiment to a main CPU and a management IC. It is a front view of the game board in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the first left-right distribution nail, (b) is a plan view of the first left-right distribution member, and (c) is a rear view of the first left-right distribution member. (A) is a perspective view of a fixing member, and (b) is an end view of a cut surface of a first left-right distribution nail when cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of a game board. (A) is an end view of a vertical cross section of a first left and right distribution nail showing a game ball colliding with the first distribution surface, and (b) a course of the game ball falling from above and colliding with the first distribution surface. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (c) the course of the game ball which flows down from the upper left side and collides with the first distribution plane. (A) It is an end view of the vertical cross section of the 1st left-right distribution nail which shows the game ball which collides with the 2nd distribution surface, and (b) the course of the game ball which falls from above and collides with the 2nd distribution surface. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (c) the course of the game ball which flows down from the upper left side and collides with the 2nd distribution plane. (A) is a perspective view of the second left-right distribution nail, (b) is a plan view of the second left-right distribution member, and (c) is a rear view of the second left-right distribution member. (A) A table showing the direction of the drag force received by the game ball colliding with the first left-right distribution nail, and (b) a table showing the direction of the drag force received by the game ball colliding with the second left-right distribution nail. (C) It is a table showing the direction of the drag force received by the game ball colliding with the obstacle nail. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the game ball located on the back side is guided to the left side guide nail group, and (b) state where the game ball located on the front side is guided by the left side guide nail group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the game ball located on the back side is guided to the right side guide nail group, and (b) state that the game ball located on the front side is guided to the right side guide nail group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a front view of the game board which enlarged and shows the periphery of the left side guide member in another embodiment of thirteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in which the 1st left-right distribution nail and the 2nd left-right distribution nail are provided in the vicinity of the upstream of the operation opening, and is the enlarged view near the operation opening. (A) is a perspective view of the first left-right distribution nail, and (b) is an end view of the cut surface of the first left-right distribution nail when cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a perspective view of (a) a reversing nail, (b) an end view of a cut surface when the reversing nail is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (c) a game ball colliding with the first reversing surface. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course of (d), and is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course of a game ball which collides with a 2nd inversion plane. It is the front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment, and the enlarged view around the upstream part of the left side guide nail group. It is a perspective view of (a) a front-rear distribution nail, (b) a plan view of a front-rear distribution member, and (c) and (d) a front-rear distribution nail when cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an end view of the cut surface of. (A) is a perspective view of the rear nail, and (b) and (c) are end views of the cut surface of the rear nail when cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course in the left side guide nail group of a game ball located in the back side of a game area, and (b) the course in the left side guide nail group of a game ball located in the front side of a game area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. (A) is a plan view of the front priority member in another embodiment of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball in the left side guide nail group including the front priority member. It is a front view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and is the enlarged view around the repulsive nail. (A) It is an exploded perspective view of a repulsive nail, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of a repulsive nail. (A) It is an end view of the cut surface when the repulsion nail is cut in the plane perpendicular to the plane of the game board, and (b) is the explanatory view for explaining the course of the game ball which collides with the high repulsion part. (C) It is an end view of the cut surface when the repulsion nail is cut in the plane perpendicular to the plane of the game board, and (d) is the explanatory view for demonstrating the course of the game ball which collides with a low repulsion member. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course of a game ball which collides with a high repulsion part of a repulsive nail, and (b) explains the course of a game ball after a collision when it collides with a low repulsion member of a repulsive nail. It is an explanatory diagram for this. It is a front view of the game board in 16th Embodiment. (A) A perspective view of the front-rear distribution table, (b) a plan view of the front-rear distribution table, and (c) and (d) a case where the front-rear distribution table is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an end view of the cut surface of. It is a front view of the game board which shows the center part on the left side enlarged. It is a front view of the game board in another embodiment of the sixteenth embodiment. (A), (b) It is a front view of the game board which enlarged and shows the area around the front-rear distribution table and the left side guide nail group. (A) A perspective view of a front-rear distribution table provided with a groove for guiding the game ball on the back side to the innermost side and a groove for guiding the game ball on the front side to the front side, and (b) the back side. It is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution table provided with the groove for guiding the game ball to the front side and the groove for guiding the game ball on the front side to the back side. It is a front view of the game board in 17th Embodiment, and is the enlarged view around the position change passage. (A) A perspective view of the passage forming member, (b) a front view of the passage forming member, and (c) and (d) a cut surface when the passage forming member is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an end view of. (A), (b) It is a front view of the game board which enlarged and shows the downstream area of the position change passage. (A), (b) is an end view of the cut surface when the replacement passage forming member is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a front view of the game board in 18th Embodiment. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the guide member, and (b) is a left side view of the guide member. It is an end view of the cut surface in the case where the guide member is cut in the plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (A), (b) It is a front view of the game board which enlarged and shows the downstream area of the guide passage. It is an end view of the cut surface in the case where the replacement guide member is cut in the plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (A) It is an end view of the cut surface in the case where the guide member is cut in the plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board in another embodiment of the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is the replacement in the plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an end view of the cut surface when the guide member is cut. (A) It is a surface view of the main control board which enlarged part of the main control board in 19th Embodiment, and (b) is the surface view of the main control board which enlarges and shows the periphery of 1 row connector. .. It is a perspective view of (a) a one-row connector, (b) a perspective view of a two-pole connector, and (c) a perspective view of a two-row connector. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the back surface of the printed wiring board, and (b) is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view around a via hole of the printed wiring board cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface. It is a vertical sectional view which enlarges and shows around the pin of the printed wiring board cut in the plane perpendicular to the surface. (A) is a back view showing a part of the main control board in an enlarged manner, and (b) is a back view of a printed wiring board showing an enlarged back side area for one row before the one-row connector is mounted. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jet flow of molten solder, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the jet flow hits the back surface of a printed wiring board. (A) is a vertical sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining a state in which the second pin, the third pin, and the fourth pin of the one-row connector are in contact with a jet stream, and (b) one row. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board shown to explain how the 2nd pin of a connector comes out of the contact state with a jet stream, and (c) the 3rd pin of a 1-row connector comes out of a contact state with a jet stream. It is a vertical sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board shown for demonstrating the situation. (A) It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board which shows the state which the 3rd pin of a 1-row connector came out from the contact state with a jet flow, and (b) the 4th pin of a 1-row connector is a jet flow. It is a vertical sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board shown for demonstrating the state which came out from the contact state with, and (c) the state which the solder bridge is formed between the 3rd pin and the 4th pin of a 1-row connector. It is a vertical sectional view of the printed wiring board for comparison which shows. It is a vertical sectional view of the printed wiring board shown for demonstrating the solder fillet formed around the 4th pin of a 1-row connector. (A) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which enlarges and shows the back surface area for two poles before a two-pole connector is attached, and (b) expands the back surface area for two rows before the two-row connector is attached. It is a back view of the printed wiring board shown by. (A) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which enlarges and shows the back surface area for 1 row provided with the inclined short-circuit prevention hole in another embodiment of 19th Embodiment, and (b) the back surface area for 1 row is enlarged. It is a back view of the printed wiring board shown by (c), and is the back view of the printed wiring board which enlarges and shows the back surface area for one row in (c) the printed wiring board. (A) It is a back view of the printed wiring board which enlarged and shows the back surface area for 1 row in 20th Embodiment, and (b) is the vertical sectional view of the printed wiring board which shows enlarged around the pin of a 1-row connector. Is. (A) It is the back side view of the printed wiring board which enlarges and shows the back surface area for one row which six separation type short circuit prevention holes are formed in another embodiment of 20th Embodiment, (b) two three directions. It is a back view of the printed wiring board which enlarges and shows the back surface area for 1 row in which a separable short circuit prevention hole is formed. It is a back view of the printed wiring board which enlarges and shows the back surface area for 1 row in which the short circuit prevention hole group for suppressing the occurrence of a solder bridge in 21st Embodiment is formed. It is a front view of the game board in 22nd Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating connection mode of 1st actuating port detection sensor and 2nd actuating port detection sensor, and a main control board, (b) area for 1st actuating port and area for 2nd actuating port. It is a back view of the printed wiring board which is enlarged and shown.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 55a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. Is executed to pay out one prize ball, and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out to the special electric winning device 32. When one of the game balls is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the gaming area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure hold display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and the numbers "1" to "9" are added to each symbol row. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol columns is started first, the scroll display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol column → the lower symbol column → the middle symbol column, and finally the predetermined symbol display is specified in each symbol column. It ends with the symbol still displayed. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. Will be. Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the game times 1 until the predetermined result is displayed and the display is finished. Equivalent to times. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

If a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of a game ball flowing down the game area PA.

As described above, the game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 42 to 48, and become a discharge ball recovery part (not shown). Will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting the game ball are provided in the discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that has entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. is doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first actuating port 33. The first actuating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball that has entered the first actuating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. It is detected by the first actuating port detection sensor 46a on the way through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second actuating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage portion 47, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 uses the sixth discharging passage portion 47. It is detected by the second actuating port detection sensor 47a on the way through. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a.

The game ball that is the target of detection by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not the target of detection by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, the gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be individually detected. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 contains a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66, in addition to the main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 has a built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. The details will be described later, but the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. According to the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of entry into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is grasped.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a include a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, and a first operating opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines the entry into each entry portion. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lottery is executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The payout control device 77 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on the fact that the game ball has entered the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the game ball in the above-mentioned entry unit. To. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37 and the normal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a and a special figure hold display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed on the main CPU 63. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed in the main CPU 63. Further, when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b is performed on the main CPU 63. Is executed, and when a prize is won in the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started in the normal figure display unit 38a, the display control of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display unit 37a, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, a setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of hits, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The variable type counter CS is used. Further, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric accessory open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. In addition, the combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second. Each numerical information is stored in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. ..

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric utility opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric utility opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general electric holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored general electric accessory open counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the game area PA in the same manner. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal-electricity open state in the general-purpose electric power opening lottery using the general-purpose electric goods opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose accessory 34a is opened when the general-purpose electric accessory 34a is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the general electric power is won and the open state of the public electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is performed (that is, the normal power drawing), as compared with the low frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the general open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the public electric open state. In addition, the reserved time secured for the next public electric opening lottery after one public electric opening lottery is performed (for example, is executed by the general drawing display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of big hit results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the two operating ports 34.

As an aspect of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed up to a predetermined number of round games.

Here, the round game continues until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is a game to play. Further, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening of the special electric winning device 32 to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is shorter than the long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Will be done. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, and more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and 1 in the short-time mode. When the number of times is opened, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be awarded, or even if the winning is generated, the number will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game according to the long-time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-time mode.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. Then, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set as such distribution destinations.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state is not an open / close execution mode, but a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. Further, as a game result, a configuration in which a low winning high probability jackpot result is not set may be used. Further, in the open / close execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the low winning high accuracy jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, it means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the grant correspondence result. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows, or a plurality of symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, the mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode and a symbol on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode are also included. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 60, but by the voice emission control device 81. In this case, in the voice emission control device 81, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main CPU 63 will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, the access of the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power / emission control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65. Determination (step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S109, the recognition process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information (step S110), and the data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. The process is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be described later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output processing in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before the processing in step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game is not started in the main CPU 63 until the situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S112 to S115. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S112 to S115 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S115, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle).

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after executing the power failure processing. Become. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read result, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 are read. , The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball entry detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, the prize is awarded. The processing of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 65a in time series is executed as the hold information. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big hit winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. Processing, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination processing for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the big hit winning. The determination reach determination process is executed, and the process of selecting the duration of the game round is executed by using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variable command including information on the duration according to the result of each of these processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start variable display. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the voice emission control device 81 starts the effect for the game round corresponding to the contents of these commands in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not it is the end timing of the game round is determined by determining whether or not the continuation period of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round. Is determined. If it is the end timing, the process of ending the game is executed with the display corresponding to the game result displayed. In this case, if the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of any of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and this time. When the game times correspond to the deviation result, the pattern corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Further, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the effect for the game round in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the effect for the current game round in the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. The voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open / close execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute the effect for the open / close execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the open / close execution mode. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is terminated, the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode correspond to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode. Execute the process to enter the mode.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure normal electric control process is executed (step S214). In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. In addition, a release determination is made for the reserved information, and further, a process for performing an effect for a normal drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open / close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease in the number of reserved information related to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure reservation display unit 37b is set. , The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the normal figure display unit 38a in the normal figure hold display unit 38b is set. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information for updating.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the entry result of the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). The details of the management output processing will be described later.

Next, on the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , The 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st actuating port detection sensor 46a, and the 5th bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2nd actuating port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out port detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a do not detect the passage of the game ball, the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal indicating that the detection is not being performed as a detection signal, and detect the passage of the game ball. In the case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores the information of "0" for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information about. That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is not detected is stored, and the passage of the game ball is stored. In the detected situation, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S303). .. The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to execute the payout of 10 game balls. When the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 10 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S306). .. The second output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S309). .. The third output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is released by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S311), and "1" is set in the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S312). The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. By confirming that "1" is set in the special electric winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), one game ball is inserted into the special electric winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has been generated, and the number of remaining balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed for the management IC 66. .. The 15-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to execute the payout of 15 game balls. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize ball is output to the payout control device 77. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S315), and "1" is set in the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control process (step S213) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 5th bit D5 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second actuating port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S319), and "1" is set in the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control process (step S213) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 6th bit D6 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is used by the out-port detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out port detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning flag, the normal power storage in the normal power holding area 65c is confirmed. On condition that the number of pending information on the side is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the process of storing the numerical information of the current general-purpose utility release counter C4 in the general-purpose holding area 65c as the holding information on the normal drawing side. To execute. It is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S214), and the gate winning flag is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when the detection of one game ball is started by one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. In the situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 identifies that one game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. Will be done. Therefore, it is sufficient that one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 has a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 92 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. By receiving the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be paid out normally, and if it is determined that the game ball cannot be paid out normally, the payout side RAM 94 is set. Even in the situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored, the payout device 76 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be normally performed in this way to the main side CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute a notification indicating that the game ball cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 so as to be executed. As a state in which it is not possible to pay out the game ball normally, there are a state in which the lower plate 56a is full with the game ball, a state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with the game ball, and a payout device 76. There are an abnormal payout state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. ..

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower plate 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the game ball is in a full tank state when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In the case, it is specified that the full tank state is released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the game ball is in the ball-free state when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. It is specified that the ballless state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that one game ball is paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 identifies that the payout is in an abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball even though the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , It is specified that the payout abnormal state is canceled when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state from the closed state, and the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the closed state from the open state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the same timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and receives the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 sends a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when it is specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and has specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the main body closing command is received.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, the payout of the game ball is stopped. Is executed, and a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball unnecessary process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in a ball-free state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor, and if the ball is in a ball-free state, a process for stopping the payout of the game ball is performed. At the same time as executing, a command indicating that the ball is not in a state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the ballless state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the ballless state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the payout is abnormal is specified based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the payout is abnormal, the payout of the game ball is stopped. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is abnormal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the front door frame 14 is in the open state. A process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the game machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball. While executing the process of stopping the payout, the main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the gaming ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the game ball is paid out by the payout device 76. The payout control process for controlling the execution of the above is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. If so, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and some of the external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of the external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since each of the main CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. 11, the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 externally send information to the hall computer HC. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail about the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). As the information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round are completed. Information indicating that, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. ..

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
-The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
-The ball ejection rate in the open / close execution mode-The ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode-The number of game times executed until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as this ratio). "S")
BS × "Number of prize balls for winning prizes in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1").
-The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2").
B- (S1 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
Etc. are calculated. This makes it possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entry portion.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball by using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102.

The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as a drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of executing various processes on the main CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side. When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the voice emission control device 81 as a result of executing various processes in the CPU 63, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. .. However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall portion of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the reading device from being illegally electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. The substrate box 60a is not limited to this, and the substrate box 60a is formed with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, so that the substrate box 60a can be read without being damaged. The configuration may be such that the reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

The management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

The management side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the reading terminal 102. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via the signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and has a configuration capable of constantly measuring date information and time information, and outputting the measured date information and time information according to an instruction from the management side CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of a game ball received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. The details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided on the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. When is at the LOW level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is played by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a first signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of the HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, a second signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. The HI level fourth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, a fifth signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level 7th signal when a new game ball is not detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the HI level 7th signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level 7th signal is input to the 7th buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal when it is not in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal when it is in the open / close execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

In the 16th buffer 122p, an output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an HI level output instruction signal over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although the 11th buffer 122k, the 12th buffer 122l, the 13th buffer 122m, the 14th buffer 122n, and the 15th buffer 122o can input the signal from the main CPU 63, the normal signal is not input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. As described above, as the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111, and the management side CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The specification of these signal types in the management side CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 with the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 transfers to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the corresponding memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence-related memory 116 has the first to fifteenth correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o having a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a. Further, in the first correspondence area 123a, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the third buffer 122c. Further, in the third correspondence area 123c, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. Stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. Further, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, along with the information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, the information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 pieces) is also provided. Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is provided and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one). ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is provided and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (one). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. The 14th correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 14th buffer 122n by the management side CPU 112. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management side CPU 112.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. , The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Further, each time the signals corresponding to the storage of the history information are output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116 by the management side CPU 112. It is a configuration. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output, the signal is mainly output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Further, the management side CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o at the start of supply of the operating power. Thereby, in the situation where the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management side CPU 112.

Further, the information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence, and a history information storage area 125 is set in which each pointer information is associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information. One byte of data capacity is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10). First, the date information and the time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently to be written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g as described above. Therefore, the information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence relation areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence relation memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence related areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31, these first to third winning openings. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is the general winning opening 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the first operating port 33 is used. , The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball entry portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, the 8th correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the 9th correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used, and the 10th correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode. Information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored in 123j.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal when it is not in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal when it is in the open / close execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the open / close execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the open / close execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Is possible. Then, in both the case where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the 8th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the open / closed execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the 8th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the end information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode. , The management side CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode is started when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that it has been done. Then, in both the case where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 125. Further, when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 125.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both the case where the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the launch of the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 is continued from the opening to the closing of the store. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. Thereby, all the history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. In the pointer area 126, information for specifying the pointer information currently to be written in the history memory 117 by the management side CPU 112 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of "0" as a writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, every time one history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order is the writing target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of history information that can be stored is exceeded and an opportunity to store the history information occurs, the new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which the old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to "0", and the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that was once read as the read target from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter determines the remaining number of times of information output required for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. It is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63. As described above, 15 of the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o are the recognition targets of the signal type, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

After that, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. In outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output is performed to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the ~ 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the 9th signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 should start the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

After that, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o so that the first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the general winning opening 31 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls are read, and if the recognition output counter is "12", the special electric prize is won. Read the type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls, and if the recognition output counter is "11", read the type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls. If the recognition output counter is "10", it means that it is the second operating port 34, and if the recognition output counter is "9", it means that it is the out port 24a. Read the type identification command shown, read the type identification command indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode if the recognition output counter is "8", and read the high frequency support mode if the recognition output counter is "7". If the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read, and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read the type identification command indicating that.

After that, the output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similar to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the 9th signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relational areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), the process for outputting the type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (step S503 and). Step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the 9th signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 is completed. do.

Next, the management process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is performed after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started in the main side CPU 63. Is started, the combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time is performed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S605).

When a negative determination is made in step S603, or when the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of step S607 and step S608 are repeatedly executed. Although the details will be described later in step S607, a history setting process for storing the history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. Although the details will be described later in step S608, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 19A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and is shown in FIG. 19 (a). b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 19 (c) shows the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and these buffers 122a to 122o. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed is shown, and FIG. 19D shows the timing at which the correspondence relationship setting process (step S604) is executed by the management side CPU 112.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 19A. To. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By confirming the information in, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 18). After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19A.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 19 (d) at the timing of t5. In the correspondence relation setting process, the information indicating that it is a general winning opening 31 and the information of the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence relation area 123a of the correspondence relation memory 116. After that, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19A.

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the main timing is the same as the timing of t4 to t6. The management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t20, which is the situation where the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command is received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 19 (c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19A.

In order to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information by making the management side CPU 112 recognize whether or not the command is being output using the ninth signal as described above. Clearly inform the management CPU 112 that the command is being output even if the command is output using the 1st to 8th signals (that is, the 1st to 8th signal paths) to be used. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing the history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies whether or not there is a management target that is not a specific target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. There are a total of 10 cases of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened / closed. Therefore, first, "10" is set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is at the HI level (step S702). When it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the managed target counter is 4 or more, the managed target corresponding to the value of the managed target counter is 7 ball entry detection sensors 42a. It is specified whether it is any of ~ 48a (step S703).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes When the special electric detection sensor 45a is supported, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the management target counter is "5", and it corresponds to the second actuating port detection sensor 47a. In that case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6th output flag, and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, "1" is set in the 7th output flag. It is determined whether or not "1" is set. As already described, these 1st to 7th output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

When a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "2", it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is used. It is determined whether or not the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set in the management side CPU 112 to be longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18), and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is set. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management side CPU 112. Further, when the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed target counter is "2". When the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is "1", and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In that case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S709: YES). Step S710).

When a negative determination is made in step S704, when the process of step S706 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S707, when the process of step S708 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S709, or in step. When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S712). When the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processes after step S702 are executed for the managed target corresponding to the value of the new managed target counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to tenth correspondence related areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S801, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used, the above Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. Information is to be read out.

When the writing process is executed as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the information is one of the above and the correspondence information is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by 1. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or when the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding related areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter is determined. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding relational areas 123h to 123j are provided with information indicating that the open / close execution mode is used, and the high frequency support mode is used. Since either the information indicating that there is information or the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By confirming whether or not the buffer has been output, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809) in the same manner as in step S803. In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the write process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written is supported. In the history information storage area 125 to be stored, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being done. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the processing after step S802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

Next, the state in which the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22A shows a period during which the HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22B shows the HI level signal being input to the eighth buffer 122h. 22 (c) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the 9th buffer 122i, and FIG. 22 (d) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the 10th buffer 122j. The period is shown, and FIG. 22 (e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 22A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 22 (e). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 22A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching of the LOW level is not the storage target of the history information, FIG. 22 (at the timing of t2) As shown in e), the history information is not written.

After that, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 22A, the first to seventh buffers 122a The output state of the signal input to any of ~ 122 g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 22 (e).

As shown in FIG. 22B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the open / close execution mode by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, is the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the open / close execution mode? It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 22 (c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing of t8 to the timing of t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence or absence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 22D, the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing of t12 to the timing of t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to the presence or absence of opening of the front door frame 14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 122j is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It is possible to distinguish whether it is a thing or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is open.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order for the data output process to be executed, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62. As a result, in order for the history information to be output externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. .. Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform these stop operations and start operations, the outer frame 11 is used. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to enable external output of history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With a certain configuration, even if a person other than the manager of the game hall tries to perform the operation of reading the history information, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 102, so that the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) of (step S902). The reading device has a configuration capable of both checking the control information and checking the history information, and when the checking of the control information is selected by the manual operation of the reading device, the reading device is used to check the control information. A signal is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, a signal for checking history is transmitted from the reading device. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history may be separately configured. In this case, if a reading device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for checking history is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether the control information is legitimate or normal. Can be done.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes a process for outputting history information. The process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S903 is executed or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), it waits in step S905 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is disconnected (step S905: NO), the data output process is terminated.

Next, the external output process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), a process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is counted, so that the out port 24a can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the operation port 33 is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the second operation port 34 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entered into each of the 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, and the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the history information storage area 125 in which the information is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is open is subtracted from the number of balls entered in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1002 is defined as the number of balls entered K1 and calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of balls entered K2, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1004 is defined as the number of balls K3. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1005 was defined as the number of balls entered K4, and was calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1006. The difference in the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entered K5.
-First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operating opening" The ratio of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio) "D1")
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5)-Third parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K3 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Fourth parameter: Total number of game balls ejected to the first operating port 33 K4 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2").
Fifth parameter: Total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3").
6th parameter: D1- (D2 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 " ”) Ratio After that, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the total required until all the history information targeted for this calculation is extracted. Calculate the time (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24a and the general winning opening 31 that occur in the open / close execution mode. , The number of balls entered into each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, and the correspondence information and the end information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set are stored. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is available. When the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open / close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the out port 24a, which occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state, The number of balls entering each of the second actuating openings 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of each ball entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is open is subtracted from each number of balls entered in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K12. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls entered K13, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011. The number K14 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls K15.
11th parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33""Number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11 ")
12th parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 13th parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K13 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ・ 14th parameter: Total number of game balls ejected to the first operating port 33 K14 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12").
Fifteenth parameter: Total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K15 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”).
16th parameter: D11- (D12 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K13 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K14 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K15 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 " ”) Then, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the second output process is read.

After that, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port 24a generated in the situation of the high frequency support mode, general The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1015). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 that occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state. And the number of balls entering each of the second actuating openings 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007, except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, from each number of balls entered in step S1015, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is open is subtracted. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of balls entered K21, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K22, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls K23, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015. The number K24 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls K25.
21st parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33""Number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K25 x "Number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11 ")
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K23 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 24th parameter: Total number of game balls ejected to the first operating port 33 K24 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22").
25th parameter: Total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”).
26th parameter: D21- (D22 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the third output process is read. After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball is paid out, so that the player can use any of these entry sections. The game will be played while expecting the game ball to enter. In the configuration, the game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target ball entry section). When this occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of game balls entering each history target ball entry section, and this managed information is used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into each history-targeted entry unit. Further, since the history information is stored and retained by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry units that eject the game ball from the game area PA are subject to execution of the storage process of the history information and are subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history target ball entry unit by using the history information. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to each history target ball entry unit to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing when the game ball enters the history target ball entry portion which triggered the storage of the history information. As a result, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

In the history memory 117, not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in the open / closed execution mode, and the high frequency support mode are in progress. History information indicating whether or not the door frame 14 is open and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. This makes it possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations is the case, and to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the history target entry portion.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the ball entry mode of the game ball into the history target entry section using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output by using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output the history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified which of the program and the history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 102, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines which of the program and the history information is the target information for external output. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which of the program and history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output externally from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 having the main ROM 64 for storing the program in advance has the management IC 66 and the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

The main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, the management side CPU 112 is provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes a process for storing the history information in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into each history target entry unit while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 inputs information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. It is transmitted to 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Is transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to each of these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information on the management side CPU 112 is simplified. Is possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to, to the management side CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target entry section, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entry section can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

Correspondence-related information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the communication-related configuration as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, every time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the transmission target information to be specified by the management IC 66 is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

By switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with a number of buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, which is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, the corresponding history information includes the correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information. This makes it possible to specify the mode of entering the game ball into each history target entry portion by using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8, 11 to 18, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the result of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation of the open / close execution mode and the situation of the high frequency support mode are calculated. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes the storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. Can be made less likely to occur.

When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, when reading out various parameters and analyzing the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information on which the calculation of the various parameters is based.

The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

It is specified by the main CPU 63 that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. , Various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to the reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on the instruction from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by the processing at the start of supply of the operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the processing at the start of supplying operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in a situation before the normal processing for advancing the game is started in the main CPU 63, various types are used. The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result in the situation where the game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is increased. It is possible to reduce it.

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which external output corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is performed through the external terminal board 97. .. As a result, by using the information output externally through the external terminal board 97, the history can be easily grasped while easily grasping the number and frequency of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of the game balls entering the history target entry portion.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111, the type of buffer whose input signal type is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 is described above. It is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of the input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

A signal of the same type as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as the open / close execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as the high frequency support mode signal. , The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122o as a signal during door opening.

An open / close execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and a th. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main CPU 63, and the management CPU 112 has these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that each of the above signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a recognition process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In the output processing, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / closed execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are respectively. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the information of the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the information of the read number of outputs is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (. Step S1103). The output count counter is a counter for specifying the output count of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as. The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence relation memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type.

In step S1103, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output count counter. .. When the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output count counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 is set in the output count counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the output count counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out, so that the output count counter is used. Set to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and the ball is blank, so "0" is set in the output count counter.

After that, the output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output count counter in step S1103. The process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the end trigger signal output process is executed (step S1109). In the output process, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 and the process for recognizing the signal type corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1111: YES), the output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification end signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1205). The reception count counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63. The value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204 or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the reception count counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, and "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship. In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set. Further, "0" is set in the 7th to 12th correspondence related areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and the processing after step S1204 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES). Run. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209: YES), the history setting process in step S1210 and the external output process in step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 28 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 28 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level. ) Indicates the period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 28 (d) indicates the period during which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. 28 (e) shows the period. The period in which the output state of the signal in the high frequency support mode is at the HI level is shown, and FIG. 28 (f) shows the types of signals input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and these buffers 122a to 122l. FIG. 28 (g) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 28 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 28 (h) shows the timing. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is executed by the management side CPU 112 is shown.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the first signal is shown at the timing of t1 as shown in FIGS. 28 (a), 28 (d) and 28 (e). , The output state of the signal in the open / close execution mode and the signal in the high frequency support mode is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 27), so that the identification state is set as shown in FIG. 28 (f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28A from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28B, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 28 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28 (c) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence relation setting process is executed, "1" is used as the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence relation memory 116. ”Information is stored.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28A from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the timing of t19 to the timing of t21, and the timing of t22 to the timing of t24 are second. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 28 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28 (c) from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management side CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 28 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" is used as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ”Information is stored.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 28 (c), 28 (d) and 28 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are LOW. The level is changed to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), so that the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 28 (f).

Since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information in the present embodiment, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry portions having the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry portions in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls is one in both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Thereby, even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the second embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 in the history information.

Further, in the present embodiment, "15" is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door. Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, it is possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the signal path corresponds to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. Then, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is generated from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 by using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters using the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence-related memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the various calculated parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The calculation trigger of various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of calculating various parameters different from the timing of externally outputting to the reading device, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Further, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only the various parameters for one calculation trigger but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers are collectively collected. It becomes possible to memorize it. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

Signals of the same type as those in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and the ninth is A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 10th buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide a calculation trigger for various parameters to the management side CPU 112. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and is an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management side CPU 112 can specify that each of the above signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p is input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signal. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), the output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S1303, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112. The power failure response process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the power failure response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1401: YES), in steps S1402 to S1406, the external output in the first embodiment is described. In the same manner as in steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated. .. Further, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, for external output in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24). Then, the calculation result information in step S1408 and the calculation result information in step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1411, the number of various balls entered in the open / close execution mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1412, the first step is performed. Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode is calculated. Further, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1415, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1416, the above-mentioned first step. Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, an infinite loop occurs, and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1501: YES), the output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When it is read and various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of these multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. ..

After that, the history information output process is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1504). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, in the clearing process, all the areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the operation result memory 131 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When it is specified that the supply of the operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible for the management side CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on the instruction from the main side CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when various parameters are read by the reading device, various parameters of a plurality of business days can be read together.

When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information that enables the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 in association with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the timing when various parameters are calculated.

When a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0". As a result, in a situation where the maximum number of storable history information is already stored in the history memory 117, it becomes difficult for a new history information to be written to the history memory 117.

Further, the target information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output externally. .. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112 in the present embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter is within the reference range among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 (step S1603). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 " The two parameters of the ratio of ") are set as the parameters to be determined whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 assuming that the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameter is not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and may be configured in which other parameters are set as predetermined parameters in place of or in addition to these. for example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. .. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated by various arithmetic processes in step S1602.

When the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range (step S1603: NO), various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is in the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or when the process of step S1604 is executed, the clear process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S1605). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the process of step S1605, an infinite loop is formed, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the operation result memory 131. Written. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated this time. It is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 20) of. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number "500" (step S1703). When it is "500" or more (step S1703: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, the output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. The arithmetic processing is a processing executed instead of the power failure response processing in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), in step S607. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 every time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is the main CPU 63 during the period in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying at.

When the value of the continuation counter after 1 addition is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, a positive judgment is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set so as to. Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level, and is a time measurement flag. When the value of is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

When a negative determination is made in step S1903, when the process of step S1904 is executed, or when the process of step S1905 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (condition). Step S1906: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

1 It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after addition is equal to or higher than the indicated reference value (step S1908). An instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in the situation where the game is being executed.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is measured by using the measurement counter, the configuration may be such that the RTC 115 is used for measurement.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters by the management side CPU 112 is different from the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is not performed independently by the management side CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 21).

Corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated this time. In the history setting process of, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball is specified based on the number of times of storage. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2003). When it is "500" or more (step S2003: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2005). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 every time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or more than the trigger reference number. That is, the calculation trigger of various parameters is independently determined by the management side CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, so that the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the operation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 131. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has started, and a high frequency support mode. A signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Will be sent to.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that any of the ball entry portions is supported is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the opening / closing execution mode is started in the eighth correspondence area 123h. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the 11th correspondence area 123k, and the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 12th correspondence area 123l. , Information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2101, "13" is set in the confirmation target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. Information is to be read out.

After that, the value of the target pointer is added by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is added by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

When the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the status information takeover process is executed (step S2109). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether or not the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door frame 14 is being opened. It is determined whether or not it is. Then, those state information is written in the management side RAM 114.

After that, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2110). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 is read out in step S2109. Then, when the state information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being stored is stored, the history information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. At the same time as writing, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. In addition, when the status information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being stored is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being written is stored. While writing to 125, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is added by 1.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, a negative determination is made in step S2106, or the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2112). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the processing after step S2102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the history information becomes a storage target and the calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all the history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been the calculation target of various parameters from becoming the calculation target of various parameters again.

Further, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the status information.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o. The first counters 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e in each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i in each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 10th counters 141j to 144j of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 10th signal input to the 10th buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th counters 141k to 144k in each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th counters 141m to 144m in each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 14th counters 141n to 144n of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 15th counters 141o to 144o of each area 141 to 144.

However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which a signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball into any of the mouth 33 and the second operating port 34 is input. Therefore, the 8th to 8th signals corresponding to the state information such as whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are input. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the above measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not the measurement target is made is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S2201, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current confirmation target counters are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the values of the current confirmation target counters, the correspondence-related information includes information indicating that the open / close execution mode is used, information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is used, and information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is used. It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is stored on the management side. It is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information in the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the 9th signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the 2nd state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information in the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is stored in a buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and in which a signal of information different from the state information is input. By confirming whether or not the numerical information is changed from "0" to "1", whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding total counter addition process is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for totalization in the totalization area 141 of the history memory 117 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 141a for totalization is the addition target. ..

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2209). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is used. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is used. It is subject to addition.

When the process of step S2203 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S2204, the negative determination is made in step S2210, or the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

As described above, the configuration is such that the game balls are stored as the number of times information is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment, the out port 24a such as step S1002 is used. The process of calculating the number of game balls entered into, the process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, and the number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 such as step S1005. It is not necessary to perform the calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 such as step S1006. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c are all general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute the process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the high frequency support mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence-related memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence-related memory 116, and the history memory 117, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, in which the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63 is temporarily stored, is also used as the memory for storing the ball entry history. Then, the management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I / F 111, and when a calculation trigger for various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 is accessed to read the ball entry history and read it. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The various calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. ..

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a 1 It is determined that an individual game ball has been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a winning history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is the value even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2305). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2308). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is performed by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that the sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2311). Further, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2312). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a winning history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is the value even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first actuating port detection sensor 46a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2315). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 5th bit D5 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is used for 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2319). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 6th bit D6 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one out port detection sensor 48a is used. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as an entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Be retained.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is played by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that the sphere has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is recorded in each ball entry section. It is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls entering the ball. As a result, every time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65, and transfers from the special electric winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the special electric winning device 32. The number of balls entered is read, the number of balls entered into the first operating port 33 from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65 is read, and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 is read from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65. The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using each of the read out numbers of balls. However, the number of each ball entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of each ball entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open. Further, since the number of each ball entered in the open / close execution mode and the number of each ball entered in the high frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment are described above. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first parameter to eighth parameter are written in the calculation result memory 131. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the operation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

It should be noted that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but the information on the number of each ball entered stored in the main RAM 65 as the ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by the transfer control by the main CPU 63. It may be configured as such. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the event that the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of the signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history in each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence-related memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a light emitting unit 151 for notification. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is directly controlled by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters by using the information of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60. The board box 60a is transparently formed, and the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 151 for notification is measured outside the board box 60a. A light emitting unit 151 for notification is provided so that it can be visually confirmed from the above. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, so that the light emitting unit 151 for notification does not require opening work of the board box 60a. It is possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

Signals of the same type as those in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The 6 signals are input, the 7th signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the 7th buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to these open / close execution modes, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, the signal related to the ball entry history is not input to the 8th to 15th buffers 122h to 122o.

What kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is determined by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 7th buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement target using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which the signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball is input. Therefore, the 8th to 15th buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the above measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not the measurement target is made is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S2401, "7" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o are added (step S2403). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, or when the process of step S2403 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2405). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the processing after step S2402 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an external output process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 include the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to Of the 152o, the number of counters for which the number of times information is output is set in the management side CPU 112 (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, as described above, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. Therefore, in step S2502, “7” is set in the output target counter. ..

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116 is read (step S2503), and the history is used. Among the counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the value of the current output target counter is read (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number of times information. Be the target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is the target for reading the number of times information.

After that, the information output process is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number of times information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read the number of times information about the correspondence information that is the output target this time.

After that, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2507). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the processing after step S2503 is executed for the output target corresponding to the value of the new output target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and as in the fifth embodiment, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special electric winning opening. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entered into the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as a calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as described later, so that the game area PA up to that point can be obtained simply by turning the power off and on. It becomes possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA by configuring the configuration so that a calculation trigger is generated every time the total number of game balls entered reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Will be.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counters for storing the ball entry history among the counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the counters 152a to 152g for the first to seventh buffers is read out. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o to be read out from the ball entry history by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the information on the entry history read in step S2602 and the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry history. In the main CPU 63, each ball entry history read in step S2602 by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64 is the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first. It is possible to specify which of the two operating ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602. ..

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S2603
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 "") Is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the various calculated parameters are in the first range (step S2604). When the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, affirmative determination is made in step S2604 assuming that the various calculated parameters are in the first range. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the first notification state setting process is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is in a blue light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the calculated parameters are in the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the 7th parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters are the first. Assuming that there are two ranges, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is in a yellow light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2606, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is in a red light emitting state.

In the light emitting state set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608, the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151. Continue until. Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit Even if 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponds to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 65. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. However, it is stored as the number of times information that the game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

A notification light emitting unit 151 for notifying the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not have to read the information stored in the history memory 117 to read the information of the game ball in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with a light emitting unit 151 for notification together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the MPU 62 and the light emitting unit 151 for notification.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the light emitting unit 151 for notification are executed not by the management side CPU 112 but by the main side CPU 63. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of various parameters are displayed. When neither the first range nor the second range is supported, the third notification state is set. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification pattern in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. It may be configured to maintain the light emitting state in. In this case, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151, it is possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA. ..

Further, instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 in the game hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration of the notification light emitting unit 151, and may be a display device having a display surface such as a symbol display device 41, and the speaker unit 54 may be used. May be. Further, the signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the normal figure display unit 38a of the normal figure unit 38 may also have a function as a light emitting unit 151 for notification. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other of them as in the above embodiment. Immediately after the start of supply of the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to execute the notification corresponding to the calculation result. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is satisfied. The configuration may be such that it is temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and restarted when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal map display unit 38a can also be used as a notification means for notifying the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the light emitting unit 151 for notification may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 behind the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each ball entry result to the management IC 66 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. ..

<13th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, left and right distribution nails 213,214 that distribute the course downstream of the game ball B1 to the left and right according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) on the game board 233 (FIG. 50). (FIG. 50) is provided, which is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The configuration of the game board 233 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a front view of the game board 233. The game board 233 in the present embodiment is different from the game board 24 in the first embodiment in that the game area PA is formed not only on the left side of the surface but also on the right side. As shown in FIG. 50, the game board 233 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 241, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing display unit 225, a normal drawing display unit 226, and the like are provided. It is provided. A total of three general winning openings 241 are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 233, and one through gate 35 is provided on each side. The other openings are provided one by one.

A detection sensor is provided in a one-to-one correspondence between the general winning opening 241 and the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating port 34, and each through gate 35. All of these detection sensors are provided on the back side of the game board 233, and the detection result is output to the main control device 60 (FIG. 5). As the detection sensor, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor that detects changes in the magnetic field is used, but if the winning of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) can be individually detected, the sensor to be used is It is optional, and for example, an optical sensor may be used. Here, the game ball B1 is a steel sphere having a diameter of 11 mm.

When the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 241, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is detected, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are given to the player as prize balls. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, three prize balls are generated when the ball enters the first operating port 33 and when the ball enters the second operating port 34. Further, the general winning opening 241 in the present embodiment plays the same role as the general winning opening 31 in the first embodiment, and 10 prizes are awarded when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 241. A sphere is generated. Further, when a ball is entered into the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are generated. However, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls in the operating ports 33 and 34 is different, for example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33. May be. Further, the number of prize balls in the special electric winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of prize balls is larger than the number of other prize balls, and for example, the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 241 may be smaller than the number of prize balls.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 233, and the game ball B1 that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, the game board 233 is provided with a large number of nails 228, 213, and 214 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball B1.

The special figure display unit 225 and the normal figure display unit 226 are provided as display units in a predetermined range. The area where the display unit is installed is an area inside the game area PA partitioned by using the inner rail portion 25, and is a game ball so that the game ball B1 does not flow in front of the front surface of the display unit. This is an area where the inflow of B1 is restricted. A special drawing display unit 225 and a normal drawing display unit 226 are provided on the front surface of the display unit. As a result, although the various display units 225 and 226 are provided in the game area PA, the game ball B1 is prevented from flowing down in front of the display units 225 and 226, and visibility from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured.

In the game board 233, the guide rail is composed of the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. A game ball launching mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is provided below the game board 233, and the game ball B1 launched by applying a force from the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) of the game ball launching mechanism 27 is guided as described above. The rail guides the player to the upper part of the game area PA. The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes an operation base provided so as to project forward, and an operation handle provided so as to be rotatably supported by the operation base, and the operation handle is rotated. Adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball B1 from the gaming ball launching mechanism 27.

As already described in the first embodiment, the front door frame 14 (FIG. 2) is provided so that the game board 233 covers the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 (FIG. 2). The front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 (FIG. 1) so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

The game board 233 is provided with a center frame 252 so as to define an opening 233a that makes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 3) visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided so as to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 233a.

Next, the arrangement of the nails 228, 213, and 214 provided on the game board 233 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the game board 233 is provided with a large number of nails 228, 213, 214. Here, the nails provided on the game board 233 of the present embodiment include a metal obstacle nail 228, which is a round nail used in a conventional pachinko machine, and a resin first left-right distribution member 215. There are three types: a first left-right distribution nail 213 having a second left-right distribution nail 213 and a second left-right distribution nail 214 having a second left-right distribution member 231 made of resin. Details of the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 will be described later.

The metal obstacle nail 228 has a cylindrical barrel portion, a head provided on the proximal end side of the barrel shaft portion, and a conical pointed head formed on the tip end side of the barrel shaft portion. Consists of. The obstacle nail 228 is in a state in which the tip of the head is buried behind the surface of the game board 233, and a part of the barrel portion and the head protrude from the surface of the game board 233. It is provided in. The length from the surface of the game board 233 to the free end (the end on the front side of the pointed head) of the obstacle nail 228 is 17 mm. Here, the front side is the window panel 52 side close to the player, and the back side is the game board 233 side far from the player.

The distance from the front surface of the game board 233 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is 18 mm. Further, as described above, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm. Therefore, there is a margin of 7 mm in the game area PA so that the game ball B1 can move in the depth direction. The position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction is a position where the solenoid 27c of the game ball launch mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) comes into contact with the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) when the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) applies a force to the game ball B1 to launch the game ball B1. It changes accordingly, and changes when the game ball B1 collides with the roof unit 253 or the decorative member on the game board 233 in the process of flowing down the game area PA.

The range in which the center of the game ball B1 can be located is a range from a place that is 5.5 mm ahead of the surface of the game board 233 to the window panel 52 side to a place that is 12.5 mm ahead. In the following, the range in which the game ball B1 can come into contact with the nails 228, 213, 214 on the game board 233 is defined as the contactable range of the game ball B1. The game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA may collide with the obstacle nail 228 in the flow-down process regardless of whether it is located on the game board 233 side or the window panel 52 side. The course after the collision of the game ball B1 is changed by the obstacle nail 228.

As described above, since the game area PA is formed not only on the left side of the game board 233 but also on the right side of the game board 233, the obstacle nail 228 is provided on the entire surface of the game board 233 as shown in FIG. Has been done. On the other hand, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 made of resin are arranged as nails constituting the guide nail groups 211 and 212 for guiding the game ball B1 to the actuation openings 33 and 34 in the game board 233. Here, the guide nail groups 211 and 212 are the left side guide nail group 211 composed of seven first left and right distribution nails 213 arranged in a row at equal intervals in the lower left side of the game board 233, and the game board 233. It is a general term for the right side guide nail group 212 consisting of seven second left and right distribution nails 214 arranged in a row at equal intervals in the lower right side of the above.

The left side guide nail group 211 is a nail row in which the first left and right distribution nail 213 located on the right side is provided below the first left and right distribution nail 213 adjacent to the left side. The nail row is a row extending in a direction inclined downward toward the right, and the angle between the row direction and the horizontal direction of the left guide nail group 211 is 30 °. The angle is an angle at which the game ball B1 can be guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 while gradually lowering the height of the game ball B1. Acting ports 33 and 34 exist on the extension line in the row direction of the left guide nail group 211. The space above the left guide nail group 211 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 in such a manner that the game ball B1 can pass through. Further, since the first left and right distribution nails 213 constituting the left side guide nail group 211 are lined up at intervals slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is arranged from the gap between the first left and right distribution nails 213. Can fall down. When the game ball B1 loses the speed in the left-right direction on the first left-right distribution nail 213, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the first left-right distribution nails 213, so that the game ball B1 distributes the first left-right distribution. It does not stay on the nail 213.

The right side guide nail group 212 is a row of nails in which the second left / right distribution nail 214 located on the left side is provided below the second left / right distribution nail 214 adjacent to the right side. The nail row is a row extending in a direction inclined downward toward the left, and the angle between the row direction and the horizontal direction of the right guide nail group 212 is 30 °. The angle is an angle at which the game ball B1 can be guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 while gradually lowering the height of the game ball B1. Acting ports 33 and 34 exist on the extension line in the row direction of the right guide nail group 212. The space above the right guide nail group 212 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 in such a manner that the game ball B1 can pass through. Further, since the second left and right distribution nails 214 constituting the right side guide nail group 212 are lined up at intervals slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is arranged from the gap between the second left and right distribution nails 214. Can fall down. When the game ball B1 loses the speed in the left-right direction on the second left-right distribution nail 214, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the second left-right distribution nails 214, so that the game ball B1 distributes the second left-right distribution. It does not stay on the nail 214.

Next, the structure of the first left-right distribution nail 213 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c). FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the first left-right distribution nail 213. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the first left-right distribution nail 213 is an elongated nail formed so as to extend in the axis 213c direction. The first left-right distribution nail 213 fixes the first left-right distribution member 215, which distributes the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides in the left-right direction, and the first left-right distribution member 215 to the surface of the game board 233. It is composed of a fixing member 216 for the purpose. The first left-right distribution member 215 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape extending in the direction of the axis 213c, and has a different inclination as a surface that can collide with the game ball B1 falling from above. It has two distribution surfaces 217a and 218a.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the first left-right distribution nail 213, the axis 213c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233, and the first left-right distribution member 215 projects from the surface of the game board 233. It is fixed to the game board 233. The length dimension of the first left / right distribution member 215 in the axis line 213c direction is 17 mm, and the first left / right distribution member 215 protrudes 17 mm into the game area PA in the first left / right distribution nail 213 fixed to the game board 233. ing. The first left-right distribution nail 213 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA may collide with the first left and right distribution nail 213, and the game ball B1 located on the front side may also collide with the first left and right distribution nail 213. In the following description, in the first left-right distribution nail 213 and the second left-right distribution nail 214 fixed to the game board 233, the end fixed to the game board 233 is described as a fixed end, and the game area PA is described. The protruding end is referred to as a free end.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the first left-right distribution member 215 has a first distribution unit 217 extending in the axis direction 213c and a free end side of the first distribution unit 217. It is composed of a second distribution portion 218 formed so as to extend in the axis direction 213c in a manner continuous with the side surface of the above. In a state where the first left and right distribution nails 213 are fixed to the game board 233, the boundary surface between the first distribution unit 217 and the second distribution unit 218 is parallel to the surface of the game board 233.

Since the length dimension of the first distribution unit 217 in the axis line 213c direction is 9 mm, the first distribution unit 217 is the game area PA in a state where the first left and right distribution nails 213 are fixed to the game board 233. It protrudes in the back half of. Further, the length dimension from the left end to the right end of the first distribution portion 217 is 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter. The first distribution unit 217 is provided with a first distribution surface 217a formed as an upper surface thereof in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the first distribution unit 217. The first distribution surface 217a is inclined downward toward the right, and the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides is repelled upward on the right side.

Further, since the length dimension of the second distribution unit 218 in the axis line 213c direction is 8 mm, the second distribution unit 218 is a game in a state where the first left and right distribution nails 213 are fixed to the game board 233. It projects to most of the front half of the region PA. Further, the length dimension from the left end to the right end of the second distribution portion 218 is 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter. The second distribution unit 218 is provided with a second distribution surface 218a formed as an upper surface thereof in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the second distribution unit 218. The second distribution surface 218a is inclined downward toward the left, and repels the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the upper left side.

Here, the barrel diameter of the barrel shaft portion of the metal obstacle nail 228 (FIG. 50) is 2 mm. As described above, the first left-right distribution member 215 is made of resin, but by making the size around the axis 213c larger than the barrel of the obstacle nail 228, it may break even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides. Has a strength that does not.

The first left-right distribution member 215 has side surfaces that are vertically facing each of a fixed end and a free end. Of these, the fixed end surface 215b, which is the side surface on the fixed end side, is formed with a first fixing hole 215a for inserting and fixing the fixing member 216. The shape of the first fixing hole 215a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (c). 51 (b) is a plan view of the first left-right distribution member 215, and FIG. 51 (c) is a rear view of the first left-right distribution member 215.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the first fixing hole 215a has an opening in the fixed end surface 215b of the first left and right distribution member 215, and is near the free end from the fixed end of the first left and right distribution member 215. It is a cylindrical hole formed in various aspects, and the depth of the first fixing hole 215a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 51 (c), the first fixing hole 215a is formed to be large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the first left-right distribution member 215. The first fixing hole 215a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the first left-right distribution member 215 to maintain the strength of the first left-right distribution member 215.

Next, a state in which the first left-right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b). FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the fixing member 216 for fixing the first left-right distribution member 215 to the game board 233, and FIG. 52 (b) is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. It is a vertical sectional view of the 1st left-right distribution nail 213 in the case.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the fixing member 216 has a cylindrical fixing barrel shaft portion 216a having a length dimension in the axis line 213c direction of 30 mm and a cone having a length dimension in the axis line 213c direction of 5 mm. It is composed of a fixed pointed head 216b and has a length dimension capable of stably supporting the first left-right distribution member 215 protruding from the surface of the game board 233. The body diameter of the fixing member 216 is the same as the inner diameter of the first fixing hole 215a, and the fixing member 216 can be fitted in such a manner that the surface is in close contact with the inner surface of the first fixing hole 215a.

The first left-right distribution member 215 and the fixing member 216 constituting the first left-right distribution nail 213 are separable. By applying an impact to the free end with a hammer or the like, the fixing member 216 is independently fixed to the game board 233. Then, the first left and right distribution member 215 is fixed to the fixing member 216 by fitting the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 into the first fixing hole 215a. As a result, the first left-right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233.

As shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the fixing member 216, the entire fixing tip 216b and a part of the fixing barrel shaft portion 216a are buried behind the surface of the game board 233. At the same time, the remaining portion of the fixing barrel shaft portion 216a is fixed to the game board 233 in such a manner that it projects in a substantially vertical direction from the surface of the game board 233. In the fixing member 216 fixed to the game board 233, the length dimension of the protruding portion from the surface of the game board 233 is a dimension capable of stably supporting the first left and right distribution member 215, and specifically. Is 15 mm. The first left-right distribution member 215 is attached to the game board 233 in such a manner that the distribution surfaces 217a and 218a face upward by fixing the surface of the protruding portion and the inner surface of the first fixing hole 215a with an adhesive. It is fixed.

Next, the course after the collision of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. First, a case where the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 217a will be described. FIG. 53A is an end view of the cut surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 233 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 233 and the window panel 52 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. do.

FIG. 53 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rebounding direction of the game ball B1 which flows down from above and collides with the first distribution surface 217a, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the first flow down from the upper left side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the bounce direction of the game ball B1 which collides with a distribution surface 217a. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), on the inner side of the game area PA, the first distribution surface 217a is inclined downward toward the right, so that the first distribution surface 217a flows down from above and becomes the first distribution surface 217a. A drag force having an upward component and a right component acts on the colliding game ball B1. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the right side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), a drag having an upward component and a right component also acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left side and collides with the first distribution surface 217a. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the right side. In this case, since the game ball B1 before the collision already has a velocity component in the right direction, the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left side and collides falls to the right of the game ball B1 that falls from directly above and collides. Proceed greatly to.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 218a will be described. FIG. 54A is an end view of the cut surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 233 and the window panel 52 collides with the second distribution surface 218a. do.

FIG. 54B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rebounding direction of the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the second distribution surface 218a, and FIG. 54C is an explanatory view that flows down from the upper left side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the bounce direction of the game ball B1 which collides with 2 distribution surface 218a. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), on the inner side of the game area PA, the second distribution surface 218a is inclined downward toward the left, so that the second distribution surface 218a flows down from above and becomes the second distribution surface 218a. A drag force having an upward component and a left component acts on the colliding game ball B1. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the left side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), a drag having an upward component and a left component also acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left side and collides with the second distribution surface 218a. In this case, the velocity component in the right direction of the game ball B1 before the collision decreases due to the influence of the left-hand component of the drag force received by the collision, so that the game ball B1 after the collision bounces slightly upward on the right side.

Next, the structure of the second left-right distribution nail 214 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c). FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the second left-right distribution nail 214. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the second left-right distribution nail 214 is an elongated nail formed so as to extend in the axial direction 214c. The second left-right distribution nail 214 fixes the second left-right distribution member 231 that distributes the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides in the left-right direction and the second left-right distribution member 231 to the surface of the game board 233. It is composed of a fixing member 216 for the purpose. The second left-right distribution member 231 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape extending in the direction of the axis 214c, and has a different inclination as a surface that can collide with the game ball B1 falling from above. It is provided with two distribution surfaces 232a and 234a.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the second left-right distribution nail 214, the axis line 214c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233, and the second left-right distribution member 231 projects from the surface of the game board 233. It is fixed to the game board 233. The length dimension of the second left / right distribution member 231 in the axis line 214c direction is 17 mm, and the second left / right distribution member 231 protrudes 17 mm into the game area PA in the second left / right distribution nail 214 fixed to the game board 233. ing. The second left-right distribution nail 214 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA may collide with the second left-right distribution nail 214, and the game ball B1 located on the front side may also collide with the second left-right distribution nail 214.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the second left-right distribution member 231 has a first distribution portion 232 formed so as to extend in the axis direction 214c and a free end side of the first distribution portion 232. It is composed of a second distribution portion 234 formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 214c in a manner continuous with the side surface of the above. In a state where the second left and right distribution nails 214 are fixed to the game board 233, the boundary surface between the first distribution section 232 and the second distribution section 234 is parallel to the surface of the game board 233.

Since the length dimension of the first distribution unit 232 in the axis line 214c direction is 9 mm, the first distribution unit 232 is the game area PA in a state where the second left and right distribution nails 214 are fixed to the game board 233. It protrudes in the back half of. Further, the first distribution portion 232 has a length dimension of 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter in the left-right direction. The first distribution unit 232 includes a first distribution surface 232a formed as an upper surface thereof in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the first distribution unit 232. The first distribution surface 232a is inclined downward toward the left, and repels the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the upper left side.

Further, since the length dimension of the second distribution unit 234 in the axis line 214c direction is 8 mm, the second distribution unit 234 is a game in a state where the second left and right distribution nails 214 are fixed to the game board 233. It projects to most of the front half of the region PA. Further, the second distribution portion 234 has a length dimension of 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter in the left-right direction. The second distribution unit 234 includes, as its upper surface, a second distribution surface 234a formed in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the second distribution unit 234. The second distribution surface 234a is inclined downward toward the right, and repels the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the upper right side.

The second left-right distribution member 231 is made of resin, but by making the size around the axis 214c larger than that of the barrel of the metal obstacle nail 228, the game ball B1 does not break even if it repeatedly collides. Has strength.

The second left-right distribution member 231 has a side surface facing each of the fixed end and the free end. Of these, the fixed end surface 231b, which is the side surface on the fixed end side, is formed with a second fixing hole 231a for inserting and fixing the fixing member 216. The shape of the second fixing hole 231a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c). FIG. 55 (b) is a plan view of the second left-right distribution member 231 and FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the second left-right distribution member 231.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the second fixing hole 231a has an opening in the fixed end surface 231b of the second left / right distribution member 231 and is near the free end from the fixed end of the second left / right distribution member 231. It is a cylindrical hole formed in various aspects, and the depth of the second fixing hole 231a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the second fixing hole 231a is formed to be large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the second left-right distribution member 231. The second fixing hole 231a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the second left-right distribution member 231 to maintain the strength of the second left-right distribution member 231.

The fixing member 216 constituting the second left / right distribution nail 214 is the same member as the fixing member 216 constituting the first left / right distribution nail 213 described above, and the second left / right distribution member 231 is the first left / right distribution. It is fixed to the game board 233 in the same way as the member 215. Specifically, the second left-right distribution member 231 constituting the second left-right distribution nail 214 and the fixing member 216 are separable. By applying an impact to the free end with a hammer or the like, the fixing member 216 is independently fixed to the game board 233. Then, the second left-right distribution member 231 is fixed to the fixing member 216 by using an adhesive so that the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 fits into the second fixing hole 231a. As a result, the second left and right distribution nails 214 are fixed to the game board 233 in such a manner that the distribution surfaces 232a and 234a face upward.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 collides with the second left-right distribution nail 214 will be described. The first distribution surface 232a of the second left-right distribution nail 214 has the same inclination as the second distribution surface 218a of the first left-right distribution nail 213. Specifically, since the first distribution surface 232a is inclined downward toward the left on the inner side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the first distribution surface 232a. A drag having an upward component and a left component acts on the. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the left side.

Further, a drag having an upward component and a left component also acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper right side and collides with the first distribution surface 232a. In this case, the velocity component in the right direction of the game ball B1 before the collision decreases due to the influence of the left-hand component of the drag force received by the collision, so that the game ball B1 after the collision bounces slightly upward on the right side.

Further, the second distribution surface 234a of the second left-right distribution nail 214 has the same inclination as the first distribution surface 217a of the first left-right distribution nail 213. Specifically, since the second distribution surface 234a is inclined downward toward the right on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the second distribution surface 234a. A drag force having an upward component and a right component acts on the. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the right side.

Further, a drag having an upward component and a right component also acts on the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper right side and collides with the second distribution surface 234a. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces upward on the right side. In this case, since the game ball B1 before the collision already has a velocity component in the right direction, the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left side and collides falls to the right of the game ball B1 that falls from directly above and collides. Proceed greatly to.

Next, the difference between the course of the game ball B1 after colliding with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 and the course of the game ball B1 after colliding with the obstacle nail 228 is based on FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c). I will explain. FIG. 56 (a) is a table showing the direction of the drag force received by the game ball B1 colliding with the first left-right distribution nail 213, and FIG. 56 (b) shows the game ball B1 colliding with the second left-right distribution nail 214. It is a table showing the direction of the drag force received, and FIG. 56 (c) is a table showing the direction of the drag force received by the game ball B1 colliding with the obstacle nail 228.

First, the first left-right distribution nail 213 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), a drag force having a rightward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a on the inner side of the game area PA, and the game area. A drag having a leftward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 218a on the front side of the PA. In the first left-right distribution nail 213, there are cases where the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the first left-right distribution nail 213 and the game ball B1 collides with the right side of the first left-right distribution nail 213. , The direction of the drag acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is the same.

Next, the second left-right distribution nail 214 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), a drag force having a leftward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 232a on the inner side of the game area PA, and the first 2 A drag force having a right-hand component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 234a on the front side of the game area PA of the left-right distribution nail 214. In the second left-right distribution nail 214, the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the second left-right distribution nail 214, and the game ball B1 collides with the right side of the second left-right distribution nail 214. , The direction of the drag acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is the same.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the game ball B1 that collides with the left surface of the obstacle nail 228 exerts a drag having a leftward component and an upward component, and the obstacle nail 228. A drag force having a rightward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the right surface of the ball. In the obstacle nail 228, when the game ball B1 collides with the back side of the obstacle nail 228 and when the game ball B1 collides with the front side of the obstacle nail 228, the drag force acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision The directions are the same.

In this way, by using the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214, the direction of the drag force acting on the game ball B1 that collides with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 is different depending on the position in the depth direction in the game area PA. By doing so, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be made different. Therefore, in the game area PA, compared with the obstacle nail 228 in which the course after the collision of the game ball B1 does not change regardless of whether the game ball B1 is located on the front side or the back side of the game area PA. The game ball B1 can be dispersed in a manner that increases the variation in the movement of the game ball B1. In this way, by preventing the movement of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in the conventional game board in which only the obstacle nail 228 is arranged as a nail for allocating the course of the game ball B1 is a behavior pattern in which the game ball B1 colliding with the left side of the obstacle nail 228 bounces to the left side. , And the game ball B1 that collides with the right side of the obstacle nail 228 bounces to the right side. On the other hand, by arranging the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 on the game board 233, the behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in which the game ball B1 colliding with the left side of the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 bounces to the right side. And the behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in which the game ball B1 colliding with the right side of the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 bounces to the left side can be added as a new behavior pattern of the game ball B1. By increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and preventing the movement of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, when the game ball B1 collides with the left and right distribution nails 213,214, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision changes according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. Further, as already described, in the game board 233 (FIG. 50) of the present embodiment, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided as guide nail groups for guiding the game ball B1 to the actuating openings 33 and 34. It is arranged as a part of 211 and 212.

The behavior when the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the first left and right distribution nails 213 constituting the left side guide nail group 211 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the back side on the left side guide nail group 211. As described above, the seven first left and right distribution nails 213 belonging to the left side guide nail group 211 are provided side by side in a row toward the working openings 33 and 34.

As described above, the distance between the first left and right distribution nails 213 constituting the left side guide nail group 211 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA receives a drag force in the upper right direction due to a collision with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nails 213 and is on the upper right side. It bounces off greatly. After the collision, the velocity component in the right direction of the game ball B1 increases, so that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap immediately to the right of the first left-right distribution nail 213 that has collided and is recovered from the out port 24a. The possibility of this is reduced. Further, since the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the right increases after the collision, the number of collisions with the first left-right distribution nail 213 required for the game ball B1 to reach the operating ports 33 and 34 is reduced. However, the possibility that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the two first left and right distribution nails 213 and is recovered from the out port 24a is reduced. In this way, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 by the left side guide nail group 211 with high probability.

Next, the behavior when the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 constituting the left side guide nail group 211 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). .. FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the front side on the left side guide nail group 211.

As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA receives a drag force in the upper left direction due to a collision with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nails 213 and is on the upper right side. It bounces back a little. After the collision, the velocity component in the right direction of the game ball B1 decreases due to the influence of the drag force in the opposite direction. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 will fall downward from the gap provided immediately to the right of the first left-right distribution nail 213 that has collided and will be recovered from the out port 24a. Further, since the velocity component of the game ball B1 in the right direction is reduced due to the collision, the number of collisions with the first left-right distribution nail 213 required for the game ball B1 to reach the operating ports 33 and 34 increases. do. Further, since the velocity component of the game ball B1 in the right direction decreases with each collision, the game ball B1 may fall downward from the gap between the two first left and right distribution nails 213 and be recovered from the out port 24a. Increases with each collision. As described above, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is guided to the operating openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 211 is low.

Next, FIG. 58 (a) shows the behavior of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the second left-right distribution nail 214 constituting the right side guide nail group 212. I will explain based on. FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the back side on the right side guide nail group 212. As described above, the seven second left and right distribution nails 214 belonging to the right side guide nail group 212 are provided side by side in a row toward the working openings 33 and 34.

As described above, the distance between the second left and right distribution nails 214 constituting the right side guide nail group 212 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA receives a drag force in the upper left direction due to a collision with the first distribution surface 232a of the second left and right distribution nails 214, and is on the upper left side. It bounces off greatly. After the collision, the velocity component in the left direction of the game ball B1 is increased under the influence of the drag force in the same direction. Therefore, the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the left increases, and the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap provided immediately to the left of the second left-right distribution nail 214 that has collided and is collected from the out port 24a. It is less likely to be done. Further, since the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the left increases after the collision, the number of collisions with the second left and right distribution nails 214 required to reach the operating ports 33 and 34 is reduced, and the game ball is used. The possibility that B1 falls downward from the gap between the two second left and right distribution nails 214 and is recovered from the out port 24a is reduced. In this way, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 by the right side guide nail group 212 with high probability.

Next, FIG. 58 (b) shows the behavior of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the second left-right distribution nail 214 constituting the right side guide nail group 212. I will explain based on. FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 located on the front side on the right side guide nail group 212.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA receives a drag force in the upper right direction due to a collision with the second distribution surface 234a of the second left and right distribution nails 214, and is on the upper left side. It bounces back a little. After the collision, the velocity component in the left direction of the game ball B1 decreases due to the influence of the drag force in the right direction. The possibility of falling into the outlet 24a and being recovered from the outlet 24a increases. Further, since the moving distance of the game ball B1 to the left decreases after the collision, the number of collisions with the second left-right distribution nail 214 required for the game ball B1 to reach the operating ports 33 and 34 increases. do. Then, since the velocity component of the game ball B1 to the left decreases each time the collision occurs, the game ball B1 can fall downward from the gap between the two second left and right distribution nails 214 and be recovered from the out port 24a. Sex increases. As described above, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is guided to the operating openings 33 and 34 by the right guide nail group 212 is low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b) and FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the operating port 33, Four obstacle nails 228 are arranged to win the 34. The four obstacle nails 228 repel the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and the game ball B1 located on the front side in the same manner. Therefore, even the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA operates with a high probability when it is guided to the obstacle nail 228 near the first operating port 33 by the guide nail groups 211 and 212. Win a prize in mouths 33 and 34.

In this way, by setting the nail provided in the vicinity of the first operating port 33 as an obstacle nail 228, the game ball B1 that has reached the vicinity of the operating ports 33 and 34 has a high probability of winning a prize, leaving a sense of security for the player. However, it is possible to make a difference in the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating openings 33 and 34 according to the position of the game area PA in the depth direction.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided with two distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, and 234a having different inclinations, and the two distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, and 234a are oriented upward. The nails 213 and 214 are provided on the game board 233. As a result, when the game ball B1 flowing down from above collides with the first distribution surfaces 217a and 232a, the game ball B1 rebounds in a manner different from the case where the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surfaces 218a and 234a. .. By using the left-right distribution nails 213 and 214, it is possible to change the course of the game ball B1 after the collision in a manner corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction. By increasing the pattern of dispersing the game ball B1 in the game area PA, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, by using the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 for the nails constituting the guide nail groups 211 and 212 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operating openings 33 and 34, the game ball B1 is used in the depth direction in the game area PA. The difference in position can be reflected in the result of the game. Compared with conventional gaming machines that cannot reflect the difference in the position of the gaming ball B1 in the depth direction in the gaming area PA in the game result, the variation of the movement of the gaming ball B1 in the gaming area PA is increased to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the resin left and right distribution members 215 and 231 constituting the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are larger than the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the metal obstacle nail 228. Further, the left and right distribution members 215 and 231 are formed with large fixing holes 215a and 231a, and the metal fixing members 216 are fitted in the fixing holes 215a and 231a. In this way, since the resin member is reinforced with the metal member over the entire area, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 have durability so as not to be damaged even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides. There is. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall for a long time, the number of maintenances for the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 can be minimized.

In the game board 233, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214, which occupy a larger area than the obstacle nail 228, are used only for some of the nails provided in the game board 233, which are largely related to the game result. An obstacle nail 228 is used for the remaining nails. Therefore, unlike the case where the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are used for all the nails provided on the game board 233, the game in the game area PA is secured while securing the number of nails that can be provided on the game board 233. The game result can be different depending on the position of the ball B1 in the depth direction.

Further, since the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided with fixing holes 215a and 231a, an embodiment in which the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 previously fixed to the game board 233 is fitted into the fixing holes 215a and 231a. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 can be fixed with. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are fixed to the fixing member 216 with an adhesive. At this time, the left and right distribution nails 213,214 are rotated around the fixing member 216 until the adhesive hardens, and the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, 234a of the left and right distribution nails 213,214 move upward. Since it can be adjusted so as to face, the game ball B1 flowing down from above can collide with the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, 234a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
In the game board 233 (FIG. 50) of the thirteenth embodiment described above, the region in which the guide nail groups 211 and 212 are arranged may be made of a detachable member. A case where the left side guide nail group 211 is detachable will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an enlarged view of the lower left front of the game board 235 composed of the left side guide member 255, which is the base on which the left side guide nail group 211 is detachable, and the seven first left and right distribution nails 213.

As shown in FIG. 59, the seven first left and right distribution nails 213 are fixed to the left side guide member 255. The left side guide member 255 is formed with three fixing protrusions 255a that enable the left side guide member 255 to be screwed to the game board 233, and the fixing protrusion 255a is screwed. A through hole is formed. Further, the game board 235 is formed with a hole into which the left side guide member 255 is fitted without a gap, and a recessed portion corresponding to the fixing protrusion 255a of the left side guide member 255 is formed at the edge of the hole of the game board 235. It is formed. A screw hole for screwing the left side guide member 255 is formed in the recessed portion.

In the assembly process of the pachinko machine 10, seven first left and right distribution nails 213 are fixed to the single left side guide member 255 that has been removed, and then the left side guide member 255 is attached to the game board 235 to project for fixing. The portion 255a is screwed to the recessed portion of the game board 233. In this way, the first left and right distribution nails 213 can be fixed to the game board 235 by integrating the seven first left and right distribution nails 213 so that they can be attached to the game board 235 at the same time. The work efficiency can be improved, and the fine adjustment of the mounting angle of the first left and right distribution nail 213 can be facilitated. In this configuration, the left side guide member 255 and the first left and right distribution nail 213 fixed to the left side guide member 255 may be integrally formed.

-In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 may be provided as so-called life nails located in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first operating port 33. A configuration in which the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are provided in the vicinity of the first operating port 33 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 236 in which the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged in the vicinity of the first operating port 33, and an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operating ports 33 and 34 of the game board 236. Four left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged in the vicinity of the upstream side of the operation ports 33 and 34.

Specifically, the second left and right distribution nails 214 are arranged near the upper left of the actuating openings 33 and 34, and the distance on the left side of the second left and right distribution nails 214 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The first left-right distribution nail 213 is arranged so as to be open. Since the gaps between the two left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper left of the operating ports 33 and 34 have a width that allows the game ball B1 to pass through, the game ball B1 is the two. It is configured so that it is not pinched between the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 and does not stop. Further, the first left and right distribution nails 213 are arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the actuating openings 33 and 34, and a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided on the right side of the first left and right distribution nails 213. A second left-right distribution nail 214 is arranged. Since the gap between the two left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper right of the operating ports 33 and 34 has a width that allows the game ball B1 to pass through, the game ball B1 is the two. It is configured so that it is not pinched between the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 and does not stop.

Most of the game balls B1 that collide with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper left of the operating openings 33 and 34 are guided by the obstacle nails 228 arranged on the left side of the game area PA. It is a game ball B1. The game ball B1 collides with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 from the upper left side. The game ball B1, which is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides with the outer first left and right distribution nails 213 on the upper left side of the operating openings 33 and 34, collides with the first distribution surface 217a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction and rebounds greatly to the right, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a high probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the inner side of the game area PA and collides with the inner second left and right distribution nails 214 on the upper left side of the operating openings 33 and 34 collides with the first distribution surface 232a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction and bounces slightly to the right, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a high probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34. Here, the outside is the side far from the operating ports 33 and 34, and the inside is the side close to the operating ports 33 and 34.

In this way, with respect to the game ball B1 on the back side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that collides with the first left and right distribution nail 213 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33 and 34 advances greatly to the right side and the operation port. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the inner second left and right distribution nails 214, which are relatively close to 33 and 34, advances slightly to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the outer first left / right distribution nail 213 on the upper left side of the operating openings 33 and 34, and the inner second left / right distribution nail 214. In both cases of collision with, there is a high probability that the operating ports 33 and 34 will win a prize.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the outer first left and right distribution nails 213 on the upper left side of the operating openings 33 and 34 collides with the second distribution surface 218a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction and bounces slightly to the right, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a low probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34. Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the inner second left and right distribution nails 214 on the upper left side of the operating openings 33 and 34 collides with the second distribution surface 234a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction and rebounds greatly to the right, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a low probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34.

As described above, with respect to the game ball B1 on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the first left and right distribution nail 213 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33 and 34 advances slightly to the right and the operation port. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 that collides with the second left and right distribution nails 214 on the inner side, which is relatively close to 33 and 34, advances greatly to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the outer first left / right distribution nail 213 on the upper left side of the operating openings 33 and 34, and the inner second left / right distribution nail 214. In both cases of collision with, there is a low probability that the operating ports 33 and 34 will be won.

On the other hand, most of the game balls B1 that collide with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper right of the operating openings 33 and 34 are guided by the obstacle nails 228 arranged on the right side of the game area PA. It is a game ball B1 that comes. The game ball B1 collides with the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 from above on the right side. The game ball B1, which is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides with the outer second left and right distribution nails 214 on the upper right side of the operating openings 33 and 34, collides with the first distribution surface 232a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction and rebounds greatly to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a high probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides with the inner first left and right distribution nails 213 on the upper right side of the operating openings 33 and 34 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction and bounces slightly to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a high probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34. Here, the outside is the side far from the operating ports 33 and 34, and the inside is the side close to the operating ports 33 and 34.

As described above, with respect to the game ball B1 on the back side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the second left and right distribution nail 214 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33 and 34 advances greatly to the left side and the operation port. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the inner first left and right distribution nails 213, which are relatively close to 33 and 34, advances slightly to the left. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the outer second left / right distribution nail 214 on the upper right side of the operating openings 33 and 34, and the inner first left / right distribution nail 213. In either case of collision with, there is a high probability that the operating ports 33 and 34 will be won.

Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the outer second left and right distribution nails 214 on the upper right side of the operating openings 33 and 34 collides with the second distribution surface 234a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction and bounces slightly to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a low probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34. Further, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the inner first left and right distribution nails 213 on the upper right side of the operating openings 33 and 34 collides with the second distribution surface 218a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction and rebounds greatly to the left, which is the direction toward the operating ports 33, 34, and has a low probability of winning a prize in the operating ports 33, 34.

As described above, with respect to the game ball B1 on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 colliding with the second left and right distribution nail 214 on the outer side relatively far from the operation ports 33 and 34 advances slightly to the left side and the operation port. The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 that collides with the first left and right distribution nails 213 on the inner side, which is relatively close to 33 and 34, advances greatly to the left side. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the outer second left / right distribution nail 214 on the upper right side of the operating openings 33 and 34, and the inner first left / right distribution nail 213. In both cases of collision with, there is a low probability that the operating ports 33 and 34 will be won.

In this way, by providing the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first operating port 33, the game ball B1 is arranged in a manner corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the front-rear direction. Can have different probabilities of winning in the actuation ports 33, 34. On the other hand, in the case of a conventional pachinko machine in which the obstacle nail 228 is arranged immediately before the operating port, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating port is not affected by the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the front-rear direction. ..

Therefore, by arranging the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 immediately before the actuating openings 33 and 34, the obstacle nail 228 is arranged immediately before the actuating port 33 and 34, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. , It is possible to enhance the fun of the game by enriching the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 immediately before the operating ports 33 and 34.

The left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 may be used as so-called ceiling nails arranged near the top of the game board 233. In this configuration, the game ball B1 that collides with the top nail is distributed to either the left side or the right side of the game board 233 according to the position in the depth direction of the game area PA. By using a different game board, the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down the left side wins the operating openings 33 and 34 and the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down the right side wins the operating ports 33 and 34 are different. The course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be distributed according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, in the shape of the left and right distribution nails 213,214, the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a, 234a are provided over the entire longitudinal direction of the left and right distribution nails 213,214. It is not limited to the shape that is present. For example, instead of the first left-right distribution nail 213, the first left-right distribution nail 242 in which the distribution surfaces 244a and 245a are provided only in the collision-possible range of the game ball B1 may be used.

The first left-right distribution nail 242 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b). FIG. 61A is a perspective view of the first left / right distribution nail 242, and FIG. 61B is an end view of the cut surface of the first left / right distribution nail 242 cut in a plane perpendicular to the game board 233. .. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the first left-right distribution nail 242 is a nail formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 242a. The first left-right distribution nail 242 includes a first left-right distribution member 243 provided with distribution surfaces 244a and 245a for distributing the course after the collision game ball B1 collides, and the first left-right distribution member 243. Is composed of a fixing member 216 for fixing the game board 237 (FIG. 61 (b)). Here, the fixing member 216 constituting the first left-right distribution nail 242 is the same member as the fixing member 216 constituting the first left-right distribution member 215 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The first left-right distribution member 243 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape, which is formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 242a. The first left-right distribution member 243 includes a fixed-end-side non-contact portion 246 whose upper surface is a fixed-end-side non-contact surface 246a, which is a horizontal plane on the fixed-end side that does not come into contact with the game ball B1. On the front side of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246, the first distribution portion 244 having the first distribution surface 244a inclined downward toward the right is the fixed end side non-contact portion 246. It is integrally formed in a continuous manner. Further, on the front side of the first distribution unit 244, a second distribution unit 245 having a second distribution surface 245a inclined downward toward the left as an upper surface thereof is attached to the first distribution unit 244. It is integrally formed in a continuous manner. Then, on the front side of the second distribution portion 245, the free end side non-contact portion 247 having the free end side non-contact surface 247a, which is a horizontal plane on the free end side that does not come into contact with the game ball B1, is the second swing. It is integrally formed with the branch portion 245 in a continuous manner.

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the length dimension in the axis 242a direction of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 located on the fixed end side of the first left and right distribution member 243 is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. In addition to being 5 mm, the length dimension of the first distribution portion 244 adjacent to the front side of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 in the axis line 242a (FIG. 61 (a)) direction is 4 mm. Further, the height dimension of the non-contact portion 246 on the fixed end side is the same as the height dimension of the right end of the first distribution portion 244.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the length dimension of the second distribution portion 245 adjacent to the front side of the first distribution portion 244 in the axis line 242a (FIG. 61 (a)) direction is 4 mm. At the same time, the length dimension in the axis 242a (FIG. 61 (a)) direction of the free end side non-contact portion 247 adjacent to the free end side of the second distribution portion 245 is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. It is 4 mm. Further, the height dimension of the non-contact portion 247 on the free end side is the same as the height dimension of the left end of the second distribution portion 245. Here, in a state where the first left-right distribution nail 242 is fixed to the game board 237, the side surface on the fixed end side, the boundary surface between the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 and the first distribution portion 244, and the first distribution. The boundary surface between the portion 244 and the second distribution portion 245 and the boundary surface between the second distribution portion 245 and the free end side non-contact portion 247 are both parallel to the surface of the game board 237.

As already described in the thirteenth embodiment, the contactable range of the game ball B1 is from the place where the game board 237 is moved 5.5 mm from the surface of the game board 237 to the window panel 52 side, and from the surface of the game board 237 to the window panel 52 side. It is up to the place where it moved 12.5 mm. On the other hand, since the length dimension of the non-contact portion 246 on the fixed end side in the first left-right distribution member 243 in the axis line 242a direction is set to be shorter than 5.5 mm, the game located on the back side of the game area PA. The ball B1 can collide only with the first distribution surface 244a, and the game ball B1 does not collide with the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a. Further, the length dimension (4 mm) of the non-contact portion 247 on the free end side of the first left and right distribution member 243 in the axis line 242a direction and the length from the free end of the first left and right distribution member 243 to the back surface of the window panel 52. Since the total of the dimension (1 mm) is set shorter than 5.5 mm, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA can collide only with the second distribution surface 245a, and the game is played. The sphere B1 does not collide with the non-contact surface 247a on the free end side.

In this way, the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 having the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a which is a horizontal plane as the upper surface is provided at the fixed end of the first left and right distribution nail 242, and the axis line 242a direction of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 is provided. By making the length dimension of the game ball B1 shorter than the radius of the game ball B1, the first left and right while eliminating the possibility that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA comes into contact with the non-contact surface 246a on the fixed end side. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a large error regarding the angle will occur when the distribution nail 242 is attached. Specifically, when the first left-right distribution nail 242 is attached to the game board 237, the distribution surfaces 244a and 245a are raised by adjusting the rotation angle with reference to the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a which is a horizontal plane. It becomes easy to fix the first left-right distribution nail 242 to the game board 237 while facing.

-In the thirteenth embodiment described above, instead of the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214, a reversing nail 251 that reverses the position of the colliding game ball B1 in the game area PA may be used. The shape of the reversing nail 251 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d).

62 (a) is a perspective view of the reversing nail 251 and FIG. 62 (b) is an end view of the cut surface when the reversing nail 251 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 238. c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the resistance force received by the game ball B1 that collides with the first inverted surface 254a of the inverted nail 251. FIG. 62 (d) is a game in which the game ball B1 collides with the second inverted surface 254b of the inverted nail 251. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the resistance force that a sphere B1 receives.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the reversing nail 251 is a nail formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 251a. The reversing nail 251 is composed of a reversing member 254 having reversing surfaces 254a and 254b that change the course of the colliding game ball B1 on the upper surface, and a fixing member 216 for fixing the reversing member 254 to the game board 238. Become. The fixing member 216 constituting the reversing nail 251 is the same member as the fixing member 216 constituting the first left-right distribution nail 213 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The reversing member 254 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape and is formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 251a. The upper surface of the reversing member 254 has four vertices, and is composed of a first reversing surface 254a and a second reversing surface 254b. Of these, the first inverted surface 254a is a triangular plane having vertices on the right back, left back, and right front, and the top on the right back is higher than the other two vertices. Therefore, the first inversion surface 254a is inclined downward toward the left and the front.

Further, the second inverted surface 254b is a triangular plane having vertices on the left front side, the left back side, and the right front side, and the vertices on the left front side are located higher than the other two vertices. Therefore, the second inversion surface 254b is inclined downward toward the right and the rear.

The length dimension of the reversing member 254 in the axis 251a direction is 17 mm. As shown in FIG. 62B, the reversing nail 251 is formed with a fixing hole into which the fixing member 216 is fitted, and is driven into the inner wall of the fixing hole and the game board 238 to be fixed. The reversing member 254 is fixed to the game board 238 by fixing the outer wall of the fixing member 216 with an adhesive. In the state where the reversing nail 251 is fixed to the game board 238, the entire reversing member 254 protrudes from the surface of the game board 233, so that the reversing nail 251 is in front of the game ball B1 located at the back side of the game area PA. It may collide with both the game ball B1 located on the side.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the area of the first reversing surface 254a is larger than the area of the second reversing surface 254b on the fixed end side of the reversing nail 251. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the first inversion surface 254a. Since the first inverted surface 254a is inclined downward toward the left and the front, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the game ball B1 that collides with the first inverted surface 254a has a component in the left direction and an upper portion. It jumps forward to the left under the drag force of the directional component and the front component.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62A, the area of the second reversing surface 254b is larger than the area of the first reversing surface 254a on the free end side of the reversing nail 251. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the second inversion surface 254b. Since the second inverted surface 254b is inclined downward toward the right and the rear, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the game ball B1 that collides with the second inverted surface 254b has a component in the right direction and an upper portion. It jumps up to the right rear due to the drag force that has the component in the direction and the component in the back direction.

As described above, the reversing nail 251 is a nail having a high probability of bouncing the game ball B1 colliding on the back side to the front side and a nail having a high probability of bouncing the game ball B1 colliding on the front side to the back side. Therefore, for example, the reversing nail 251 is provided upstream of the left side guide nail group 211 in the game board 233 of the thirteenth embodiment, and the game ball B1 collides with the reversing nail 251 upstream of the left side guide nail group 211 in the depth direction. By reversing the positional relationship, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA will win the operating ports 33 and 34, and the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side will win the operating ports 33 and 34. Can be changed.

By using the reversing nail 251 that greatly changes the probability of winning the operating ports 33 and 34, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and improve the interest of the game. Further, by using the reversing nail 251, the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction may be biased toward the front side or toward the back side due to a malfunction of the game ball launch mechanism 27 (FIG. 2). Even in such a case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating openings 33 and 34 is greatly biased.

<14th embodiment>
In the thirteenth aspect of the present embodiment, the front and rear distribution nails 262 (FIG. 63) and the rear nails 271 (FIG. 63) are provided on the game board 261 (FIG. 63) instead of the distribution nails 213 and 214. It is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board 261 of the present embodiment and an enlarged view of the upstream portion of the left side guide nail group 281 in the game board 261. As shown in FIG. 63, in the game board 261 of the present embodiment, the obstacle nail 228, the front-rear distribution nail 262, and the game ball B1 flowing down on the left side of the game area PA are guided to the operating ports 33 and 34. A left side guide nail group 281 composed of a rear nail 271 and a rear nail 271 is provided. Here, the front-rear distribution nail 262 is a nail that changes the position of the game ball B1 that collides in the game area PA in the depth direction. Further, the rear nail 271 is a nail that can collide only with the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 261 side) of the game area PA.

The left guide nail group 281 is located diagonally above the left side of the working openings 33 and 34. Since the space above the left side guide nail group 281 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 can pass over the left side guide nail group 281. A front-rear distribution nail 262 and a rear nail 271 are arranged upstream of the left guide nail group 281.

As shown in FIG. 63, since four front-rear distribution nails 262 are lined up in a row at the most upstream of the left side guide nail group 281, most of the game balls B1 guided by the left side guide nail group 281 are. It collides with one of the front-rear distribution nails 262 in the upstream portion. The game ball B1 that collides with the front-rear distribution nail 262 reaches the downstream of the left side guide nail group 281 in a state where the positions in the depth direction are distributed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 63, the row of the front-rear distribution nails 262 formed by the four front-rear distribution nails 262 is referred to as the first guide nail row 282.

The four front-rear distribution nails 262 constituting the first guide nail row 282 are arranged in a row in such a manner that the front-rear distribution nail 262 on the right side is located below the adjacent front-rear distribution nail 262 on the left side. .. The distance between the front-rear distribution nails 262 constituting the first guide nail row 282 is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1 of 11 mm, and the game ball B1 does not fall downward from the gap between the two front-rear distribution nails 262. be.

Further, the upper surface of the front-rear distribution nail 262 is a flat surface having no inclination in the left-right direction, but as shown in FIG. 63, the front-rear distribution nail 262 is in a state of being rotated by approximately 20 ° clockwise in front view. It is fixed. Therefore, in the first guide nail row 282, the upper surface of the front-rear distribution nail 262 is inclined in a manner of a gentle downward slope toward the right. As a result, even if the game ball B1 loses the velocity component in the right direction on the first guide nail row 282, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball B1 stays in place.

Immediately downstream of the first guide nail row 282, a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided, and three rear nails 271 are arranged in a row downstream of the gap. The row of rear nails 271 formed by the three rear nails 271 is referred to as a second guide nail row 283. In the second guide nail row 283, the three rear nails 271 are lined up without a gap, and the game ball B1 does not fall downward from the gap between the two rear nails 271.

Further, four obstacle nails 228 are provided downstream of the second guide nail row 283 without leaving a gap, and the third guide nail row 284 is formed. Further, downstream of the four obstacle nails 228, a plurality of obstacle nails 228 are lined up in a row with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The row of the obstacle nails 228 continues until just before the actuating openings 33 and 34, and guides the game ball B1 to the actuating openings 33 and 34.

In this embodiment, all the right guide nails arranged on the right side of the game board 261 are composed of obstacle nails 228.

Next, the structure of the front-rear distribution nail 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d). 64 (a) is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution nail 262, FIG. 64 (b) is a plan view of the front-rear distribution member 263 constituting the front-rear distribution nail 262, and FIGS. ) Is an end view of the cut surface when the front-rear distribution nail 262 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the front-rear distribution nail 262 is an elongated nail formed so as to extend in the axial direction 262c. The front-rear distribution nail 262 includes a front-rear distribution member 263 that distributes the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides in the depth direction, and a fixing member 216 for fixing the front-rear distribution member 263 to the surface of the game board 261. And, it is composed of. The front-rear distribution member 263 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape extending in the direction of the axis 262c, and is a first vibration having a different inclination as a surface that can collide with the game ball B1 falling from above. It is provided with a dividing surface 264a and a second distribution surface 265a.

As shown in FIG. 63, the front-rear distribution nail 262 is provided on the game board 261 in such a manner that the axis 262c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261 and the front-rear distribution member 263 protrudes from the surface of the game board 261. It is fixed. The length dimension of the front-rear distribution member 263 in the axis 262c direction is 17 mm, and the front-rear distribution member 263 protrudes 17 mm from the game area PA in the front-rear distribution nail 262 fixed to the game board 261. Since the front-rear distribution nail 262 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1, the front-rear distribution nail 262 can collide with the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and is located on the front side. Can collide with sphere B1. In the following description, in the state of being fixed to the game board 261, the end fixed to the game board 261 is used as the fixed end of the front-rear distribution nail 262, and the end protruding to the game area PA is used for front-back distribution. The free end of the nail 262.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the front-rear distribution member 263 has a first distribution portion 264 on the fixed end side having a first distribution surface 264a and a second free end side having a second distribution surface 265a. It is composed of two distribution units 265. The length dimension of the first distribution portion 264 in the axis line 262c direction is 9 mm, and the length dimension of the second distribution portion 265 in the axis line 262c direction is 8 mm. Further, the first distribution surface 264a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and the second distribution surface 265a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front. Then, in a state where the front-rear distribution nail 262 is fixed to the game board 261, the boundary surface between the first distribution section 264 and the second distribution section 265 is parallel to the surface of the game board 261 and the boundary surface is parallel to the surface of the game board 261. Is located in the center of the game area PA in the depth direction.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the front-rear distribution member 263 has a square side surface at each of the fixed end and the free end. Of these, the fixed end surface 263b, which is the side surface on the fixed end side, is formed with a fixing hole 263a for fitting the fixing member 216 when fixing the front-rear distribution member 263 to the game board 261. The fixing hole 263a is a cylindrical hole having an opening on the side surface of the front-rear distribution member 263 on the fixed end side, and is formed in a manner extending from the fixed end to the vicinity of the free end of the front-rear distribution member 263. Yes, the depth of the fixing hole 263a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the fixing hole 263a is formed to be large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the front-rear distribution member 263. The fixing hole 263a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the front-rear distribution member 263 to maintain the strength of the front-rear distribution member 263.

Next, a state in which the front-rear distribution nail 262 is fixed to the game board 261 will be described. The fixing member 216 constituting the front-rear distribution nail 262 is the same member as the fixing member 216 constituting the first left-right distribution nail 213 described in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d), in the fixing member 216, the entire fixing tip head 216b and a part of the fixing barrel shaft portion 216a are deeper than the surface of the game board 261. While being buried on the side, the remaining portion of the fixing barrel shaft portion 216a is fixed to the game board 261 so as to project substantially vertically from the surface of the game board 261. In the fixing member 216 fixed to the game board 261, the length dimension of the protruding portion from the surface of the game board 261 is 15 mm. The front-rear distribution member 263 is fixed to the game board 261 in such a manner that the distribution surfaces 264a and 265a face upward by fixing the outer wall of the protruding portion and the inner wall of the fixing hole 263a with an adhesive.

As shown in FIG. 64 (c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 261 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 261 and the window panel 52 collides with the first distribution surface 264a. do. On the inner side of the game area PA, the first distribution surface 264a is inclined downward toward the rear, so that the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the first distribution surface 264a has an upward component. And the drag with the components in the back direction works. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision rebounds in the back direction and flows down the back side of the game area PA downstream.

Further, the game ball B1 flowing down the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA collides with the second distribution surface 265a. Since the second distribution surface 265a is inclined downward toward the front on the back side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the second distribution surface 265a has an upward component. And the drag that has the component in the front direction works. As a result, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces toward the front side and flows down the front side of the game area PA downstream.

Next, the relationship between the rear nail 271 and the game ball B1 in the game area PA will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c). FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the rear nail 271, and FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the rear nail 271 when cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the rear nail 271 is composed of a cylindrical barrel shaft portion 271a and a conical pointed head 271b. The diameter of the barrel shaft portion 271a and the diameter of the bottom surface of the pointed head 271b are both approximately 2 mm, which is the same as the barrel diameter of the obstacle nail 228. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the rear nail 271, the entire pointed head 271b and a part of the barrel shaft portion 271a are buried behind the surface of the game board 261 and the trunk shaft portion 271a. The game board 261 is fixed in such a manner that a part of the game board 261 protrudes in a substantially vertical direction.

In the rear nail 271 fixed to the game board 261, the length from the surface of the game board 261 to the front end of the protrusion of the rear nail 271 is 6 mm. Here, the distance from the tip of the protruding portion of the rear nail 271 fixed to the game board 261 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is 12 mm, and the game ball B1 having a diameter of 11 mm is sandwiched between the rear nail 271 and the window panel 52. It is a structure that does not occur when it is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the game ball B1 having a diameter of 11 mm flowing down the back side of the game area PA along the surface of the game board 261 collides with the rear nail 271 and changes the traveling direction. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA along the inner surface of the window panel 52 does not collide with the rear nail 271, so that the traveling direction is maintained as it is. And head downstream.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered the space above the left guide nail group 281 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b). FIG. 66 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a course in the left side guide nail group 281 of the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA, and FIG. 66 (b) is a position on the front side of the game area PA. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the course in the left side guide nail group 281 of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 66A, when the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA enters the space above the left side guide nail group 281, the game ball B1 constitutes the first guide nail row 282. It collides with one of the four front-rear distribution nails 262 and bounces off. At this time, since the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 264a (FIG. 64 (a)) of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 has a high probability of flowing down the back side of the game area PA downstream.

The game ball B1 that collides with the front-rear distribution nail 262 constituting the first guide nail row 282 and bounces off the front-rear distribution nail 262 and the second guide nail row 283 located at the downstream end of the first guide nail row 282. When jumping over the gap with the rear nail 271 located at the end, the game ball B1 enters the space above the second guide nail row 283. When the game ball B1 is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides with any of the three rear nails 271 constituting the second guide nail row 283 and bounces off, the game ball B1 bounces off the third guide nail row 284. Is guided toward the actuation ports 33 and 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66B, when the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA enters the space above the left guide nail group 281, the game ball B1 enters the first guide nail row 282. It collides with one of the four front-rear distribution nails 262 and bounces off. At this time, since the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 265a (FIG. 64 (a)) of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 has a high probability of flowing down along the back surface of the window panel 52 downstream. ..

The game ball B1 that collided with the second distribution surface 265a and bounced off the front-rear distribution nail 262 located at the downstream end of the first guide nail row 282 and the rear nail 271 located at the upstream end of the second guide nail row 283. When jumping over the gap, the game ball B1 enters the space above the second guide nail row 283. If the game ball B1 is moving along the back surface of the window panel 52 and does not collide with any of the three rear nails 271 constituting the second guide nail row 283, the game ball B1 is the rear nail 271 and the window. It slips through between the panel 52 and falls, and is collected at the out port 24a.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game board 261 is provided with front-rear distribution nails 262 that distribute the course after the collision to the back side and the front side of the game area PA according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides. With this configuration, the course after the collision can be divided either along the game board 261 or along the window panel 52 for the game ball B1 located near the center in the depth direction of the game area PA. Downstream of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 is located on the game board 261 side of the game area PA and on the window panel 52 side of the game area PA, respectively. The second guide nail row 283 is set so that the course of the game ball B1 is different. Therefore, the course downstream of the game ball B1 can be different depending on the course distributed by the front-rear distribution nail 262. In this way, by arranging the second guide nail row 283 downstream of the front-rear distribution nail 262, the course downstream of the game ball B1 can be set according to the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the front-rear direction. It can be configured to change. Compared with the configuration in which only the position in the left-right direction in the game area PA affects the course downstream of the game ball B1, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the rear nails 271 forming a space through which the game ball B1 can pass are arranged between the free end of the protruding portion and the back surface of the window panel 52 when provided on the game board 261 to be arranged with the second guide nail row 283. Therefore, the course of the game ball B1 located on the game board 261 side is changed, and the course of the game ball B1 located on the window panel 52 side is not changed, and the course downstream of the game ball B1 is different. Can be. By using the rear nail 271 as the nail constituting the second guide nail row 283, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and improve the interest of the game.

<Another form of the 14th embodiment>
In the 14th embodiment described above, instead of the configuration in which the three rear nails 271 are arranged as the second guide nail row 283, the rear nails are fixed to the game board 261 from the surface of the game board 261 to the window panel 52 side. In addition to protruding by the same length as 271, one inclined member having the same inclined surface as the angle at which the rear nails 271 are lined up in the second guide nail row 283 may be arranged. By arranging the inclined member, it moves along the surface of the game board 261 without changing the course of the game ball B1 moving along the surface on the back side of the window panel 52. It is possible to change the course of the game ball B1. In this case, the inclined member can be fixed to the game board 261 more easily than when the three rear nails 271 are provided side by side on the game board 261.

In the 14th embodiment described above, all the nails constituting the second guide nail row 283 and the third guide nail row 284 are obstacle nails 228, and the first guide nail row 282 and the first guide nail row 284. The rear nail 271 may be arranged in the gap between the two guide nail rows 283 and the rear nail 271. In this case, the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA is guided by the left side guide nail group 281 and wins the operating openings 33 and 34 is a conventional game machine using only the obstacle nail 228 as a nail. It is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA is guided by the left side guide nail group 281 and wins a prize in the operating port while keeping the same level as the above.

In the 14th embodiment described above, the shape of the front-rear distribution nail 262 is the upper surface of the front-rear distribution nail 262, and the surface arranged on the tip side is inclined upward from the base end to the tip end. In addition, the surface on the upper side of the front-rear distribution nail 262, which is arranged on the proximal end side, may have a shape in which the surface is inclined downward from the proximal end toward the distal end.

For example, in the above-mentioned front-rear distribution nail 262, the first distribution unit 264 located on the fixed end side is located on the free end side and the second distribution unit 265 located on the free end side. A nail located on the fixed end side may be used as a front-rear distribution nail. That is, in the above-mentioned front-rear distribution nail 262, a nail having a shape in which the first distribution portion 264 and the second distribution portion 265 are interchanged may be used as the front-rear distribution nail. A front-rear distribution nail in which the two upper inclined surfaces are inclined downward toward the center is referred to as a concave front-rear distribution nail.

When the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the concave front-rear distribution nail, the course downstream of the game ball B1 is changed to the front side of the game area PA. Further, when the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA collides with the concave front-rear distribution nail, the course downstream of the game ball B1 is changed to the back side of the game area PA. That is, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the concave front-rear distribution nail can be reversed. For example, if all the game balls B1 launched toward the game area PA are located behind the game area PA due to a defect in the game ball launch mechanism 27, or all the game balls B1 to be launched are located in the game area PA. In the case where it is located on the front side of the game ball B1, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the concave front-rear distribution nail is reversed, so that the game ball B1 is located on the front side with respect to the number of game balls B1 located on the back side. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ratio of the number of game balls B1 is significantly biased.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment described above, four concave front-rear distribution nails are arranged on the game board 261 instead of the four front-rear distribution nails 262 constituting the first guide nail row 282. Unlike the 14th embodiment described above, the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA is operated with high probability by the first guide nail row 282, the second guide nail row 283, and the third guide nail row 284. The game ball B1 that is guided toward the mouths 33 and 34 and flows down the back side of the game area PA can be recovered from the out mouth 24a with high probability.

By configuring the configuration so that the course in the downstream direction of the game ball B1 changes according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1, only the position in the left-right direction in the game area PA affects the course in the downstream direction of the game ball B1. Compared with the configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 and improve the interest of the game.

In the 14th embodiment described above, instead of the front-rear distribution nail 262, a nail that guides the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction in only one direction may be provided on the game board 261. For example, by providing the game board 261 with a front side guide nail having only an inclined surface having a downward slope toward the front side of the game area PA, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the front side guide nail can be determined. It can be guided to the front side. Further, by disposing the back side guide nail having only the inclined surface having a downward slope toward the back side of the game area PA on the game board 261, the game ball B1 colliding with the back side guide nail is arranged in the depth direction. The position can be guided to the back side.

In the game board 261 of the 14th embodiment described above, the first and second front-rear distribution nails 262 from the upstream of the first guide nail row 282 are replaced with front side guide nails, and the third and fourth front and rear guide nails are used. By replacing the distribution nail 262 with the back side guide nail, the game ball B1 that collides with the first guide nail row 282 at a relatively shallow position in the upstream part of the left side guide nail group 281 wins the operating ports 33 and 34. It is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 collides with the first guide nail row 282 at a relatively deep position and reduce the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating openings 33 and 34. In this way, by making the winning probability different according to the collision position of the game ball B1 in the first guide nail row 282, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game. It can be improved.

-In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the rear nail 271 may be configured to have an inclined surface that gives a drag having a component in a predetermined direction to the colliding game ball B1. For example, the rear nail 271 in the fourteenth embodiment described above may be a right guide nail having an upper surface inclined downward toward the right. By providing the right guide nail on the game board 261, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides and accelerates to the right, and the game ball B1 located on the front side does not collide. The course of the game ball B1 can be assigned according to the embodiment. As a result, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is reflected in the course in the left-right direction of the game ball B1, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, for example, the rear nail 271 in the fourteenth embodiment described above may be a front guide nail having an upper surface inclined downward toward the front. By providing the front guide nail on the game board 261, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA moves to the front side due to the collision, and the game ball B1 located on the front side does not collide. The position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction can be changed. As a result, the number of game balls B1 located on the front side can be increased in the game area PA. For example, by providing the first left-right distribution nail 213 in the thirteenth embodiment described above downstream of the front guide nail, there are many game balls B1 that collide with the second distribution surface 218a and are distributed to the left. can do. Further, for example, by providing the second left-right distribution nail 214 in the thirteenth embodiment described above downstream of the front guide nail, there are many game balls B1 that collide with the second distribution surface 234a and are distributed to the right. It can be configured. In this way, by providing a forward guide nail upstream of the means for allocating the course of the game ball B1 in an manner corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction, the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA It is possible to increase the variation and improve the interest of the game.

In the 14th embodiment described above, instead of the rear nail 271, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA has a shape in which it easily collides, and the game ball B1 located on the back side does not easily collide. The front priority member 291 may be arranged on the game board 261. The front priority member 291 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b). FIG. 67A is a plan view of the front priority member 291 and FIG. 67B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 in the left side guide nail group 281 including the front priority member 291.

As shown in FIG. 67A, the front priority member 291 fixes a plate member 292 on which only the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA can collide with the plate member 292 and the plate member 292 to the game board 261. It is composed of a first support member 293 and a second support member 294 for the purpose. The plate member 292 is a rectangular parallelepiped resin plate formed so as to extend in the left-right direction. The horizontal dimension of the upper surface of the plate member 292 with which the game ball B1 can collide is 36 mm, which is longer than three times the diameter of the game ball B1, and the length dimension in the depth direction is 5.5 mm, which is the same as the radius of the game ball B1. be. Further, the plate member 292 has a thickness of 6 mm and has a strength that does not break even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides with the game ball B1.

In the plate member 292, in order to fix the first support member 293, a first support hole 295 having an inner diameter and a depth of 4 mm is formed at a distance of 3 mm from the left end, and the second support member. In order to fix the 294, a second support hole 296 having an inner diameter and a depth of 4 mm is formed at a distance of 3 mm from the right end.

The first support member 293 and the second support member 294 are the same member. The support members 293 and 294 have a cylindrical support barrel shaft portion 293a, 294a having a length dimension in the axis lines 293c and 294c direction of 28 mm, and a conical support having a length dimension in the axis lines 293c and 294c direction of 5 mm. It is composed of a tip head 293b and 294b. Since the body diameters of the support members 293 and 294 are 4 mm, which is the same as the inner diameters of the support holes 292a and 292b, the first support member 293 can be fitted in the first support hole 295 in such a manner that there is no gap. The 2 support member 294 can be fitted in the second support hole 296 in such a manner that there is no gap.

The plate member 292 constituting the front priority member 291 and the support members 293 and 294 are separable. By applying an impact to the free end with a hammer or the like, the separated support members 293 and 294 are fixed to the game board 233. Then, a part of the protrusion of the first support member 293 is fitted into the first support hole 295, and a part of the protrusion of the second support member 294 is fitted into the second support hole 296. By fixing the plate member 292 to the support members 293 and 294, the front priority member 291 is fixed to the game board 233.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the support members 293 and 294, the entire support tip heads 293b and 294b and a part of the support barrel shaft portions 293a and 294a are more than the surface of the game board 233. While being buried in the back side, the remaining portions of the supporting barrel shaft portions 293a and 294a are fixed to the game board 261 so as to project substantially vertically from the surface of the game board 261. In the support members 293 and 294 fixed to the game board 261, the length dimension of the protruding portion from the surface of the game board 261 is 15 mm. The plate member 292 is fixed to the game board 261 by fixing the outer wall of the protruding portion and the inner walls of the support holes 292a and 292b with an adhesive.

In the state of being fixed to the game board 261, the distance between the first support member 293 and the second support member 294 is 22 mm, which is twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the rear end of the plate member 292 is a game. It is 11.5 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 from the surface of the board 261.

In the game board 261 of the 14th embodiment, when the three rear nails 271 constituting the second guide nail row 283 are replaced with the front priority member 291 without changing the inclination of the upper surface, FIG. 67B is shown. As shown in the above, there is a high probability that the game ball B1 distributed to the back side in the upstream first guide nail row 282 will fall downward from the gap between the first support member 293 and the second support member 294, and the front side. The probability that the game ball B1 distributed to the side collides with the plate member 292 and enters the space above the third guide nail row 284 increases.

In this way, by making the course of the game ball B1 located on the front side different from the course of the game ball B1 located on the back side, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be increased, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in that a repulsive nail 322 (FIG. 68) is provided on the game board 321 (FIG. 68) instead of the distribution nails 213 and 214. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

In the game board 321 of the present embodiment, a repulsive nail 322 is arranged in addition to the obstacle nail 228 as a nail for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball B1. First, the position of the repulsive nail 322 on the game board 321 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a front view of the game board 321 and an enlarged view of the upstream portion of the left side guide nail group 323 arranged on the game board 321.

As shown in FIG. 68, the game board 321 is provided with a guide nail group composed of a plurality of nails 228 and 322 in order to guide the game ball B1 to the operating ports 33 and 34. In the guide nail group, the left guide nail group 323 and the game ball B1 arranged to guide the game ball B1 from the left side to the operating openings 33 and 34 located at the lower center of the game board 321 and the game ball B1 are played from the right side. It is composed of a group of right guide nails 324 arranged to guide the operating ports 33 and 34 located at the lower center of the board 321.

The obstacle nail 228 and the repulsive nail 322 constituting the left side guide nail group 323 are arranged in one direction, and the arrangement direction has an inclination of 30 ° downward to the right. Further, the obstacle nail 228 and the repulsive nail 322 constituting the right side guide nail group 324 are arranged in one direction, and the arrangement direction has an inclination of 30 ° downward to the left. ..

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 68, the left side guide nail group 323 is divided into a first nail row 331 located at the uppermost stream and a second nail row 332 located downstream of the first nail row 331. .. In the first nail row 331, four repulsive nails 322 are lined up in a row in a direction having a downward gradient of 30 ° toward the right. In the first nail row 331, the distance between the adjacent repulsive nails 322 is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not fall downward from between the two repulsive nails 322.

Further, in the second nail row 332, 13 obstacle nails 228 are lined up in a row in a direction having a downward gradient of 30 ° toward the right. The gap between the repulsive nail 322 located at the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the obstacle nail 228 located at the upstream end of the second nail row 332 is set to 13 mm, which is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. The game ball B1 may fall downward from the gap. In particular, when the bounce of the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsive nail 322 constituting the first nail row 331 is small, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the first nail row 331 and the second nail row 332. Then, there is a high possibility that the game board 321 will be collected from the out port 24a provided at the bottom of the game board 321.

Next, the shape of the repulsive nail 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b). FIG. 69 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the repulsive nail 322, and FIG. 69 (b) is a vertical sectional view of the repulsive nail 322. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the repulsive nail 322 is an elongated nail formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 322a. The restitution nail 322 has a low coefficient of restitution and a high restitution member 333 having a surface that repels the colliding game ball B1 smallly, and a high coefficient of restitution that has a larger coefficient of restitution than the surface of the low repulsion member 333 and repels the colliding game ball B1 greatly. It comprises a shaft member 334 having a repulsion portion 334d.

The shaft member 334 is a metal member provided with a cylindrical free end side trunk shaft portion 334a formed so as to extend in the axis 322a direction on the free end side. On the inner side of the free end side trunk shaft portion 334a, a cylindrical fixed end side trunk shaft portion 334b is integrally formed by extending in the axis 322a direction in a manner having a trunk diameter larger than that of the free end side trunk shaft portion 334a. Has been done. Further, on the inner side of the fixed end side trunk shaft portion 334b, a conical pointed head 334c has an apex on the axis 322a and is integrally formed with the fixed end side trunk shaft portion 334b in a continuous manner.

The diameter of the free end side trunk shaft portion 334a is 2 mm, and the length dimension in the axial direction is 8 mm. Further, the diameter of the fixed end side trunk shaft portion 334b is 6 mm, and the length dimension in the axial direction is 22 mm. The fixed end side trunk shaft portion 334b includes a high repulsion portion 334d protruding toward the front side of the surface of the game board 321 and a buried portion 334e buried in the back side when the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321. Consists of. Further, the pointed head 334c has a sharp tip, and in a state where the pointed head 334c is pressed against the surface of the game board 321, an impact is applied to the free end of the repulsive nail 322 with a hammer or the like. The repulsive nail 322 can be fixed to the game board 321.

The low-resilience member 333 is a member made of low-resilience urethane having a cylindrical shape formed so as to extend in the axis direction 322a. The diameter of the low-resilience member 333 is 6 mm, and the length dimension in the axis 322a direction is 8 mm. Therefore, in a state where the repulsive nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the boundary between the low repulsion member 333 and the high repulsion portion 334d is located at the center of the game area PA in the depth direction. The low-resilience member 333 is formed with a mounting hole 333a that penetrates the center of the low-resilience member 333 in the direction of the axis 322a. The mounting hole 333a is a cylindrical hole having an inner diameter of 2 mm. As shown in FIG. 69A, the free end side trunk shaft portion 334a of the shaft member 334 is inserted into the mounting hole 333a. As a result, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the low repulsion member 333 is fixed to the fixed end side trunk shaft portion 334b to become a repulsion nail 322. The low-resilience member 333 is not limited to the low-resilience urethane as long as it is a material that reduces the rebound of the game ball B1 that collides with it and is durable. For example, the low-resilience member 333 may be made of silicon resin.

Next, the course of the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsive nail 322 fixed to the game board 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (d). 70 (a) and 70 (c) are end views of the cut surface when the repulsive nail 322 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the game board 321. FIG. 70 (b) is a game ball that flows down from the upper left and collides. FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the high repulsion portion 334d shown for explaining the course after the collision of B1, and FIG. 70 (d) is for explaining the course after the collision of the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left and colliding. It is a cross-sectional view of the low-resilience member 333 and the free end side trunk shaft portion 334a shown.

As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the repulsive nail 322 is driven and fixed so that the axis 322a is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 321. Here, the depth of the game area PA sandwiched between the surface of the game board 321 and the back surface of the window panel 52 is 18 mm. As shown in FIG. 70A, the repulsive nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321 in such a manner that the buried portion 334e and the pointed head 334c of the shaft member 334 are buried behind the surface of the game board 321. .. In a state where the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the high repulsion portion 334d is exposed on the back side of the game area PA, and the low repulsion member 333 is exposed on the front side.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70A, the game ball B1 flowing down the inner side of the game area PA collides with the high repulsion portion 334d having a large coefficient of restitution and rebounds greatly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the game ball B1 having an initial velocity pointing to the right and an initial velocity pointing downward and colliding with one point on the upper side of the high repulsion portion 334d from the upper left side is It has a rightward velocity slightly less than the initial rightward velocity, and an upward velocity slightly less than the initial downward velocity.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA collides with the low coefficient of restitution member 333 and rebounds slightly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the game ball B1 having an initial velocity pointing to the right and an initial velocity pointing downward and colliding with one point on the upper side of the low repulsion member 333 from the upper left side is It has a rightward velocity that is significantly less than the initial rightward velocity, and an upward velocity that is significantly less than the initial downward velocity.

Next, the course after the collision of the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsive nail 322 constituting the first nail row 331 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b). FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 after the collision when the game ball B1 collides with the high repulsion portion 334d of the repulsion nail 322, and FIG. 71 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1. Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 after the collision when the repulsive nail 322 collides with the low repulsion member 333.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the high repulsion portion 334d of the repulsion nail 322 constituting the first nail row 331. The game ball B1 rebounds greatly after colliding with the high repulsion portion 334d having a large coefficient of restitution. Therefore, the game ball B1 after the collision is guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 by the second nail row 332 without falling downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332. The probability of being nailed is high.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the low repulsion member 333 of the repulsion nail 322 constituting the first nail row 331. The game ball B1 rebounds slightly after colliding with the low-repulsion member 333 having a small coefficient of restitution. Therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball B1 after the collision will fall downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 and be recovered from the out port 24a.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The repulsion nail 322 has a configuration in which a high repulsion portion 334d having a large coefficient of restitution is provided on the tip end side and a low repulsion member 333 having a small restitution coefficient is provided on the proximal end side. By disposing the repulsive nail 322 on the game board 321, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision can be changed according to the position in the depth direction in the game area PA. For this reason, only the obstacle nail 228 is arranged on the game board 321, and the game is compared with a conventional pachinko machine in which the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA does not affect the course of the game ball B1. It is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the area PA and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the repulsive nail 322 is used for the first nail row 331 constituting the upstream portion of the left side guide nail group 323, and between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332. The configuration is such that a gap having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is set. Therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA will be guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 by the second nail row 332 after colliding with the first nail row 331. Further, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA will fall downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 after colliding with the first nail row 331. Is expensive.

As described above, since the probability that the game ball B1 is guided to the actuation openings 33 and 34 differs depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction, the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is different. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine 10 in which the position of the game ball B1 does not affect the course of the game ball B1, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the repulsive nails 322 are used for all the nails constituting the first nail row 331. By arranging a plurality of repulsive nails 322 at intervals shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1, the probability that the game ball B1 is guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 by the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA. It can be greatly reflected in the difference between.

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
-In the fifteenth embodiment described above, instead of the repulsive nail 322, an inclined nail having a plurality of inclined surfaces inclined in the same direction at different angles may be used. Specifically, the inclined nail is located on the fixed end side and has a first inclined surface having a downward slope of 30 ° toward the right, and is located on the free end side and is on the right. It is a member consisting of a second inclined portion having a second inclined surface having a downward gradient of 15 ° toward. The game ball B1 that collides with the inclined nail always receives a drag force that bounces to the right, but the velocity component in the right direction after the collision changes according to the collision position in the depth direction. Specifically, a drag force having a large rightward component and a small upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the first inclined surface at the back side of the game area PA. On the other hand, a drag force having a small rightward component and a large upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the second inclined surface on the front side of the game area PA.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, by using the inclined nail instead of the repulsive nail 322, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA wins the operating openings 33 and 34 is increased. , It is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side will win a prize. By configuring the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction to be reflected in the game result, the interest of the game is improved as compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the left-right direction is reflected in the game result. Can be planned.

<16th Embodiment>
The game board 341 (FIG. 72) of the present embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in that a front-rear distribution table 351 (FIG. 72) for distributing the game ball B1 in the depth direction of the game area PA is arranged. is doing. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted. The nails provided on the game board 341 of the present embodiment are all obstacle nails 228.

First, the configuration of the game board 341 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a front view of the game board 341.

As shown in FIG. 72, the game board 341 is provided with a center frame 252 so as to define an opening 341a that makes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 341a, and a stage unit 354 provided to define the lower edge of the opening 341a. ing. At the left end of the stage unit 354, a ball entrance 363 that enables the game ball B1 existing in the game area PA to move onto the stage unit 354 is formed, and the game ball B1 that has entered the ball entrance 363 is formed. It is guided onto the stage unit 354. The stage unit 354 has a rolling surface 357 on its upper surface on which the game ball B1 can roll. The rolling surface 357 has a width such that two game balls B1 are arranged side by side in the depth direction, and has a smooth streamline shape symmetrical with respect to the central portion. Specifically, a mountain portion 358 that rises upward is formed in the central portion of the rolling surface 357, and a valley portion 359 that is recessed downward is formed on the left and right sides thereof. Further, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 are located above the central portion.

The left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 and the mountain portion 358 have a shape inclined downward toward the back side. On the other hand, the valley portion 359 has a shape inclined downward toward the front side. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has reached the top of the valley portion 359 in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley portion 359 and is discharged from the leading edge of the valley portion 359 toward the lower side of the stage unit 354. ..

A guide passage 366 is formed below the mountain portion 358 in the stage unit 354, an entrance to the guide passage 366 is formed at the rear of the mountain portion 358, and the mountain portion 358 is inclined downward toward the entrance. It has become. The guide passage 366 is inclined downward toward the front, and the game ball B1 introduced into the guide passage 366 is discharged below the stage unit 354 through the guide passage 366. The exit of the guide passage 366 is located vertically above the first operating port 33. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the guidance passage 366 can easily enter the first operating port 33.

Further, as described above, the game board 341 is provided with a front-rear distribution table 351 that distributes the game ball B1 in the depth direction of the game area PA. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72, the front-rear distribution table 351 is arranged on the left side of the ball inlet 363 formed at the left end of the stage unit 354 and on the upper left side of the left guide nail group 355. ing.

Here, a detailed position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is defined. In the present embodiment, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is a game ball B1 in which the center of the game ball B1 is located at a position less than 9 mm from the surface of the game board 341. Further, the game ball B1 located at the innermost side of the game area PA is a game ball B1 in a state where the game ball B1 is in contact with the surface of the game board 341 or in a state similar thereto. Further, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is a game ball B1 in which the center of the game ball B1 is located at a position less than 9 mm from the back surface of the window panel 52. Further, the game ball B1 located on the foremost side of the game area PA is a game ball B1 in a state in which the game ball B1 is in contact with the back surface of the window panel 52 or in a state equivalent thereto.

The front-rear distribution table 351 is a table for distributing the game ball B1 to either the innermost side or the frontmost side of the game area PA, and the front-rear distribution table 351 is a game distributed to the innermost side. The ball B1 is fixed to the game board 341 in such a manner that the ball B1 moves onto the stage unit 354 through the ball entrance 363.

73 (a) is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution table 351 and FIG. 73 (b) is a plan view of the front-rear distribution table 351. Further, FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d) are end view views of the cut surface when the front-rear distribution table 351 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 341. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the front-rear distribution table 351 is a table that is both plate-shaped and made of resin, and its surface is a game area PA on which a game ball B1 that rolls on the front-rear distribution table 351 is placed. It has an inclination to distribute to either the innermost side or the frontmost side of the plastic. The inclination mode of the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73 (b) and 73 (c).

As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the front-rear distribution table 351 is formed so that the length dimension from the upstream end to the downstream end is approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B1. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the front-rear distribution table 351 has a buried portion 351a buried behind the surface of the game board 341 in a state where the front-rear distribution table 351 is mounted on the game board 341. And a protrusion 351b projecting toward the front side of the surface of the game board 341. The game board 341 is formed with a fixing hole for fixing the front-rear distribution table 351, and an adhesive is used in such a manner that the buried portion 351a of the front-rear distribution table 351 fits into the fixing hole. The front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the protruding portion 351b is formed from the surface of the game board 341 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. Therefore, the protruding portion 351b can come into contact with both the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA. Further, the buried portion 351a has substantially the same depth dimension as the depth dimension of the protrusion 351b so that the game ball B1 can withstand the impact even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides with the protrusion 351b.

As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the front-rear distribution table 351 surface is the upstream half of the front-rear distribution table 351 surface and the rolling distribution surface 371 which is a horizontal plane, and the back side of the downstream half surface. It is composed of a first downstream surface 372, which is a half surface, and a second downstream surface 373, which is a front half surface of the downstream half surface.

Returning to FIG. 73A, a specific inclination mode of the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 will be described. As shown in FIG. 73A, in a state where the front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341, the first downstream surface 372 has an inclination that becomes a downward slope toward the back side, and also has an inclination. The second downstream surface 373 has an inclination that becomes a downward slope toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341 in a state where the rolling distribution surface 371 is slightly rotated so as to have a downward gradient of 3 ° toward the right. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73A, when the game ball B1 that rolls on the rolling distribution surface 371 toward the downstream side is guided to the back side of the game area PA in the process of rolling. It is guided to the first downstream surface 372, and when it is guided to the front side in the process of rolling, it is guided to the second downstream surface 373.

As shown in FIG. 72, a first guide nail 228a and a second guide nail 228b for guiding the game ball B1 to the rolling distribution surface 371 are provided around the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 351 in the game board 341. A third for preventing the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 from jumping upward and rolling the game ball B1 in contact with the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351 for several seconds. A guide nail 228c and the like are provided. The first guide nails 228a are lined up in two rows with a gap slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. The two rows of the first guide nails 228a guide the game ball B1 that has entered between the rows to the rolling distribution surface 371 from diagonally upper right, and the rows of the first guide nails 228a are provided by the front-rear distribution table 351. It prevents the game balls B1 other than the distributed game balls B1 from entering the space above the stage unit 354 from the ball entrance 363 that is open toward the game area PA.

When the game ball B1 guided by the first guide nail 228a collides with the upper left side of the rolling distribution surface 371 of the game board 341, the velocity component in the left direction of the game ball B1 disappears and the right direction is obtained. A second guide nail 228b for giving the velocity component of the above is arranged. The second guide nail 228b is located 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371.

When the second guide nail 228b is set at a position lower than the center of gravity of the game ball B1 on the rolling distribution surface 371, the second guide nail 228b and the game ball B1 guided on the rolling distribution surface 371 from diagonally above to the right. The point where the second guide nail 228b collides with the second guide nail 228b is located at a position lower than the center of gravity of the game ball B1, and the velocity component of the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 in the left direction cannot be sufficiently reduced. there is a possibility. In this case, the game ball B1 passes over the second guide nail 228b and falls to the lower left. Further, when the second guide nail 228b is set at a position higher than the height of the game ball B1 existing on the rolling distribution surface 371, the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371 is set. May pass under the second guide nail 228b, move to the left, and fall downward without colliding with the second guide nail 228b.

On the other hand, the point where the second guide nail 228b located 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371 collides with the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371 is the center of gravity of the game ball B1. It is a point above. Therefore, the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 from the upper right side passes above or below the second guide nail 228b, advances to the left, and is prevented from falling from the rolling distribution surface 371. The game ball B1 guided from the upper right can be bounced to the right (downstream side).

Further, the second guide nail 228b located 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371 is a second game ball in a state where the game ball B1 is already present on the rolling distribution surface 371. When B1 is guided to the rolling distribution surface 371, it does not come into contact with the second game ball B1. In this case, the second game ball B1 falls from above the rolling distribution surface 371 to the lower left without reaching the rolling distribution surface 371. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the front-rear distribution table 351.

A plurality of third guide nails 228c are provided above the downstream portion of the rolling distribution surface 371 and above the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 with a gap slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Has been done. After being guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 by the first guide nail 228a, the game ball B1 that collides with the second guide nail 228b and advances to the right is the surface of the third guide nail 228c and the front-rear distribution table 351. Invade the narrow space between. On the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351, the game ball B1 collides with the third guide nail 228c multiple times to lose the velocity component in the vertical direction, and the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351 is turned to the right along the inclination. Move.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the game ball B1 which is guided to the first downstream surface 372 by rolling the rolling distribution surface 371 of the front-rear distribution table 351 fixed to the game board 341 is a game area. It is distributed to the innermost side of PA. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), the game ball B1 which has been rolled on the rolling distribution surface 371 and guided to the second downstream surface 373 is distributed to the frontmost side of the game area PA. In this way, the game ball B1 existing at a random position in the depth direction of the game area PA rolls on the front-rear distribution table 351 and has an extreme relationship of being the innermost side or the frontmost side. It is distributed to one of the two positions.

Next, the course of the game ball B1 after being sorted by the front-rear distribution table 351 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an enlarged view of the left central portion of the game board 341 (FIG. 72). As described above, the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side in the front-rear distribution table 351 moves onto the rolling surface 357 through the ball inlet 363 formed at the left end of the stage unit 354.

Since the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, when the game ball B1 distributed by the front-rear distribution table 351 rolls on the rolling surface 357, the game is played. The momentum of the ball B1 is insufficient and the ball B1 does not fall from the valley portion 359 provided in front of the mountain portion 358 toward the lower part on the front side. Further, on the rolling surface 357, the width in the left-right direction of the valley portion 359 in which the game ball B1 can fall forward is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 357. The ratio to is set low. Further, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the mountain portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. That is, the game ball B1 that rolls on the rolling surface 357 does not easily fall forward from the valley portion 359.

The game ball B1 rolls on the rolling surface 357 while accelerating from the left end of the stage unit 354 to reach the mountain part 358. In the mountain portion 358, the game ball B1 is inclined downward toward the rear so as to easily enter the entrance of the guide passage 366 formed in the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side by the front-rear distribution table 351 has a high probability of winning the first operating port 33.

On the other hand, the game ball B1 distributed to the front side in the front-rear distribution table 351 falls downward without entering the ball entrance 363. The game ball B1 can be guided to the actuation openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 355, but the obstacle nail 228 is being guided toward the actuation openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 355. When the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap, the game ball B1 is collected from the out opening 24a without winning a prize in the operating openings 33 and 34. In the game board 341, the probability that the game ball B1 guided by the left guide nail group 355 wins the operating ports 33, 34 is that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 has the operating ports 33, 34. It is lower than the probability of winning a prize.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The front-rear distribution table 351 is configured to distribute the game ball B1 to either the innermost side or the frontmost side according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 on the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 351. Then, whether or not the game ball B1 moves onto the stage unit 354 through the ball entrance 363 is determined according to the distribution result. The game ball B1 that has moved onto the stage unit 354 has a higher probability of winning the operating ports 33 and 34 than the game ball B1 that has not moved onto the stage unit 354.

That is, by disposing the front-rear distribution table 351 on the game board 341 in such a manner that only the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side enters the ball entrance 363 of the stage unit 354, the upstream of the front-rear distribution table 351. The game result can be different depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the left-right direction is reflected in the game result, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the game result becomes monotonous. It can be prevented and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the game board 341, above the front-rear distribution table 351 has a row spacing slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 and two rows in a manner toward the rolling distribution surface 371 of the front-rear distribution table 351. The first guide nail 228a of the above is provided. By using the first guide nail 228a, the game ball B1 can be guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 in one row.

Further, on the upper left side of the rolling distribution surface 371, a second guide nail 228b is provided at a height higher than the center of gravity of the game ball B1 on the rolling distribution surface 371 and lower than the upper end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 from deviating to the left, and to prevent a plurality of game balls B1 from staying above the rolling distribution surface 371. Can be done.

A third guide nail 228c is provided above the downstream portion of the rolling distribution surface 371 and above the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 with a gap slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Has been done. As a result, the game ball B1 guided on the front-rear distribution table 351 is rolled in a state of being in contact with the front-rear distribution table 351 and its position in the depth direction is the innermost side or the frontmost side of the game area PA. It can be distributed to either side.

<Another form of the 16th embodiment>
The position of the front-rear distribution table 351 in the game board 341 of the 16th embodiment described above is not limited to the vicinity of the upstream side of the stage unit 354. For example, the left side guide nail group 382 is composed of the first left and right distribution nail 213 (FIG. 51 (a)) already described in the thirteenth embodiment, and is located near the upstream side of the left side guide nail group 382. The front-rear distribution table 351 may be arranged. The configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 381 in this configuration. As shown in FIG. 75, the game board 381 is provided with a left side guide nail group 382. Four first left and right distribution nails 213 are provided in the upstream portion of the left side guide nail group 382, and seven obstacle nails 228 are provided in the downstream portion. Further, the front-rear distribution table 351 described in the 16th embodiment is arranged upstream (left side) of the left side guide nail group 382. The game ball B1 is distributed to either the innermost side or the frontmost side by the front-rear distribution table 351.

FIGS. 76A and 76B are enlarged views of the game board 341 around the front-rear distribution table 351 and the left side guide nail group 382. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side of the game area PA by the front-rear distribution table 351 comes into contact with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nails 213 in order. In order to receive a force in the direction, the game ball B1 is guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 with a high probability and wins a prize. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76B, the game ball B1 distributed to the frontmost side of the game area PA by the front-rear distribution table 351 comes into contact with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nails 213. Since the game ball B1 receives a force in the opposite direction, the game ball B1 has a high probability of falling downward from the gap between the first left and right distribution nails 213 and being recovered from the out port 24a.

In this way, even if the front-rear distribution table 351 is arranged near the upstream side of the left side guide nail group 382, the game result differs depending on the position of the game ball B1 upstream of the front-rear distribution table 351 in the front-rear direction. Can be. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the left-right direction is reflected in the game result, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the game result becomes monotonous. It can be prevented and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the front-rear distribution table 351 in the 16th embodiment described above, the front-rear distribution table 391 in which a groove for distributing the game ball B1 is formed on the upper surface may be used. The front-rear distribution table 391 having this configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

FIG. 77A shows a groove for guiding the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA to the innermost side and guiding the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA to the front side. It is a perspective view of the front-rear distribution table 391 provided. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), on the upper surface of the front-rear distribution table 391, one wide groove is formed on the back side and the front side of the upstream portion 391a. The groove on the back side is the innermost guide groove 391b for guiding the game ball B1 to the innermost side in the downstream part, and the groove on the front side is for guiding the game ball B1 to the front side in the downstream part. The frontmost guide groove 391c.

The game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is configured to fit into the innermost guide groove 391b of the upstream portion 391a, and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is on the frontmost side of the upstream portion 391a. It fits in the guide groove 391c. Therefore, by using the front-rear distribution table 391, the game ball B1 located on the back side in the upstream of the front-rear distribution table 391 is guided to the innermost side in the downstream, and the game ball B1 located on the front side in the upstream side is guided. Can be guided to the foremost side in the downstream.

Since the course in the depth direction of the game ball B1 can be divided into two ways according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1, the conventional position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 does not affect the course of the game ball B1. Compared with the configuration of the pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the behavior of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, FIG. 77 (b) shows a front-rear distribution table provided with a groove for guiding the game ball B1 located on the back side to the frontmost side and guiding the game ball B1 located on the front side to the backmost side. It is a perspective view of 392. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), on the upper surface of the front-rear distribution table 392, one wide groove is formed on the back side and the front side of the upstream portion 392a. The groove on the back side is the frontmost crossing groove 392e for guiding the game ball B1 to the frontmost side in the downstream part, and the groove on the front side is for guiding the game ball B1 to the backmost side in the downstream part. It is the innermost crossing groove 392d.

The game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is configured to fit into the frontmost crossing groove 392e of the upstream portion 392a, and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is the innermost side of the upstream portion 392a. It is configured to fit into the intersection groove 392d. Therefore, by using the front-rear distribution table 392, the game ball B1 located on the back side upstream of the front-rear distribution table 392 is guided to the front side most downstream, and the game ball located on the front side upstream. B1 can be guided to the innermost side on the downstream side.

In this way, the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction can be reversed by the front-back distribution table 392. By arranging a configuration in which the game result differs depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction downstream of the front-rear distribution table 392, the game ball B1 rolls on the front-rear distribution table 392. By doing so, the game result can be reversed. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 on the front-rear distribution table 392, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<17th embodiment>
The sixteenth aspect is that the game board 421 (FIG. 78) of the present embodiment is provided with a position change passage 423 (FIG. 78) for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA. It is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the 16th embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 421 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 421 in the present embodiment and an enlarged view of the vicinity of the position change passage 423 in the game board 421. As shown in FIG. 78, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is located at the center of the game board 421, and the display surface 41a is visible from the opening 421a as in the 16th embodiment. The opening 421a is defined by the center frame 252. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 421a, and a stage unit 354 provided to define the lower edge of the opening 421a. It has. Here, the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in the present embodiment has the same shape as the rolling surface 357 described in the 16th embodiment.

In the game board 421, a position change passage 423, which is a straight passage having a total length substantially twice the diameter of the game ball B1, is provided on the left side of the display surface 41a. The position change passage 423 is a passage that takes in the game ball B1 located above from the entrance, changes the position of the game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 in the depth direction, and then discharges the game ball B1 downward from the exit. .. The details of the position change passage 423 will be described later.

In the game board 421, a right side guide nail 431 having a downward slope toward the right is provided in the vicinity of the position change passage 423 and on the upper left side in order to guide the game ball B1 to the entrance of the position change passage 423. Has been done. The right side guide nail 431 has the same inclination of the second distribution surface 218a as the inclination of the first distribution surface 217a in the first left and right distribution nail 213 (FIG. 51 (a)) of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a resin nail created by changing to. The right side guide nail 431 has a protrusion that protrudes 17 mm from the surface of the game board 421 toward the window panel 52 in a state of being fixed to the game board 421, and the protrusion is directed to the right as an upper surface. It has an inclined surface that is inclined downward. The inclined surface is formed from the fixed end to the free end of the protruding portion, and is also formed from the left end to the right end of the protruding portion. The game ball B1 that collides with the right side guide nail 431 receives a drag in the upper right direction and is guided to the entrance of the position change passage 423.

The structure of the right guide nail 431 is not limited to this. In short, it suffices to have an inclined surface having a slope capable of bouncing the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides to the right and guides it to the entrance of the position change passage 423.

In the game board 421, the first left and right distribution nails 213 are arranged just below the exit of the position change passage 423 with a space of 13 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. The game area PA extends on the left side of the first left and right distribution nail 213, and the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 is formed on the right side of the first left and right distribution nail 213. Therefore, the game ball B1 distributed to the right by the first left-right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354. Further, the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the first left-right distribution nail 213 returns to the game area PA.

The position change passage 423 is formed by a passage forming member 422 made of transparent polycarbonate, and is a passage that can be visually recognized from the outside. The position change passage 423 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (d). 79 (a) is a perspective view of the passage forming member 422, FIG. 79 (b) is a front view of the passage forming member 422, and FIGS. 79 (c) and 79 (d) are perpendicular to the surface of the game board 421. It is an end view of the cut surface when the passage forming member 422 is cut in a plane.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the passage forming member 422 includes a passage forming portion 424 forming the position changing passage 423, an upper fixing portion 425 for fixing the passage forming portion 424 to the game board 421, and a passage forming portion 422. It consists of a lower fixing portion 426 and a lower fixing portion 426. The shape of the passage forming portion 424 has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, a depth that is approximately twice the depth of the game area PA, and a length dimension that is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. It is a rectangular parallelepiped with a height that is. In the passage forming portion 424, a plate-shaped upper fixing portion 425 is integrally formed by projecting upward, and a plate-shaped lower fixing portion 426 is integrally formed by projecting downward. There is.

Both fixing portions 425 and 426 are formed so as to extend from the left end to the right end of the passage forming member 422, and the shape thereof is a rectangular parallelepiped. Both fixing portions 425 and 426 are formed in such a manner that the front side planes of both fixing portions 425 and 426 are located at positions 18 mm away from the front side plane of the passage forming portion 424. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), holes 425a and 426a for screwing the passage forming member 422 to the surface of the game board 421 penetrate in the center of the front side planes of both fixing portions 425 and 426 in the depth direction. Is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (c) and 79 (d), the passage forming member 422 is played in such a manner that a part of the back surface of the passage forming portion 424 fits into the fixing hole 421b formed on the surface of the game board 421. It is fixed to the board 421. The width and height of the fixing hole 421b are the same as the width and height of the passage forming portion 424, and the depth of the fixing hole 421b is substantially the same as the depth of the game area PA. On the surface of the game board 421, upper fixing recesses 421c and lower fixing recesses 421d having the same shape and size as both fixing portions 425 and 426 are formed above and below the fixing holes 421b. Has been done. A screw hole corresponding to the hole 425a formed in the center of the upper fixing portion 425 is formed in the center of the upper fixing recess 421c, and a screw hole corresponding to the hole 425a is formed in the center of the lower fixing recess 421d. A screw hole corresponding to the hole 426a formed in the center of the lower fixing portion 426 is formed.

The passage forming member 422 is a game board in a detachable manner by screwing the upper fixing portion 425 to the upper fixing recess 421c and screwing the lower fixing portion 426 to the lower fixing recess 421d. It is attached to 421. At this time, the surface of the upper fixing portion 425 and the surface of the lower fixing portion 426 are located on the same plane as the surface of the game board 421. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B1 does not change by passing over both the fixed portions 425 and 426.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the passage forming member 422 mounted on the game board 421, the front side of the passage forming portion 424 projects 18 mm toward the window panel 52 side. In the passage forming portion 424, a position changing passage 423 is formed in a portion protruding toward the window panel 52 by a through hole penetrating the passage forming portion 424 in the vertical direction. The upper opening of the repositioning passage 423 is the entrance and the lower opening is the exit.

The position change passage 423 is a back side wall surface 422a which is an inner wall on the back side of the passage forming member 422, a front side wall surface 422b which is an inner wall on the front side, a left side wall surface 422c which is an inner wall on the left side, and an inner wall on the right side. It is defined by four surfaces, the right wall surface 422d. Of these, the width of the position change passage 423 defined by the left side wall surface 422c located on the left side of the position change passage 423 and the right side wall surface 422d located on the right side is constant from the entrance to the exit, and specifically, the game ball B1. It is 13 mm, which is one size larger than the diameter of. As shown in FIG. 78, the center in the left-right direction of the first left-right distribution nail 213 is directly below the center in the left-right direction of the position change passage 423. The game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 can move 1 mm to the left from the center of the position change passage 423 and 1 mm to the right from the center. On the other hand, since the lateral dimension of the first left-right distribution nail 213 is 7 mm, the game ball B1 discharged from the exit of the position change passage 423 collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 and follows its path. It is distributed to either the left direction or the right direction.

As shown in FIG. 79 (c), the back side wall surface 422a is a plane parallel to the surface of the game board 421, and the distance from the back surface of the window panel 52 to the back side wall surface 422a at the entrance is 18 mm, and at the exit. The distance from the back surface of the window panel 52 to the back side wall surface 422a is 18 mm. Further, the front side wall surface 422b has an inclination gradually approaching the back side wall surface 422a as it goes downward, and the distance from the surface of the game board 421 to the front side wall surface 422b at the entrance is 17.5 mm and the exit. The distance from the surface of the game board 421 to the front side wall surface 422b is 16 mm. As described above, the position change passage 423 has a structure in which the dimension in the depth direction of the passage becomes shorter from the entrance to the exit, and the center of the passage moves to the inner side.

Here, the front side wall surface 422b has an inclination that goes to the back side as it goes downward, but the inclination is a slight inclination. Therefore, when the vertically falling game ball B1 collides with the front side wall surface 422b near the entrance, the course of the game ball B1 is before the game ball B1 collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 located below the exit. It does not change so much that it collides with the back side wall surface 422a or the surface of the game board 421. In this case, the game ball B1 changes its course to the extent that it collides with the first distribution surface 217a, which is the front surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 located 13 mm below the exit of the position change passage 423.

Further, the inclination provided on the front side wall surface 422b is an angle that suppresses chattering in which the game ball B1 repeatedly collides with the front side wall surface 422b and the back side wall surface 422a in the position change passage 423. be. By making the inclination of the front side wall surface 422b a slope that suppresses a large rebound to the back side of the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the front side wall surface 422b, the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is played. It can be reflected in the course of the game ball B1 downstream in a manner that is easy for a person to understand.

As shown in FIG. 79 (c), the boundary line between the first distribution surface 217a and the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 is located at the center in the depth direction of the game area PA. .. As shown in FIG. 79 (c), at the entrance, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the center in the depth direction of the game area PA is discharged from the exit as it is, and the first of the first left-right distribution nails 213. It collides with the distribution surface 217a and is distributed to the right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the distance from the center of the game ball B1 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is 7.5 mm or less for the game ball B1 located on the front side of the center of the game area PA. The game ball B1 comes into contact with the front side wall surface 422b of the position change passage 423, changes its course to the back side, is discharged from the exit, and then collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213. Is distributed to the right. Further, the game ball B1 in which the distance from the center of the game ball B1 to the back surface of the window panel 52 is longer than 7.5 mm is discharged as it is from the outlet and collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213. Is distributed to the left.

In this way, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 is changed to the back side with a high probability. By combining the position change passage 423 and the first left-right distribution nail 213, the game ball B1 can be guided on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in a manner corresponding to the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1. It can enhance the sex.

Next, a course downstream of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 provided below the position change passage 423 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). 80 (a) and 80 (b) are front views of the game board 421 in which the downstream periphery of the position change passage 423 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 80A, the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left / right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the right is rolled formed on the upper surface of the stage unit 354. Guided to surface 357. As already described in the 16th embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, and the game ball B1 is forward on the rolling surface 357. The width of the valley portion 359 that can fall toward the left and right direction is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio of the rolling surface 357 to the width dimension in the left and right direction is set low. Further, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the mountain portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. That is, the game ball B1 that rolls on the rolling surface 357 does not easily fall forward from the valley portion 359. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 will win a prize in the operating openings 33 and 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the first left-right distribution nail 213 flows down the game area PA on the left side. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the game board 421 has a left side guide nail group 429 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the game area PA to the operation ports 33 and 34 on the left side of the operation ports 33 and 34. It is provided above. The left side guide nail group 429 is composed of obstacle nails 228.

The game ball B1 distributed to the left by the first left-right distribution nail 213 may be guided by the left guide nail group 429 to win a prize in the actuation openings 33 and 34, and constitutes the left guide nail group 429. There is a possibility that it will fall downward from the gap of the obstacle nail 228 and be recovered from the out port 24a. In the game board 421, the probability of being guided by the left side guide nail group 429 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34 is lower than the probability of being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34.

Next, FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) show the case where the replacement position change passage 442 defined by the replacement passage forming member 441 is used instead of the position change passage 423 defined by the passage forming member 422. It will be explained with reference to it. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are end views of the cut surface when the replacement passage forming member 441 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 421. Here, the replacement passage forming member 441 is a member whose inclination of the back side wall surface 422a is changed in the passage forming portion 424 constituting the passage forming member 422, and is other than the back side wall surface 422a of the replacement passage forming member 441. The structure of is the same as the structure of the passage forming member 422.

As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the replacement passage forming member 441 has the replacement passage forming portion 443 having the same outer shape as the passage forming portion 424 of the passage forming member 422, and the upper side of the passage forming member 422. It is composed of a replacement upper fixing portion 444 which is the same as the fixing portion 425, and a replacement lower fixing portion 445 which is the same as the lower fixing portion 426 of the passage forming member 422. The replacement passage forming member 441 is fixed so that a part of the back surface of the replacement passage forming portion 443 fits into the fixing hole 421b formed on the surface of the game board 421. Specifically, the replacement upper fixing portion 444 is screwed to the upper fixing recess 421c, and the replacement lower fixing portion 445 is screwed to the lower fixing recess 421d to be attached to and detached from the game board 421. It is mounted in a possible manner.

As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the replacement passage forming portion 443 has a passage forming portion in that the inclination of the back side wall surface 443a is different from the inclination of the back side wall surface 422a of the passage forming portion 424. Different from 424. The back side wall surface 443a has an inclination gradually approaching the front side wall surface 443b as it goes downward, and the distance from the back surface of the window panel 52 to the back side wall surface 443a at the entrance is 17.5 mm, and the window at the exit. The distance from the back surface of the panel 52 to the back side wall surface 443a is 15 mm.

Here, the back side wall surface 443a has an inclination that advances toward the front side as it goes downward, but the inclination is a slight inclination. Therefore, when the vertically falling game ball B1 collides with the back side wall surface 443a near the entrance, the course of the game ball B1 is before the game ball B1 collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 located below the exit. It does not change so much that it collides with the front side wall surface 443b or the back surface of the window panel 52. The course of the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the back side wall surface 443a is the second distribution, which is the front surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 located 13 mm below the exit of the replacement position change passage 442. It changes to the extent that it collides with the surface 218a.

Here, the inclination provided on the back side wall surface 443a of the replacement passage forming member 441 and the inclination provided on the front side wall surface 443b are such that the game ball B1 and the front side wall surface 443b in the replacement position change passage 442. This is an angle for suppressing repeated chattering between the collision of the wall surface and the collision with the back side wall surface 443a. The slope of the front side wall surface 443b is set to be an inclination that suppresses a large rebound to the back side of the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides, and the slope of the back side wall surface 443a is set to the front side of the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides. The difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction can be reflected in the course of the game ball B1 downstream in a manner that is easy for the player to understand by setting the inclination to suppress the large bounce of the ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), with respect to the game ball B1 located on the back side of the center of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the back side wall surface 443a changes its course to the front side. After being discharged from the outlet, the nail collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the left. On the other hand, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and does not collide with the back side wall surface 443a is discharged as it is from the outlet, collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nails 213, and is distributed to the right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), with respect to the game ball B1 located on the front side of the center of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the front side wall surface 443b has a course toward the back side. After being discharged from the outlet, the nail collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the right. On the other hand, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and does not collide with the front side wall surface 443b is discharged as it is from the outlet, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nails 213, and is distributed to the left.

In this way, the back side wall surface 443a that guides the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 and the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the first left and right. By using the replacement passage forming member 441 provided with the front side wall surface 443b that guides the distribution nail 213 to the first distribution surface 217a, the solenoid 27c and the game are played in the game ball launch mechanism 27 (FIG. 2). When the contact mode with the ball B1 changes and only the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is supplied or only the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is supplied. In addition, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B1 guided to the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 from being extremely increased or decreased extremely.

Further, the replacement passage forming member 441 can be mounted on the game board 421 by using the same fixing hole 421b as the passage forming member 422. Therefore, by mounting the replacement passage forming member 441 on the same game board 421 as the model on which the passage forming member 422 is mounted, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operating openings 33 and 34 is changed to obtain a different model. Can be manufactured. Since the same game board 421 is used, different models can be easily manufactured as compared with the case where the game board 421 is changed.

Further, since both the passage forming member 422 and the replacement passage forming member 441 are attached to the game board 421 in a detachable manner, the passage forming member 422 fixed to the game board 421 is removed to form a replacement passage. By replacing the member with the member 441, the game board 421 can be recycled.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The position change passage 423 for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in the depth direction is arranged upstream of the first left-right distribution nail 213. Then, instead of the position change passage 423, a replacement position change passage 442 that changes the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction can be used in a manner different from that of the position change passage 423. By properly using the passage forming member 422 and the replacement passage forming member 441 depending on the model, different models can be manufactured by using the game board 421 having the same shape. Therefore, it is possible to manufacture a model having a different easy course for the game ball B1 in a short time and at a low cost as compared with the case where the configuration of the new game board 421 is examined and manufactured.

Further, since the passage forming member 422 and the replacement passage forming member 441 are both attached to the game board 421 in a detachable manner, the passage forming member 422 mounted on the game board 421 is removed and the replacement passage forming member 441 is removed. By replacing with, it becomes possible to recycle the game board 421 in a mode in which the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is different.

Further, the first left-right distribution nail 213 is provided at the left end of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354, and the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a and is distributed to the right side is guided to the rolling surface 357. The game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 218a and is distributed to the left side is guided to the operating ports 33 and 34 by a large number of nails 228 provided on the game board 421. .. The rolling surface 357, which has a shape in which both the left and right ends and the mountain portion 358 are inclined downward toward the back, has a higher probability that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is higher than the nail 228 of the game board 421. It is a configuration that leads to the operating port 33. Therefore, by mounting the passage forming member 422 that easily guides the game ball B1 to the back side above the first left-right distribution nail 213, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 is increased, and the position is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying the player's attention to the movement of the game ball B1 around the change passage 423.

The position change passage 423 includes a back side wall surface 422a parallel to the surface of the game board 421 and a front side wall surface 422b inclined downward toward the back side. The inclination of the front side wall surface 422b is an angle (approximately 5 °) at which the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the first left and right distribution nail 213 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. Therefore, by mounting the position change passage 423 on the game board 421, the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 217a, which is the inner surface of the first left and right distribution nails 213 provided downstream. You can increase the number.

Further, the front side wall surface 422b of the position change passage 423 is prevented from colliding with the back side wall surface 422a and the surface of the game board 421 until the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the first left and right distribution nail 213 collides with the first left and right distribution nail 213. Since it is inclined at an angle (approximately 5 °), the occurrence of chattering is suppressed above the first left-right distribution nail 213, and the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is largely reflected in the course of the game ball B1 downstream. be able to.

Further, the replacement position change passage 442 has a configuration in which the back side wall surface 443a and the front side wall surface 443b project to the game area PA at the exit, and the back side wall surface 443a vertically drops and collides with the game ball B1. 1 The left and right distribution nails 213 are tilted at an angle (approximately 5 °) to collide with the second distribution surface 218a, and the front side wall surface 443b vertically drops and collides with the game ball B1 as the first left and right distribution nails. It is tilted at an angle (approximately 5 °) at which it collides with the first distribution surface 217a of 213. Therefore, by providing the replacement position change passage 442 in the game board 421 instead of the position change passage 423, the second distribution surface which is the front surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 provided downstream. The number of game balls B1 that collide with 218a can be increased.

In the position change passage 423 or the replacement position change passage 442, the ratio of the game ball B1 guided to the front side and the ratio of the game ball B1 guided to the back side are set to the back side wall surfaces 422a, 443a and the front side wall surface 422b. , Since it has a simple configuration that can be changed by the inclination angle of 443b, it is possible to manufacture a replacement member that guides the game ball B1 at a desired ratio at low cost.

<Another form of the 17th embodiment>
In the 17th embodiment described above, the front side wall surface 443b of the replacement passage forming member 441 may be a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the window panel 52. As a result, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA falls from the exit as it is, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nails 213, and is distributed to the left side. By making the replacement passage forming member 441 easy to guide the game ball B1 to the front side, the difference from the passage forming member 422 which easily guides the game ball B1 to the back side is increased, and the game is played between different models. The movement of the ball B1 can be greatly changed.

A game in which one passage forming member 422 is used and the angle at which the passage forming member 422 is attached to the game board 421 is changed so that the passage forming member 422 is distributed to the left side in the first left and right distribution nail 213. A model may be manufactured in which the ratio between the number of balls B1 and the number of game balls B1 distributed to the right side are different. For example, an angle changing member for changing the mounting angle of the passage forming member 422 is sandwiched between the fixing hole 421b of the game board 421 and the back surface of the passage forming member 422, and only the angle changing member is replaced. The inclination angle of the back side wall surface 422a and the front side wall surface 422b of the position change passage 423 may be changed. Thereby, different models can be manufactured by using the game board 421 of the same shape and the passage forming member 422 of the same shape.

In the 17th embodiment described above, the exit of the position change passage 423 may be located above the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354. Specifically, by providing the exit of the position change passage 423 at the left end of the stage unit 354, the game ball B1 discharged from the exit of the position change passage 423 is on the rolling surface 357 at the left end of the stage unit 354. Fall. In the range where the game ball B1 can fall, the position is changed by configuring the back region of the rolling surface 357 to be tilted toward the back and the front region to be tilted toward the front. The game ball B1 guided to the back side by the passage 423 wins the first operating port 33 with a high probability of being guided to the rolling surface 357 without falling to the front side, and is guided to the front side in the position change passage 423. The played game ball B1 falls to the front side.

In this way, the exit of the position change passage 423 is provided above the rolling surface 357, and the path of the game ball B1 located on the back side at the left end of the rolling surface 357 and the game located on the front side. Due to the configuration different from the course of the sphere B1, the position change passage is not used in the first left and right distribution nail 213 provided below the exit of the position change passage 423 in the above-mentioned 17th embodiment. The ratio of the game ball B1 that wins the first operating port 33 can be changed according to the shape of the 423.

<18th embodiment>
In this embodiment, by utilizing the inclination of the guide surface 462 (FIG. 83 (b)) in the guide passage 461 (FIG. 82), the game ball B1 collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 in the depth direction. It differs from the above 17th embodiment in that the collision position is changed. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the 17th embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 451 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 451 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, the game board 451 includes a display surface 41a, an opening 451a, and a center frame 252 of the symbol display device 41, as in the 17th embodiment. Then, similarly to the 17th embodiment, the center frame 252 defines the roof unit 253 provided so as to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 451a, and the lower edge of the opening 451a. The stage unit 354 and the like are provided. Here, the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in the present embodiment has the same shape as the rolling surface 357 described in the 16th embodiment.

In the game board 451, a guide member 471 in which a guide passage 461 (FIG. 83 (b)) for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is formed is mounted on the left side of the lower portion of the display surface 41a. .. The guide member 471 is transparent, and the game ball B1 moving in the guide passage 461 is visible from the outside. As shown in FIG. 82, the guide passage 461 has an inlet 485 on the upper surface of the guide member 471 and is formed toward the back side of the surface of the game board 451. Further, the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461 is formed in the lower part of the surface of the guide member 471, and the first left-right distribution nail 213 already described in the thirteenth embodiment is provided directly below the outlet 522. ..

Below the first left and right distribution nails 213, obstacle nails 228 constituting the left side guide nail group 491 for guiding the game ball B1 to the actuation ports 33 and 34 are provided, and the first left and right distribution nails are provided. A rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 is formed on the right side of the 213. Here, in the game board 451 the left side guide nail group 491 has a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the obstacle nails 228, and the game ball B1 easily falls downward from the gap.

As already described in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, and the game ball B1 faces forward on the rolling surface 357. The width of the valley portion 359 that can be dropped in the left-right direction is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio of the rolling surface 357 to the width dimension in the left-right direction is set low. Further, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the mountain portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. That is, the game ball B1 that rolls on the rolling surface 357 does not easily fall forward from the valley portion 359. In this way, the possibility that the game ball B1 distributed to the right by the first left-right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and wins the first operating port 33 is the first. 1 The game ball B1 distributed to the left by the left-right distribution nail 213 is set higher than the possibility of being guided by the left side guide nail group 491 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 distributed to the right by the first left-right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and wins the first operating port 33. It is more likely that the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the left-right distribution nail 213 is guided by the left guide nail group 491 and wins the operating openings 33 and 34.

Next, the guide member 471 in which the guide passage 461 is formed will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b) and FIG. 84. FIG. 83A is an exploded perspective view of the guide member 471, and FIG. 83B is a left side view. Further, FIG. 84 is an end view of the cut surface when the guide member 471 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 451. As shown in FIG. 83A, the guide member 471 includes an upper guide member 481 for taking in and guiding the game ball B1, and a lower guide member 521 for discharging the game ball B1 while guiding the course. It is a resin member made of. The upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 are separable.

First, the upper guide member 481 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83A, the upper guide member 481 has a main body 483 in which the upper guide passage 482, which is the upper part of the guide passage 461, is formed, and the game ball B1 does not deviate to the right side of the guide member 471. It is composed of a protrusion 484 for taking in the game ball B1 while guarding the ball. Of these, the shape of the main body 483 is a rectangular parallelepiped, and an entrance 485 for taking in the game ball B1 is formed as an opening toward the front in the upper part of the front surface thereof, and an upper guide is formed in the center of the lower plane thereof. A first communication opening 486 (FIG. 83 (b)), which is an opening for discharging the game ball B1 guided to the passage 482 to the lower guide passage 525, is formed.

The first contact opening 486 has an area through which one game ball B1 can pass with a margin of 1 mm in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, the entrance 485 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 and a height 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. As described above, the entrance 485 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction, and it is possible to take in most of the game balls B1 that shake in the vertical direction immediately before the entrance 485.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the main body portion 483 is formed with an upper guide passage 482 facing rearward and downward in a manner continuous with the entrance 485. The details of the upper guide passage 482 will be described later. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), a fixing protrusion 487 for fixing the upper guide member 481 to the lower guide member 521 to form the guide member 471 is downward on the four edges of the lower plane of the main body portion 483. It is integrally formed so as to project toward. Further, the left side surface and the right side surface of the main body portion 483 are provided with an elastic protrusion 531 on the upper portion thereof for fixing the upper guide member 481 to the game board 451.

The elastic protrusion 531 is connected to a compression coil spring (not shown) fixed inside the main body 483, and the upper guide member 481 is removable by utilizing the elastic deformation of the compression coil spring. It is fixed to the game board 451 in the embodiment.

The elastic protruding portion 531 is in a protruding position protruding outward from the side surface in the initial state in which no force is applied to the compression coil spring. The compression coil spring contracts and becomes deformed when a force is applied from the outside of the main body 483 toward the inside of the main body 483. In the deformed state of the compression coil spring, the elastic protruding portion 531 takes a deformed position in which the most outwardly protruding portion is located on the same plane as the side surface in the initial state. The elastic protrusion 531 in the deformed position returns to the protruding position by the restoring force of the compression coil spring when the applied force is removed.

As shown in FIG. 83A, the elastic protrusion 531 is located on the front side of the elastic protrusion 531 and has a front portion 531a protruding outward at a steep slope and the elastic protrusion 531. It is composed of a rear portion 531b which is located on the back side and protrudes outward with a gentle slope.

The protruding portion 484 of the upper guide member 481 is integrally formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the main body portion 483. The protrusion 484 is a game area of the guard portion 489 for preventing the game ball B1 from moving to the right of the upper guide member 481 on the game board 451 and the game ball B1 flowing down in front of the entrance 485. The game ball B1 located on the back side of the PA is guided in the direction of the entrance 485 so as to be guided to the guide passage 461 (FIG. 83 (b)), and the game ball B1 located on the front side is not guided to the guide passage 461. It is composed of a distribution unit 541 for guiding to the left as described above.

The guard portion 489 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the main body portion 483 in such a manner that the left side surface thereof is located at the right end of the inlet 485. The guard portion 489 projects forward by 17 mm from the main body portion 483. Therefore, in a state where the guide member 471 is mounted on the game board 451 the guard portion 489 exists from the surface of the game board 451 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52.

Further, the distribution portion 541 is integrally formed so as to project forward by 17 mm from a region below the lower end of the inlet 485 on the front surface of the main body portion 483. The distribution portion 541 exists from the left end of the main body portion 483 to the left end of the guard portion 489. Further, the distribution unit 541 is provided with an intake surface 541a as an upper surface on the back side for repelling the game ball B1 that flows down and collides in front of the entrance 485 toward the rear, and also flows down in front of the entrance 485. A left guide surface 541b for repelling the colliding game ball B1 toward the left is provided as an upper surface on the front side.

The intake surface 541a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear and repels the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the entrance 485. Further, the left guide surface 541b is an inclined surface having a gentle downward inclination toward the left in order to prevent the game ball B1 falling from above from staying in place.

Next, the lower guide member 521 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the shape of the lower guide member 521 is a rectangular parallelepiped having the same length dimension as the upper guide member 481 in the left-right direction and the depth direction, and one game ball is on the upper front surface thereof. An outlet 522 that allows B1 to be discharged vertically and horizontally with a margin of 1 mm is formed as an opening toward the front. Further, the lower guide member 521 is formed with a lower guide passage 525 for guiding the game ball B1 discharged from the upper guide passage 482 toward the rear and upper side from the outlet 522 to the exit 522. The details of the lower guide passage 525 will be described later.

At the center of the upper plane of the lower guide member 521, a second communication opening 523 for continuously communicating the lower guide passage 525 with the upper guide passage 482 is formed as an opening facing upward. The second communication opening 523 is formed at a position corresponding to the first communication opening 486 (FIG. 83 (b)) on the lower plane of the upper guide member 481, and is the same as the first communication opening 486. Has the size and shape of.

Further, on the four edges of the upper plane of the lower guide member 521, a fixing receiving portion 524 is formed corresponding to the fixing protrusion 487 of the upper guide member 481. In the fixing receiving portion 524, when the entire fixing protrusion 487 fits into the fixing receiving portion 524, the surface of the fixing protrusion 487 and the inner wall of the fixing receiving portion 524 are in close contact with each other to guide the upper side. The member 481 can be fixed to the lower guide member 521. Further, the left side surface and the right side surface of the lower guide member 521 are provided with an elastic protrusion 531 for fixing the lower guide member 521 to the game board 451 at the lower portion thereof. The elastic protrusion 531 is the same member as the elastic protrusion 531 provided on the left side surface and the right side surface of the upper guide member 481.

As described above, the upper guide member 481 is fixed to the lower guide member 521 in such a manner that the fixing protrusion 487 of the upper guide member 481 fits into the fixing receiving portion 524 of the lower guide member 521, whereby the upper guide member 481 is fixed to the lower guide member 521. The guide member 471 is assembled in contact with the passage 482 and the lower guide passage 525.

In the game board 451, in a state where the upper guide member 481 is fixed to the lower guide member 521, a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped fixing hole 551 in which the main body 483 and the lower guide member 521 of the upper guide member 481 are accommodated without gaps. (FIG. 84) is formed. Further, on the left side surface and the right side surface of the fixing hole 551, four recesses having the same shape as the elastic protrusion 531 in the initial state in which no force is applied and having the same size are formed. The four recessed portions are formed on the left and right side surfaces of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 in a state where the main body portion 483 and the lower guide member 521 of the upper guide member 481 are housed in the fixing holes 551 without gaps. It is formed at a position corresponding to a total of four elastic protrusions 531 provided on the left and right side surfaces.

In the process of mounting the guide member 471 in the fixing hole 551, the elastic protruding portion 531 has a compression coil spring (compression coil spring) by pushing the rear portion 531b protruding outward with a gentle inclination from the side surface of the fixing hole 551. (Not shown) is in a deformed state, and the elastic protrusion 531 takes a deformed position. When the recessed portion of the fixing hole 551 and the elastic protruding portion 531 overlap at the mounting position, the compression coil spring in the deformed state is in the initial state by removing the force applied from the rear portion 531b. As a result, the elastic protrusion 531 returns to the protrusion position, and the guide member 471 is attached to the game board 451.

The compression coil spring connected to the elastic protrusion 531 can be attached to and detached from the game board 451 because when the guide member 471 is pulled forward from the game board 451 it is in a deformed state again and takes a deformed position. It is fixed in an embodiment.

Here, the attachment / detachment of the guide member 471 is performed with the deformation of the compression coil spring (not shown) connected to the elastic protrusion 531. When the guide member 471 is mounted on the game board 451 the compression coil spring is deformed by applying a force from the fixing hole 551 to the rear portion 531b protruding outward with a gentle inclination. On the other hand, when the guide member 471 is removed from the game board 451 the compression coil spring is deformed by applying a force from the fixing hole 551 to the front portion 531a protruding outward with a steep inclination.

Therefore, the force required to remove the guide member 471 from the game board 451 is greater than the force required to remove the guide member 471 from the game board 451. The guide member 471 is mounted on the game board 451 in such a manner that it does not easily come off from the game board 451 and that the guide passage 461 does not easily shift even if the game ball B1 collides with the guide member 471.

Next, the guide passage 461 formed inside the guide member 471 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the upper guide passage 482 guides the game ball B1 taken in from the entrance 485 to the rear lower part, and then guides the game ball B1 from the place to the first communication opening 486 located in the front lower part. It is a bow-shaped passage. The upper guide passage 482 continuously and smoothly connects the entrance 485 to the first communication opening 486, and the height dimension of the passage gradually decreases toward the downstream near the entrance 485, and at the downstream thereof, the height dimension of the passage gradually decreases. It is a passage having a passage cross section through which one game ball B1 can pass with a margin of 1 mm in front, back, left and right. Since the passage cross section is set to be narrow, it is suppressed that the game ball B1 is greatly shaken back and forth and left and right in the guide passage 461, and the course of the game ball B1 in the guide passage 461 is limited.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the game ball B1 guided to the first communication opening 486 by the upper guide passage 482 is guided from the second communication opening 523 to the exit 522 by the lower guide passage 525. The lower guide passage 525 is continuously connected to the upper guide passage 482, and increases the probability that the discharged game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nails 213 near the exit 522. Therefore, it is provided with a guide surface 462 that is inclined downward toward the front. The guide surface 462 has a length twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the course downstream of the game ball B1 rolling on the guide surface 462 is greatly affected by the inclination of the guide surface 462.

As shown in FIG. 84, the guide surface 462 is smoothly taken into the guide passage 461 at the entrance 485, and the game ball B1 passing through the guide passage 461 at a certain reference speed or higher is located on the front side of the game area PA. It has an inclination to collide with the second distribution surface 218a. The inclination of the guide surface 462 is repeatedly taken in by colliding with the inner wall of the guide passage 461 at the entrance 485, and the game ball B1 whose passing speed in the guide passage 461 is less than a certain reference speed is positioned on the front side of the game area PA. It is an inclination to collide with the first distribution surface 217a. The guide passage 461 has a configuration for colliding most of the game balls B1 discharged from the outlet 522 with the second distribution surface 218a.

Next, a course downstream of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left-right distribution nail 213 provided below the guide passage 461 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b). 85 (a) and 85 (b) are front views of the game board 451 in which the downstream periphery of the guide passage 461 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 85A, the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left / right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the right is rolled formed on the upper surface of the stage unit 354. Guided to surface 357.

As already described in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, and the game ball B1 faces forward on the rolling surface 357. The width of the valley portion 359 that can be dropped in the left-right direction is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio of the rolling surface 357 to the width dimension in the left-right direction is set low. Further, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the mountain portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set to be small. That is, the game ball B1 that rolls on the rolling surface 357 does not easily fall forward from the valley portion 359. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 will win a prize in the operating openings 33 and 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the first left-right distribution nail 213 flows down the game area PA on the left side. In this case, the game ball B1 may be guided by the left side guide nail group 491 to win a prize in the operating openings 33 and 34, and may fall downward from the gap of the obstacle nail 228 constituting the left side guide nail group 491. There is a possibility that it will be recovered from the out port 24a. In the game board 451 the probability of being guided by the left side guide nail group 491 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34 is lower than the probability of being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34.

Here, in the fixing hole 551 of the game board 451, instead of the guide member 471 that discharges the game ball B1 in a manner that easily collides with the second distribution surface 218a, the mode that easily collides with the first distribution surface 217a. It is possible to attach a replacement guide member 561 for discharging the game ball B1. The replacement guide member 561 will be described below with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an end view of the cut surface when the replacement guide member 561 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 451.

As shown in FIG. 86, when assembling the guide member 471, the replacement guide member 561 is provided with a replacement guide surface 562 different from the guide surface 462 in place of the lower guide member 521. It is assembled by using the guide member 563. The replacement lower guide member 563 differs from the lower guide member 521 only in the shape of the guide surface 462 and the shape of the outlet 522.

As shown in FIG. 86, the lower end of the outlet 564 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is located below the lower end of the outlet 522 of the lower guide member 521. Further, the replacement guide surface 562 of the replacement lower guide member 563 has a gentle bow-shaped shape that is convex upward in the vicinity of the outlet 564. Therefore, the course after discharging the game ball B1 that rolls on the replacement guide surface 562 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is the discharge of the game ball B1 that rolls on the guide surface 462 of the lower guide member 521. There is a high possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 564 of the replacement lower guide member 563 collides with the first distribution surface 217a located on the front side of the game area PA. ..

As described above, in the game board 451 the probability of being guided by the left side guide nail group 491 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34 is the probability of being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and winning the operating openings 33 and 34. By mounting the replacement guide member 561 on the game board 451 instead of the guide member 471, the game ball B1 is more likely to win a prize in the operating ports 33 and 34 than the model to which the guide member 471 is mounted. Models can be manufactured.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The guide member 471 is formed with a guide passage 461 having an inclination so that the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 522 easily collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 provided below. Has been done. Further, the first left and right distribution nail 213 located below the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 rolls the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a located on the back side of the game area PA and rolls the stage unit 354. It is provided in a manner of guiding onto the surface 357. Therefore, the player is expected that the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 is guided to the rolling surface 357, and the player's attention is focused on the vicinity of the exit 522 of the guide passage 461. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the game board 451, since the game ball B1 guided to the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 does not easily fall from the valley portion 359 of the rolling surface 357, the game ball is guided to the rolling surface 357. There is a high possibility that B1 will win the first operating port 33. On the other hand, after the game ball B1 flows down the left side of the game area PA, it is easily dropped downward from the gap between the obstacle nails 228 constituting the left side guide nail group 491, so that the game ball B1 is guided to the left side guide nail group 491. It is unlikely that the game ball B1 that has been played will win a prize in the operating ports 33 and 34. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 is distributed to the right, the player's expectation for winning the first operating port 33 can be increased, and the first left-right swing can be increased. It is possible to attract the attention of the player to the distribution result by the split nail 213 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the guide member 471 is provided with a take-in surface 541a for distributing the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA to the back side and guiding it to the entrance 485. Therefore, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA can be largely reflected in the course of the game ball B1. be able to.

Further, the game board 451 can be equipped with a replacement guide member 561 instead of the guide member 471. The replacement guide member 561 is provided with a replacement guide surface 562 for facilitating the collision of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 564 with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nails 213. It is possible to manufacture a new model in which the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 with a probability different from the model in which the member 471 is mounted. By using the same game board 451 for a plurality of models, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, the guide member 471 takes a deformed position in the process of fitting the guide member 471 into the fixing hole 551 formed in the game board 451, and the guide member 471 is completely fitted into the fixing hole 551. It is configured to be fixed to the game board 451 in a detachable manner by the elastic protruding portion 531 that returns to the protruding position. Further, it is also possible to attach a replacement guide member 561 using the same elastic protrusion 531 to the fixing hole 551 formed in the game board 451 in a detachable manner. Therefore, by reattaching the replacement guide member 561 to the game board 451 to which the guide member 471 is mounted, the game board 451 can be recycled to manufacture a different model.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the change guide 721 may be provided at the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 as a configuration for changing the position of the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461 in the depth direction. good. A case of using the guide member 571 provided with the change guide 721 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (a).

FIG. 87A is an end view of the cut surface when the guide member 571 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 452. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the guide member 571 is mounted in a fixing hole 552 provided in the game board 452. In the game board 452, the fixing hole 552 for fixing the guide member 571 is provided above the fixing hole 551 of the game board 451 in the eighteenth embodiment.

The change guide 721 is an L-shaped tube having two opening ends 527 and 573, and the first opening end, the inlet-side opening end 572, communicates with the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 and is the second. The exit-side opening end 573, which is the opening end, is attached to the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 in a manner toward the lower side of the game area PA.

The shape of the exit-side opening end 573 is circular, and its center is located on the back side of the center of the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the center of the outlet-side opening end 573 collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nails 213 provided below and is distributed to the right. However, the exit-side opening end 573 has a space in which the game ball B1 located at the center thereof can be crushed by 2 mm in the front-rear and left-right directions, and the game ball B1 discharged from the exit-side opening end 573 has a space in the depth direction. The position shifts to the back side or the front side within a certain range.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the game ball B1 discharged from the exit-side opening end 573 is in the back position, the game ball B1 is provided directly below the exit-side opening end 573. It collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 and is distributed to the right. On the other hand, when the game ball B1 exiting from the exit-side opening end 573 is in the front position, the game ball B1 is the first left-right distribution nail 213 arranged directly below the exit-side opening end 573. 2 It collides with the distribution surface 218a and is distributed to the left.

In this way, by using the change guide 721 that limits the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 immediately before colliding with the first left-right distribution nail 213 within a certain range, the ratio assumed at the design stage. The first left-right distribution nail 213 can be configured to distribute the game ball B1 to the right direction and the left direction of the game board 452 at a ratio close to. Further, since the change guide 721 is configured to guide the game ball B1 downward immediately before the exit side opening end 573, the game ball B1 discharged from the exit side opening end 573 becomes the first left-right distribution nail 213. It is possible to prevent the game board 452 from colliding with the front surface of the game board 452 or the back surface of the window panel 52 by shaking in the depth direction before the collision.

Further, in the configuration using the change guide 721, the replacement change guide 722 uses the replacement guide member 561 provided at the outlet 522 of the guide member 471 of the eighteenth embodiment in place of the change guide 721. As a result, the ratio of the game ball B1 distributed to the right by the first left-right distribution nail 213 and the ratio of the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the first left-right distribution nail 213 are different from those in the case of using the guide member 571. May be configured to be able to be manufactured. The case of using the replacement guide member 574 provided with the replacement change guide 722 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

FIG. 87B is an end view of the cut surface when the replacement guide member 574 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 452. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the replacement change guide 722 is an L-shaped tube having an inlet side opening end 742 and an outlet side opening end 743 like the change guide 721. The length dimension of the horizontal pipe 744, which is a pipe formed by extending horizontally in the replacement change guide 722, is the horizontal pipe 745, which is a pipe formed by extending horizontally in the change guide 721. It is longer than the length dimension of (FIG. 87 (a)). Therefore, when the replacement change guide 722 is provided at the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461, the center of the outlet-side opening end 743 is the first left-right distribution nail 213 disposed directly below the outlet-side opening end 743. It is located on the front side of the center in the depth direction of.

Further, the outlet-side opening end 743 of the replacement change guide 722 has the same size and shape as the exit-side opening end 573 of the change guide 721. Therefore, the position of the game ball B1 discharged from the exit-side opening end 743 in the depth direction may be displaced toward the back side or toward the front side within a certain range.

Here, the position range in the depth direction that the game ball B1 discharged from the exit-side opening end 743 of the replacement change guide 722 can be taken by the game ball B1 discharged from the exit-side opening end 573 of the change guide 721. It is shifted to the front side of the position range in the depth direction. Therefore, in the model using the replacement change guide 722, the ratio of the first left / right distribution nail 213 distributing the game ball B1 to the left is such that in the model using the change guide 721, the first left / right distribution nail 213 is the game ball. It is more than the ratio of distributing B1 to the left. That is, the model that uses the replacement change guide 722 is a model in which the game ball B1 is less likely to win a prize in the first operating port 33 than the model that uses the change guide 721.

As described above, by using the replacement change guide 722 instead of the change guide 721, it is possible to manufacture a model having a different probability that the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33. Since it is possible to use the same game board 452 for different models, the manufacturing cost is compared with the case of manufacturing different game boards 452 in order to change the probability that the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33. It is possible to increase the variation of the model while suppressing.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 may be fixed to the game board 451 by screwing instead of the fixing method using the elastic protrusion 531. The guide member 471 includes a screw fastening portion that protrudes in the left-right direction from the main body portion 483. Further, the replacement guide member 561 also has a screw fastening portion protruding in the left-right direction so as to enable the replacement guide member 561 to be screwed to the game board 451. A screw that can be accommodated around the fixing hole 551 (FIG. 84) of the game board 451 so that the screwed portion of the guide member 471 or the replacement guide member 561 does not protrude toward the surface of the game board 451. A dent for fastening is formed. The guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 are screwed to the game board 451 in a state where the screwed portion is fitted in the screwed recessed portion. In this way, by fixing the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 with screws, the guide member 471 and the guide member 471 and the guide member 471 are ejected in such a manner that the course of the game ball B1 to be discharged does not shift even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides. The replacement guide member 561 can be firmly fixed.

-In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the guide member 471 may be configured to include an opening / closing mechanism capable of opening / closing the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461. For example, the guide member 471 is configured to eject the game ball B1 in such a manner that it collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 with a high probability, and the predetermined lottery result is obtained by the internal lottery. In some cases, the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 may be opened. In this configuration, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained, the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball B1 has a high probability of being the first of the first left and right distribution nails 213. It collides with the distribution surface 217a and is guided to the rolling surface 357.

As described above, in the configuration in which the course of the game ball B1 changes according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, the ratio of the game ball B1 located in one of the depth directions according to the time zone is By making the configuration increase or decrease, it is possible to change the flow of the game ball B1 in the same game machine according to the time zone, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<19th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment in that a short-circuit prevention hole 761 for preventing the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 is formed in the printed wiring board 741 constituting the main control board 61. Hereinafter, the basic description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

The main control board 61 in this embodiment is an electronic circuit mounting board configured by mounting a large number of electronic components on a printed wiring board 741. The specific configuration of the main control board 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b). FIG. 88A is an enlarged surface view showing a part of the main control board 61 (FIG. 43), and FIG. 88B is an enlarged surface showing the periphery of the one-row connector 782 in the main control board 61. It is a figure. In FIG. 88A, the wiring pattern 776 formed on the surface of the printed wiring board 741 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the printed wiring board 741 of the main control board 61 has a one-row connector 782 having four pins 784a to 784d arranged in one row and two pins 784e and 784f. A two-pole connector 781 having a double-pole connector 781 and a two-row connector 783 having eight pins 784g to 784p arranged in two rows are mounted. The connectors 781 to 783 are mounted by inserting pins 784a to 784p into the via holes 793 (FIG. 90 (a)) formed in the printed wiring board 741. Here, the via hole 793 is a through hole penetrating the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. In the following, on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, the rectangular area around the mounted 1-row connector 782 is designated as the 1-row area 787, and the rectangular area around the mounted 2-pole connector 781 is used as the 2-pole area. It is set to 786. Further, on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, the rectangular area around the mounted two-row connector 783 is designated as the two-row area 788.

As already described with reference to FIG. 5 in the first embodiment, the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 77, the voice emission control device 81, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 61 included in the main control device 60 is a payout control board included in the payout control device 77 and a voice emission control board included in the voice emission control device 81. Is electrically connected to. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 61 included in the main control device 60 is electrically connected to other boards such as the power failure monitoring board 67 included in the main control device 60.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board 61 is connected to another board by using connectors 781 to 783 which are female connectors. The electrical cable used to electrically connect the main control board 61 to another board is provided with male connectors at both ends. Then, the female connectors 781 to 783 mounted on the surface of the main control board 61 and the male connector at one end of the electric cable are connected, and the male connector at the other end of the electric cable is connected. And the female connector mounted on the other board are connected, so that the main control board 61 is electrically connected to the other board. Here, other boards include a payout control board included in the payout control device 77, a voice emission control board included in the voice emission control device 81, a power failure monitoring board 67, and the like.

Further, the printed wiring board 741 is also equipped with a large number of through-hole mounting components such as a resistor 771, a capacitor 772, a transistor 773, and an IC 774, which are mounted by inserting a terminal 775 into a via hole 793. As shown in FIG. 88B, on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are mounted on the printed wiring board 741 with electronic components around the one-row connector 782. A copper wiring pattern 776 is formed for electrical connection. Similarly, a wiring pattern 776 (FIG. 97 (a)) for electrically connecting the 2-pole connector 781 to the electronic components on the printed wiring board 741 is formed around the 2-pole connector 781. A wiring pattern 776 (FIG. 97 (b)) for electrically connecting the two-row connector 783 to an electronic component on the printed wiring board 741 is formed around the two-row connector 783. A solder resist 792, which is an insulator, is formed on the wiring pattern 776, and the wiring pattern 776 is not exposed to the outside.

Here, the structures of the connectors 781 to 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) and 89 (a) to (c). 89 (a) is a perspective view of the one-row connector 782, FIG. 89 (b) is a perspective view of the two-pole connector 781, and FIG. 89 (c) is a perspective view of the two-row connector 783. As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c), the connectors 781 to 783 extend axially with the hollow rectangular parallelepiped housings 781 to 783a having an opening in the upper plane upward. It is formed from metal pins 784a to 784p, which are formed of the above. The housings 781a to 783a are insulators made of resin. Further, the pins 784a to 784p are male type pins, and a plating film for improving electrical connection, corrosion resistance, and solderability is formed on the surface thereof. The plating film contains tin. A gold plating film may be formed on the surfaces of the pins 784a to 784p.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the connectors 781 to 783 are mounted in such a manner that the lower plane of the housings 781a to 783a is parallel to the surface of the printed wiring board 741. As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c), the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are arranged at equal intervals so that the axes are perpendicular to the lower plane of the housings 781a to 783a. Further, the pins 784a to 784p project above and below the lower plane of the housings 781a to 783a. Of these, the upper protruding portion of the pins 784a to 784p makes metal contact with the female pin provided by the male connector when mated with the male connector. Further, the lower protrusions of the pins 784a to 784p are inserted into the via hole 793 of the printed wiring board 741 and soldered when the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed to the printed wiring board 741.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the one-row connector 782 includes a first pin 784a, a second pin 784b, a third pin 784c, and a fourth pin 784d in order from the right, and has four pins. The 784a to 784d are arranged in a row in the left-right direction with an interval of 1.5 mm. The row of pins 784a to 784d is surrounded by the side surface of the housing 782a. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the two pins 784e and 784f constituting the two-pole connector 781 are spaced by 2.5 mm, which is wider than the distance between the pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782. The two pins 784e and 784f are arranged so as to be surrounded by the side surface of the housing 781a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the eight pins 784g to 784p constituting the two-row connector 783 are arranged in two rows of four each, and the circumference of the rows of the two pins 784g to 784p is It is surrounded by a housing 783a. The distance between the pins 784g to 784p in each row is 2 mm, which is wider than the distance between the pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782, and the distance between the rows is 2.5 mm.

Here, on the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10, a single-row connector in which the distance between adjacent pins 784 is narrower than 1.5 mm, a single-row connector in which the distance between adjacent pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm, and pins 2-pole connector with 784 spacing narrower than 2.5 mm, 2-pole connector with pin 784 spacing wider than 2.5 mm, row spacing wider than 2.5 mm and pin 784 spacing in each row Two-row connectors narrower than 1.5 mm, two-row connectors with rows spacing narrower than 2.5 mm, pins 784 spacing in each row narrower than 1.5 mm, and rows spacing 2.5 mm Also arranged are two-row connectors that are wider than, and the distance between the pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm.

Next, the configuration of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). FIG. 90 (a) is a perspective view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged part of the back surface side, and FIG. 90 (b) is an enlarged view of the area around the via hole 793 of the printed wiring board 741 cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface. It is a vertical sectional view shown by. The base material 791 constituting the printed wiring board 741 is a paper phenol substrate manufactured by impregnating paper with a phenol resin. The printed wiring board 741 is a double-sided circuit board in which a wiring pattern 776 is formed on both the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 which is an insulating plate.

The base material 791 of the printed wiring board 741 is not limited to the paper phenol substrate. For example, it may be a glass epoxy substrate manufactured by impregnating a glass cloth with an epoxy resin. Further, the printed wiring board 741 may be a single-sided circuit board in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed only on the surface of the insulating plate, or may be a multilayer board in which the wiring pattern 776 is also formed in the inner layer of the insulating plate. good.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the printed wiring board 741 is formed with via holes 793 for inserting the terminals 775 (FIG. 88 (a)) of the through-hole mounting components or the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783. There is. In order to explain the configuration of the via hole 793, the process of forming the via hole 793 will be described below. First, a copper foil 779 (FIG. 90 (b)) having a thickness of 0.04 mm is attached to the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 having a thickness of 1.6 mm. After that, a through hole 777 (FIG. 90 (b)), which is a hole that penetrates the base material 791 to which the copper foil 779 is attached in the vertical direction, is formed.

Then, copper plating is performed on the base material 791 provided with the through holes 777. As a result, a copper thin film 778 (FIG. 90 (b)) is formed on the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90 (b)) attached to the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791. Further, the through hole 777 becomes a via hole 793 by forming a copper thin film 778 on the inner wall at the timing. At this time, around the via hole 793, the copper foil 779 around the upper opening of the through hole 777 and the copper foil 779 around the lower opening pass through the copper thin film 778 formed on the inner wall of the through hole 777. It will be electrically connected.

A thin film of an etching resist, which is a photosensitive material, is formed on the copper foil 779 attached to the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 on which the via hole 793 is formed. When the thin film of the etching resist is irradiated with light (ultraviolet rays), the mask pattern is transferred and developed. Then, by removing unnecessary etching resist other than the mask pattern, the mask pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791.

Then, in an etching gas atmosphere, dry etching is performed to etch the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90 (b)) and the copper thin film 778 on the base material 791 on which the mask pattern is formed by using ions or the like, and acetone or the like is used. By removing the etching resist of the mask pattern portion with the organic solvent, a copper wiring pattern 776 is formed on the base material 791 as shown in FIG. 90 (a). The thickness of the wiring pattern 776 is approximately 0.04 mm, which is the same as the thickness of the copper foil 779. For etching the copper foil 779 and the copper thin film 778 on the base material 791, wet etching in which the base material 791 is immersed in an etching solution may be used.

In the printed wiring board 741, solder resist 792 is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed, and surface treatment such as solder plating, electroless gold plating, and water-soluble flux treatment is performed. Created by. Here, the solder resist 792 is a resist that plays a role of insulating between wiring patterns 776 and also plays a role of preventing solder from adhering to a portion other than the target portion of soldering in the soldering process. Further, the surface treatment is a treatment that is continuous with the wiring pattern 776, is a treatment for improving the solderability of the portion exposed to the outside, and is a treatment for making the copper foil portion less likely to rust.

Specifically, a resist solution is applied to the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed by a curtain coating method, and then the pattern portion of the solder resist 792 is dried and cured. .. Then, by removing the uncured portion of the resist, the printed wiring board 741 is formed with the wiring pattern 776 and the solder resist 792 formed on the base material 791.

As shown in FIG. 90A, in the printed wiring board 741, the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and the wiring pattern 776 are soldered around the upper opening and the lower opening of the via hole 793. A joint hole 762 for electrical connection is formed. The joint hole 762 is a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the width of the wiring pattern 776, and is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the printed wiring board 741, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 having a larger area than the joint hole 762 is formed around a part of the via hole 793 instead of the joint hole 762. ing.

In a state where the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are inserted into the via hole 793, molten solder adheres to the surface of the joint hole 762 or the short circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the via hole 793. Then, the adhered molten solder solidifies, so that the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed to the printed wiring board 741 in a state of being electrically connected to the wiring pattern 776.

Here, the insertion mounting component is also mounted on the printed wiring board 741 by soldering with the terminal 775 (FIG. 88) inserted into the via hole 793 in which the joint hole 762 or the short circuit prevention hole 761 is formed. Has been done.

The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is inserted into the adjacent via hole 793 with the molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89 (a) to (c)) inserted through the via hole 793 in the soldering step. It is provided for the purpose of preventing a short-circuit circuit from being formed on the printed wiring board 741 by merging with the molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p. In the printed wiring board 741, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided around the via hole 793, which has a high probability of forming a short-circuit circuit with the adjacent via hole 793, in place of the joint hole 762.

When the amount of molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p inserted in the via hole 793 increases, the molten solder adheres to the molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p inserted in the adjacent via hole 793. The probability of merging increases. Therefore, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 provided for suppressing the formation of the short-circuit circuit can be used even when the amount of molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p inserted in the via hole 793 increases. It has a large area that can be held on the short circuit prevention hole 761. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set wider than the area of the joint hole 762.

As already described in FIG. 88 (a), a large number of electronic components are mounted on the printed wiring board 741. Therefore, if the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set wide in all directions around the via hole 793, in addition to the via hole 793 closest to the via hole 793, there are a plurality of via holes 793 existing near the via hole 793. There is a possibility that a short circuit will be formed between them. On the other hand, by making the shape of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 an elliptical shape extending in one direction, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a short-circuit circuit occurring on the crowded printed wiring board 741. ..

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the via hole 793 avoids the direction in which the via hole 793 adjacent to the via hole 793 exists, and is different from the adjacent via hole 793. It is formed by extending in the opposite direction. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed as an elliptical hole having a minor axis substantially the same as the diameter of the joint hole 762 and a major axis substantially twice the diameter of the joint hole 762.

In the joint hole 762 and the short circuit prevention hole 761, the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90 (b)) is exposed toward the upper side of the hole. On the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741, the regions other than the joint hole 762 and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 are masked by the solder resist 792, so that solder is selectively adhered to the joint hole 762 portion in the soldering process. be able to.

Next, the solder fillet 798 formed around the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and around the terminal 775 of the through-hole mounting component in the soldering step will be described.

In the soldering step, the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 are inserted into the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741. Then, the molten solder adheres to the via hole 793 and solidifies. As a result, the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed in a state of being electrically connected to the wiring patterns 776 formed on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741.

The solder fillet 798 will be described with reference to FIG. 91 by taking the circumference of the second pin 784b of the one-row connector 782 as an example. FIG. 91 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view of the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741 cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface. Here, the pin 784 is the same member as the pins 784a to 784p provided in the one-row connector 782, the two-pole connector 781, and the two-row connector 783, and is a general term for the pins 784a to 784p.

As shown in FIG. 91, molten solder is solidified around the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 fixed to the printed wiring board 741 to form a solder fillet 798. The solder fillet 798 is formed on the joint hole 762 and has a substantially conical shape extending downward along the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 from the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. The downward length from the bottom surface to the apex of the substantially conical shape is defined as the height of the solder fillet 798. The solder fillet 798 is formed in a manner including a part of the surface of the pin 784 in the one-row connector 782, the inner wall of the via hole 793, and the surface of the joint hole 762 of the printed wiring board 741. As described above, since the joint hole 762 is formed on the printed wiring board 741 and is continuous with the wiring pattern 776 covered by the solder resist 792, the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 is formed by the solder fillet 798. It is electrically connected to the wiring pattern 776.

Further, the pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781 and the pins 784g to 784p of the two-row connector 783 are also soldered in the same manner as the pins 784 of the one-row connector 782. Further, the through-hole mounting components constituting the main control board 61 are also soldered and fixed in a state where the terminals 775 of the through-hole mounting components are inserted into the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741 in the same manner as the connectors 781 to 783. There is. As a result, the terminal 775 (FIG. 88 (a)) of the through-hole mounting component is electrically connected to the via hole 793 and the wiring pattern 776 formed on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741.

FIG. 92 (a) is an enlarged back view showing a part of the same main control board 61 as in FIG. 88 (a). On the back surface of the main control board 61, a joining hole 762 or a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 through which the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89 (a) to (c)) of the connectors 781 to 783 are inserted. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, the back surface region 842 for one row, which is a region around the mounted one-row connector 782, is formed on the joint hole 762. The circular solder fillet 798 to be formed and the elliptical solder fillet 799 formed on the short circuit prevention hole 761 are arranged in a row.

Here, the configuration of the back surface region 842 for one row on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). FIG. 92B is a back view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged back surface area 842 for one row before the one row connector 782 is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the back surface region 842 for one row, the via hole 793 through which the first pin 784a of the one-row connector 782 is inserted is set as the first via hole 793a, and the second pin 784b is inserted. The via hole 793 is referred to as a second via hole 793b. Further, the via hole 793 through which the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is inserted is referred to as a third via hole 793c, and the via hole 793 through which the fourth pin 784d is inserted is referred to as a fourth via hole 793d.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the back surface region 842 for one row, the via holes 793a to 793d are arranged on the left side in the order of the first via hole 793a, the second via hole 793b, the third via hole 793c, and the fourth via hole 793d from the right side. They are lined up in a row. In the soldering step, when the printed wiring board 741 is conveyed in the right direction, the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the back surface region 842 for one row is located at the rear end in the conveying direction. Further, in the soldering step, when the printed wiring board 741 is conveyed in the left direction, the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the back surface region 842 for one row is located at the rear end in the conveying direction.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the back surface region 842 for one row, the wiring pattern 776 is connected to the short circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the first via hole 793a. Further, in the back surface region 842 for one row, the short circuit prevention hole 761, the wiring pattern 776 connected to the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the joint hole 762 are surrounded by an insulating region composed of an insulator. A GND solid 851 for grounding is provided around the insulating region. Then, only the joint hole 762 around the third via hole 793c is electrically connected to the GND solid 851 by the connecting portion 763 having a width narrower than the major axis of the short circuit prevention hole 761. A solder resist 792 is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851. Therefore, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 are not exposed to the outside, and the molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 in the soldering process.

Here, the GND solid 851 will be described. On the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741, in addition to the wiring pattern 776 for connecting the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and the terminal 775 of the through-hole mounting component mounted on the printed wiring board 741, a connector. A GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) is provided as a ground pattern for grounding the 781 to 783 and the through-hole mounting components. The GND solid 851 is a copper pattern and has a large area on the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741.

A part of the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 is connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding. In the back surface region 842 for one row of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the third via hole 793c located third from the right is GND solid, avoiding both ends of the rows of via holes 793a to 793d. It is connected to 851. As a result, in the row of the four pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782 (FIG. 89 (a)), the third pin 784c (FIG. 89 (a)) not located at both ends is grounded.

In the soldering process, a part of the heat possessed by the molten solder around the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is passed through the joining hole 762 formed around the third pin 784c. Move to the GND solid 851 connected to the 762. Since the GND solid 851 has a large area on the printed wiring board 741, it can absorb more heat than the wiring pattern 776 having a narrow area.

The temperature of the molten solder around the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is lower than the temperature of the molten solder around the remaining pins 784a, 784b, 784d in the one-row connector 782. In this way, the temperature of the molten solder around the pins 784a to 784p and the terminal 775 connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding becomes low, and the fluidity of the molten solder decreases. Therefore, merging of molten solder is likely to occur around the pins 784a to 784p and the terminal 775 connected to the GND solid 851, and the environment is such that a short circuit is easily formed.

In the back surface area 842 for one row of the pachinko machine 10, the third via hole 793c connected to the GND solid 851 is set so as not to be located at both ends of the rows of the via holes 793a to 793d, and the back surface area 842 for one row is set. The formation of short-circuit circuits at both ends of the is suppressed.

Next, in order to explain the mechanism by which the solder bridge 751 is generated, first, the soldering process performed for mounting the connectors 781 to 783 and the through-hole mounting components on the printed wiring board 741 will be described.

The main control board 61 shown in FIG. 88 is formed by fixing the connectors 781 to 783 and the through-hole mounting components to the printed wiring board 741 and then performing flow soldering in the automatic soldering device 822 (FIG. 93 (a)). Will be created. Here, the flow soldering is a method of simultaneously supplying molten solder and heat to the target portion of soldering to perform soldering. FIG. 93 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jet flow 821 of the molten solder, and FIG. 93 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the jet flow 821 hits the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. ..

As shown in FIG. 93A, the automatic soldering apparatus 822 includes an inclined member 822a having a gentle gradient, and molten solder flows down on the inclined member 822a. Here, the molten solder is solder that has been heated to approximately 250 ° C. and is in a molten state. When the temperature of the molten solder is low, the fluidity of the molten solder decreases, which causes soldering defects. Specifically, the amount of molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89 (a) to (c)) of the connectors 781 to 783 or the terminals 775 (FIG. 88 (a)) of the through-hole mounting component increases. At the same time, the soldering of the molten solder becomes worse, and the molten solder around the two pins 784a to 784p or the molten solder around the two terminals 775 merge to form the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)). It causes a short circuit.

The soldering step is performed by bringing the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 into contact with the molten solder flowing down on the inclined member 822a of the automatic soldering device 822. As shown in FIG. 93B, in the automatic soldering apparatus 822, the printed wiring board 741 comes into contact with the molten solder while being conveyed with a gentle upward inclination. The printed wiring board 741 is conveyed to the right by a belt conveyor.

Here, by explaining the behavior of the molten solder when the jet 821 hits the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 conveyed by the belt conveyor, the effect of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 To explain. First, the behavior of molten solder in the soldering step of the comparative printed wiring board 831 (FIG. 94 (a)) in which the short circuit prevention hole 761 is not formed will be described.

On the back surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831, a plurality of pins 784a to 784p constituting the connectors 781 to 783 and a plurality of terminals 775 constituting the through-hole mounting component are arranged. For example, as shown in FIG. 93B, when the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are soldered, the comparative printed wiring board 831 is in a state of being gently inclined upward. Since it is conveyed, the start timing and end timing of the contact with the jet 821 are different for each of the four pins 784a to 784d. Here, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the one-row connector 782 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 conveyed to the right, the pin located on the rightmost side is set to the first pin 784a. , The second pin located from the right is the second pin 784b. Further, the pin located third from the right is referred to as the third pin 784c, and the pin located fourth from the right is referred to as the fourth pin 784d.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet 821 in order from the first pin 784a, and finally the fourth pin 784d is in contact with the jet 821. It will be in contact. Then, the first pin 784a is sequentially released from the contact state with the jet 821, and finally the fourth pin 784d is released from the contact state with the jet 821.

See FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c) and FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (c) for the behavior of the molten solder when the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 come out of the contact state with the jet 821. However, it will be explained below. FIG. 94A is a vertical cross section of the comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining the state in which the second pin 784b, the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet 821. FIG. 94 (b) is a vertical sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining how the second pin 784b of the one-row connector 782 comes out of the contact state with the jet 821. (C) is a vertical sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining how the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 comes out of the contact state with the jet 821. Here, the vertical cross-sectional views of FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the cut surface when the comparative printed wiring board 831 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831. ..

From the state where the second pin 784b, the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet 821 (FIG. 94 (a)), only the third pin 784c and the fourth pin 784d are jetted. When the transition to the state of being in contact with 821 (FIG. 94 (b)), a predetermined amount of molten solder remains around the second pin 784b, and the formation of the solder fillet 798 begins. As described above, in the initial stage where the solder fillet 798 is formed, the amount of molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b is the area of the joint hole 762 formed around the second pin 784b and the printed wiring for comparison. It is affected by the transport speed of the plate 831 and the like.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), at the timing of starting the formation of the solder fillet 798 around the second pin 784b, the solder fillet 798 being formed and the jet 821 are continuous around the second pin 784b. be. In this state, the molten solder around the second pin 784b and the molten solder of the jet 821 can come and go.

Here, the static properties of the molten solder will be described. The molten solder at about 250 ° C. has fluidity and surface tension. Therefore, when a small amount of molten solder lumps come into contact with a large amount of molten solder lumps, the molten solder forming the small amount of lumps is attracted toward the large amount of molten solder lumps. As a result, the amount of the molten solder forming a small amount of lumps is smaller than that before the contact, and the amount of the molten solder forming a large amount of lumps is larger than that before the contact.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), when the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b and the molten solder of the jet 821 are continuous, the molten solder around the second pin 784b is better. Due to the small amount, a part of the small amount of molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b is drawn into the jet 821. Therefore, a smaller amount of molten solder remains around the second pin 784b than the molten solder initially adhered, and as shown in FIG. 94 (c), the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b causes the second. A solder fillet 798 is formed on the joint hole 762 formed around the pin 784b.

FIG. 95 (a) is a vertical sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining the state in which the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 has come out of the contact state with the jet 821, and FIG. 95 (b) is shown. Is a vertical sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 shown for explaining a state in which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 has escaped from the contact state with the jet 821, and FIG. 95 (c) is a vertical sectional view of the one-row connector 782. It is a vertical sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board 831 which shows the state which the solder bridge 751 is formed between the 3rd pin 784c and the 4th pin 784d. Here, the vertical cross-sectional views of FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the cut surface when the comparative printed wiring board 831 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831. ..

When the third pin 784c exits the contact state with the jet 821, a part of the molten solder remaining around the third pin 784c is drawn into the jet 821 in the initial stage where the solder fillet 798 is formed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), a smaller amount of molten solder remains around the third pin 784c than the molten solder initially adhered, and the molten solder remaining around the third pin 784c causes the third. A solder fillet 798 is formed on the joint hole 762 formed around the pin 784c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the fourth pin 784d located at the right end of the row composed of the four pins 784a to 784d (FIG. 93 (b)) of the one-row connector 782 is the jet 821. When the solder fillet 798 is formed, the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d and the jet 821 are not in the contact state. Therefore, the amount of molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d at the initial stage is maintained as it is without decreasing.

In the comparative printed wiring board 831, the same joint holes 762 as those around the first pin 784a to the third pin 784c are formed around the via hole 793 through which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is inserted. .. An excessive amount of molten solder tends to remain around the fourth pin 784d with respect to the area of the joint hole 762. When excess molten solder that cannot be accommodated around the 4th pin 784d is generated, it merges most with the molten solder around the 3rd pin 784c adjacent to the front side in the transport direction as shown in FIG. 95 (c). Easy to do.

When the molten solder around the 4th pin 784d and the molten solder around the 3rd pin 784c merge to form a continuous state, the two pins 784c and 784d are between the two pins 784c and 784d. A solder bridge 751 is formed to electrically connect the solder bridges. As a result, a short-circuit circuit is formed in the main control board using the comparative printed wiring board 831. In this case, manual correction work is required after the automatic soldering work, and the manufacturing efficiency of the main control board using the comparative printed wiring board 831 is lowered and the manufacturing cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the main control board 61 of the present embodiment using the printed wiring board 741, as already described in FIG. 92B, the third via hole 793c connected to the GND solid 851 is the back surface region 842 for one row. It is arranged so that it is not located at both ends of. The third via hole 793c is not located at the rear end in the transport direction in both the case where the printed wiring board 741 is transported to the right and the case where the printed wiring board 741 is transported to the left in the soldering step.

Printed wiring has the effect that the fluidity of the molten solder decreases as the temperature of the molten solder around the third pin 784c connected to the GND solid 851 decreases, and the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) is likely to occur. The configuration does not extend around the via holes 793a, 793d, which may be located at the rear end of the plate 741 in the transport direction. As a result, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the via holes 793a and 793d located at the end of the back surface region 842 for one row is reduced due to the influence of the GND solid 851.

Further, in the one-row connector 782, the third pin 784c connected to the GND solid 851 is located inside the row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, so that it is finally around the third pin 784c. The amount of molten solder forming the solder fillet 798 is smaller than the amount of molten solder adhering around the third pin 784c in the initial stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent a solder bridge 751 from being formed around the third pin 784c connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding in the one-row connector 782 and causing a short circuit.

As already described in FIG. 92B, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d through which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is inserted, instead of the joint hole 762. As a result, the molten solder remaining around the 4th pin 784d is suppressed from merging with the molten solder remaining around the 3rd pin 784c, and the generation of the solder bridge 751 is suppressed. Returning to FIG. 92B, the details of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the back surface region 842 for one row in which the via holes 793a to 793d are arranged from right to left, the first via hole 793a and the left end located at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the located fourth via hole 793d, and a joining hole 762 is formed around the second via hole 793b and the third via hole 793c located inside the row. In this way, since the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed at both ends of the rows of the via holes 793a to 793d parallel to the transport direction, even when the printed wiring board 741 is transported to the left in the soldering process, it is also conveyed. It is possible to suppress the generation of the solder bridge 751 around the via hole 793 located at the right end, which is the rear end in the transport direction.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the back surface region 842 for one row, the distance LA1 from the center of the via holes 793a to 793d to the center of the adjacent via holes 793a to 793d is the adjacent pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782. It is 1.5 mm, which is the same as the distance between (FIG. 89 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the distance LB1 from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793a to the right end of the joint hole 762 around the second via hole 793b, and the joint hole 762 around the third via hole 793c. The distance LB1 from the left end to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d is the same as the distance LB1 from the left end of the joint hole 762 around the second via hole 793b to the right end of the joint hole 762 around the third via hole 793c. be.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), around the fourth via hole 793d, the fourth via hole 793d is located on the right side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the short circuit prevention hole 761 is in the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. It is provided near the outside. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d extends outward in the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. Further, around the first via hole 793a, the first via hole 793a is located on the left side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the short circuit prevention hole 761 is provided near the outside of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. .. The short circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793a extends outward in the row of the via holes 793a to 793d.

By providing a short-circuit prevention hole 761 having a major axis longer than the diameter of the joint hole 762 near the outside of the row of via holes 793a to 793d, the molten solder adhering on the joint hole 762 and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 are provided in the soldering process. The possibility that the molten solder adhering to the top of the solder will come close to each other and merge is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of forming a short circuit on the printed wiring board 741.

Next, a solder fillet 799 formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 by the soldering step will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board 741 showing the solder fillet 799 formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782. Here, the vertical cross-sectional view of FIG. 96 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cut surface when the printed wiring board 741 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the printed wiring board 741.

As shown in FIG. 96, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth pin 784d in the printed wiring board 741 has a larger area than the area of the joint hole 762 around the fourth pin 784d in the comparative printed wiring board 831 described above. have. Therefore, on the short-circuit prevention hole 761, a solder fillet 799 having a bottom surface having a larger area than the solder fillet 798 that can be formed on the joint hole 762 can be formed. In this way, the amount of molten solder that stably fits around the fourth pin 784d of the single-row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741 provided with the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is the single-row connector 782 in the comparative printed wiring board 831. More than the amount of molten solder that fits stably around the 4th pin 784d. By forming a short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741, the possibility of excess molten solder being generated around the fourth pin 784d is reduced. , It is possible to suppress the generation of the solder bridge 751 due to the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, and collects on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. The center of gravity of the molten solder is located in the row in a direction away from the adjacent third via hole 793c. Therefore, even if excess molten solder is generated around the 4th pin 784d in the soldering process, the excess molten solder merges with the molten solder around the 3rd pin 784c, which is far away, and the solder bridge 751. Can be suppressed from occurring.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the main control board 61 on which the one-row connector 782 is mounted, a one-row connector having a pin 784 (FIG. 91) spacing wider than 1.5 mm is mounted. It is equipped with a board on which it is mounted and a board on which a single-row connector narrower than 1.5 mm is mounted. In these single-row connectors, the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) for grounding is pin 784 so that it is located outside the leading and trailing ends in the transport direction during the soldering process. It is placed with the end of the row removed. Since a part of the molten solder remaining around the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 is drawn into the jet 821 in the initial stage when the solder fillet 798 (FIG. 91) is formed, the molten solder remaining around the pin 784 is drawn. The amount of is less than the initial amount. In this way, the temperature of the molten solder around the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 decreases, and the viscosity of the molten solder increases, so that there is a probability that a solder bridge 751 will occur around the pin 784. It has been reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10, a joining hole 762 (FIG. 90 (a)) is formed around all the pins 784 of the one-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is larger than 1.5 mm. On the other hand, when a single-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to the printed wiring board, if the joining holes 762 are used around the pins 784 at both ends of the row, the printed wiring board can be conveyed in the transport direction. It is experimental that the molten solder adhering around the pin 784 located at the rear end and the molten solder adhering around the pin 784 adjacent to the pin 784 merge to form the solder bridge 751. I know.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when a single-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to the printed wiring board, it is joined around the pin 784 located at the end of the row. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 90 (a)) having a larger area than the hole 762 is provided. By using the short circuit prevention hole 761 instead of the joint hole 762, the bottom area of the solder fillet 798 that can be formed is increased, and a large amount of molten solder is stably stored around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction. It is possible. This makes it possible to reduce the probability that the solder bridge 751 will be formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the one-row connector.

The short circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the pin 784 located at the end of the row in the one-row connector is provided so as to avoid the adjacent pin 784 existing inside the row and extend toward the outside of the row. There is. In this way, the center of gravity of the molten solder accumulated in the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is located in the direction opposite to the adjacent pin 784, so that the molten solder once accumulated in the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is in the direction of the adjacent pin 784. It can be prevented from moving and merging with the molten solder around the adjacent pin 784 to form the solder bridge 751.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a single-row connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to the printed wiring board, not only around the pin 784 located at one end of the row but also at the other end. Also around the pin 784 located at, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 having an area larger than that of the joint hole 762 and extending toward the outside of the row of pins 784 is provided. Thereby, in the soldering step, the probability that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row in the one-row connector can be reduced regardless of the direction in which the printed wiring board is conveyed. Since the transport direction of the printed wiring board is not limited to one direction in the soldering process, the transport direction of the printed wiring board can be flexibly determined in the soldering process, and the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

The reference value of the pin 784 spacing of 1.5 mm, in which the holes formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row change from the joint holes 762 to the short-circuit prevention holes 761, is one row for a certain number of printed wiring boards. When soldering to mount the connector, the probability that the solder bridge 751 will be formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the one-row connector is smaller than the predetermined reference value. It is a fixed value.

As already described with reference to FIG. 89 (a), the distance between the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 (FIG. 92 (b)) is 1.5 mm, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 ( The conditions for setting FIG. 92 (b)) are satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92B, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided around the first via hole 793a and the fourth via hole 793d in the back surface region 842 for one row of the printed wiring board 741 to print. The possibility that a short-circuit circuit is formed on the wiring board 741 is reduced.

Next, the configuration around the pin 784 constituting the 2-pole connector 781 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, the back surface region 841 for two poles, which is a region around the mounted two-pole connector 781, is formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. There are two oval solder fillets 799.

Here, the configuration of the back surface region 841 for two poles on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (a). FIG. 97A is a back view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged back surface area 841 for two poles before the two-pole connector 781 is mounted. Two via holes 793 are formed in the back surface region 841 for two poles so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. Here, the via hole 793 located on the right side of the back surface region 841 for two poles is referred to as the first via hole 793e, and the via hole 793 located on the left side is referred to as the second via hole 793f.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the two-pole back surface region 841, the first via hole 793e and the second via hole 793f are both located at the ends of the two-pole back surface region 841. Therefore, unlike the case of the back surface region 842 for one row (FIG. 92 (b)) described above, the via holes 793e and 793f connected to the GND solid 851 cannot be arranged at positions other than both ends in the transport direction. As described above, since the temperature of the molten solder drops around the via holes 793e and 793f connected to the GND solid 851, the probability that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will occur around the via holes 793e and 793f. Is expensive. Further, around the via holes 793e and 793f located at the rear end in the transport direction, excess molten solder is likely to adhere at the initial stage where the solder fillet 798 is formed, so that there is a probability that a solder bridge 751 will occur. high.

In the printed wiring board constituting the board included in the pachinko machine 10, in the printed wiring board to which the 2-pole connector is mounted, the two pins 784 (FIG. 91) constituting the 2-pole connector. Both may be pins 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the soldering process. When the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 becomes the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction, the solder bridge 751 is very likely to occur around the pin 784.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the reference of the pin 784 spacing for determining whether or not to provide the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the pin 784 provided in the two-pole connector is the reference in the case of the one-row connector. It is set to 2.5 mm, which is longer than the value of 1.5 mm. That is, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10, when a two-pole connector having a pin 784 spacing of 2.5 mm or less is mounted, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two pins 784 (FIG. 90 (a)). ) Is formed, and a joint hole 762 (FIG. 90 (a)) is formed around the two pins 784 when a two-pole connector having a pin 784 spacing of more than 2.5 mm is mounted. ing.

Returning to the description of FIG. 97 (a), the distance LA2 between the centers of the two via holes 793e and 793f in the back surface region 841 for two poles is 2.5 mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two via holes 793e and 793b formed in the back surface region 841 for two poles.

As described above, in the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the via holes 793e and 793f are located at the rear ends in the conveying direction in the soldering process, and the pins 784e and 784f inserted through the via holes 793e and 793f (FIG. 89 (b)). )), Even if the amount of the molten solder adhering to it increases, it has a large area required to hold the molten solder on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. Therefore, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89 (b)) constituting the two-pole connector 781 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f extends in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first via hole 793e adjacent to the second via hole 793f exists. It is formed. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder collected on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be located in the direction opposite to that of the first via hole 793e. As a result, even if the second via hole 793f is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder adhering on the second via hole 793f does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793e. The generation of the solder bridge 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97A, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 which is the same as the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f is formed around the first via hole 793e. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed so as to extend in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second via hole 793f is present. Therefore, even if the first via hole 793e is located at the rear end in the transport direction in the soldering process, the solder bridge 751 is formed around the two pins 784e and 784f constituting the two-pole connector 781. The possibility of soldering can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97A, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793e located on the right side of the second via hole 793f in the back surface region 841 for two poles has the first via hole 793e at the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761. It is formed to the right so that it is located on the left side of. Further, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f located on the left side of the first via hole 793e in the back surface region 841 for two poles is such that the second via hole 793f is located on the right side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761. , Is formed to the left.

As described above, the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in such a manner that the distance LB2 from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793e to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f is kept wide. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the molten solder adhering around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89 (b)) constituting the two-pole connector 781 from approaching each other, and the two pins 784e, It is possible to prevent the molten solder adhering around the 784f from merging to form the solder bridge 751.

Next, the configuration around the pins 784g to 784p constituting the two-row connector 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741, the back surface area 843 for two rows, which is the area around the mounted two-row connector 783, is formed on the joint hole 762. There is a circular solder fillet 798 and an elliptical solder fillet 799 formed on the short circuit prevention hole 761.

Here, the configuration of the back surface region 843 for two rows on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97B is a back view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged back surface area 843 for two rows before the two-row connector 783 is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 97B, two rows of via holes 793 extending in the left-right direction of the printed wiring board 741 are formed in the vertical direction in the back surface region 843 for two rows. Here, the via holes 793 constituting the upper row are referred to as the 11th via hole 793g, the 12th via hole 793h, the 13th via hole 793i, and the 14th via hole 793j in order from the right side. The via holes 793 forming the lower row are, in order from the right side, the 21st via hole 793k, the 22nd via hole 793m, the 23rd via hole 793n, and the 24th via hole 793p.

Here, a two-row connector mounted on a board included in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, the pins 784 (FIG. 91) constituting the two-row connector and the pins 784 connected to the GND solid 851 (FIG. 97 (b)) for grounding are both ends of the upper row. , And are provided at positions other than both ends of the lower row. In this way, by configuring the pin 784 to be connected to the GND solid 851 not to be arranged at the rear end in the transport direction, the environment is such that the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur around the pin 784 which is the rear end in the transport direction. Can be prevented.

Regarding the criteria for determining whether or not to provide short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction in the two-row connector, if the space between the upper and lower rows is sufficiently wide, the upper row and the upper row are used. The same criteria as for the one-row connector apply to the lower row. Here, the distance between the upper and lower rows is the distance between the center of the pin 784 located at the tip of the upper row and the center of the pin 784 located at the tip of the lower row parallel to the upper row. Is.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the distance between the upper row and the lower row is wider than 2.5 mm, the same standard as that of the one-row connector is applied. In this case, in each row, when the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is LA1 (1.5 mm) or less, short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction. In each row, when the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is longer than the distance LA1 (1.5 mm), a joining hole 762 is formed around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction.

On the other hand, when the distance between the upper row and the lower row is 2.5 mm or less, short-circuit prevention holes are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends in the transport direction of each row regardless of the standard of the one-row connector. 761 is formed. As described above, around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction, there is more molten solder around the pin 784 than around the other pins 784 in the early stages when the solder fillets 798,799 are formed. Adhere to. In a two-row connector, when the distance between the upper row and the lower row is 2.5 mm or less, a large amount of molten solder is attached, and pins 784, which are likely to cause solder bridge 751, are located in each row. There is a possibility that they will be close to each other at the edge. Therefore, in the case of a two-row connector in which the distance between rows is narrow, short-circuit prevention holes are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of each row even when the distance between the pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm. By forming the 761, it is possible to prevent the solder bridge 751 from being generated between the pin 784 located at the end of the upper row and the pin 784 located at the end of the lower row.

Hereinafter, in the two-row connector, the case where the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends will be described by taking the two-row connector 783 provided in the main control board 61 as an example.

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), the upper row of the two-row connector 783 (FIG. 89 (c)) is formed around the thirteenth via hole 793i through which pins 784i not located at both ends of the row are inserted. The joint hole 762 formed in the above is connected to the GND solid 851 for grounding. In this way, by not arranging the pins 784g to 784p connected to the GND solid 851 at both ends of the row, it is possible to prevent the environment in which the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur at the end of the row of the pins 784g to 784p. Can be done.

As already described with reference to FIG. 92 (b), the distance LA1 between the centers of the adjacent via holes 793a to 793d in the back surface region 842 for one row is 1.5 mm. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the distance LA3 between the centers of the adjacent via holes 793g to 793p in the back surface region 843 for two rows is 2 mm, which is longer than the distance LA1 (FIG. 92 (b)). .. However, the distance LA4 from the center of the via holes 793g to 793j in the upper row to the center of the via holes 793k to 793p in the lower row is 2.5 mm. Therefore, in order to prevent the solder bridge 751 from being formed between the pins 784j and 784p (FIG. 89 (c)) of the two-row connector 783 inserted into the via holes 793j and 793p located at the left end in each row. , A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the 14th via hole 793j and around the 24th via hole 793p.

As described above, in the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the 14th via hole 793j and the 24th via hole 793p are located at the rear ends in the transport direction in the soldering process, and the pins 784j and 24th inserted through the 14th via hole 793j. Even if the amount of molten solder adhering to the pin 784p (FIG. 89 (c)) inserted through the via hole 793p increases, the large area required to hold the molten solder on the short circuit prevention hole 761 can be obtained. Have. Therefore, in the two-row connector 783, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the pins 784j and 784p (FIG. 89 (c)) located at the left end of the row of the pins 784g to 784p is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 14th via hole 793j is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row in the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 13th via hole 793i exists. Has been done. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder collected on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be located in the direction opposite to that of the 13th via hole 793i. As a result, even if the 14th via hole 793j is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder adhering on the 14th via hole 793j does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent 13th via hole 793i. The generation of the solder bridge 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 24th via hole 793p is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row in the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 23rd via hole 793n exists. Has been done. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder collected on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be located in the direction opposite to the 23rd via hole 793n. As a result, even if the 24th via hole 793p is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder adhering on the 24th via hole 793p is difficult to move in the direction of the adjacent 23rd via hole 793n. The generation of the solder bridge 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), around the 11th via hole 793g, the same short-circuit prevention hole 761 as the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 14th via hole 793j is formed. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row in the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 12th via hole 793h exists. Further, around the 21st via hole 793k, the same short circuit prevention hole 761 as the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the 24th via hole 793p is formed. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row in the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 22nd via hole 793 m exists. Therefore, in the soldering step, whether the printed wiring board 741 is transported to the right or to the left, the via holes 793g, 793j, 793k located at both ends of the row of the via holes 793g to 793p. , The possibility of solder bridge 751 being formed around 793p can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the via holes 793g, 793j, 793k, 793p located at the end of the row in the back surface region 843 for the second row are formed closer to the outside of the row. Specifically, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 11th via hole 793g is formed so that the 11th via hole 793g is located on the left side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and is short-circuited around the 21st via hole 793k. The prevention hole 761 is formed so that the 21st via hole 793k is located on the left side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761. Further, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 14th via hole 793j is formed so that the 14th via hole 793j is located on the right side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 24th via hole 793p. Is formed in such a manner that the 24th via hole 793p is located on the right side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761.

In this way, it is avoided that the molten solder adhering to the short circuit prevention hole 761 is in a state of approaching the molten solder adhering to the joint hole 762 adjacent to the short circuit prevention hole 761. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 merges with the molten solder adhering to the joint hole 762 adjacent to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 to form the solder bridge 751.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the pins 784 arranged in a row on the printed wiring board 741, if the distance between the adjacent pins 784 in the row is less than or equal to the reference distance, the pins 784 not located at the end of the row A joint hole 762 is formed around the joint hole 762, and a short circuit prevention hole 761 having a larger area than the joint hole 762 is formed around the pin 784 located at the end of the row. Therefore, a large amount of molten solder is stably formed around the pin 784, which is located at the rear end in the transport direction, as compared with the case where the joint hole 762 is also formed around the pin 784 at the end of the row. It is possible to fit in the pin 784, and the probability that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 is reduced.

The shape of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is elliptical. Therefore, the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set to a large area that can hold the molten solder adhering around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction around the pin 784, while the short-circuit prevention hole 761 It is possible to prevent the molten solder on the above from merging with the molten solder adhering around the plurality of pins 784 existing near the pin 784.

Short-circuit prevention holes 761 around pins 784 located at the ends of the row are formed extending outward of the row. Therefore, the center of gravity of the molten solder collected on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be positioned in the direction in which the adjacent pin 784 does not exist. When the pin 784 located at the end of the row is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder accumulated around the pin 784 merges with the molten solder around the adjacent pin 784. You can prevent that. This makes it possible to prevent the solder bridge 751 from being generated between the pin 784 at the end of the row and the pin 784 adjacent to the pin 784.

Short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed not only around the pin 784 located at one end of the row but also around the pin 784 located at the other end of the row so as to extend toward the outside of the row. Therefore, in the soldering process, regardless of which transport direction the printed wiring board 741 is transported, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. can do.

The length of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the via hole 793 protruding from the via hole 793 toward the inside of the row (adjacent pin 784 side) is the solder fillet formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761. It is set to the minimum length required to maintain the strength of 799. If the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is configured to protrude greatly from the via hole 793 to the inside of the row in order to secure a large area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the adjacent joint hole 762 or the adjacent short-circuit prevention from the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is prevented. The distance to the molten solder adhering to the hole 761 becomes short, and there is a possibility that merging of the molten solder is likely to occur. In this case, the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridge 751 by securing a large area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is halved. On the other hand, by minimizing the length of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 protruding from the via hole 793 toward the inside of the row, the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 moves toward the adjacent via hole 793. The possibility can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to avoid halving the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridge 751 by providing the short circuit prevention hole 761.

Further, when the distance between the pins 784 is wider than the reference value, the area around the pins 784 located at the end of the printed wiring board 741 in the transport direction in the row of the pins 784 is larger than that of the joint hole 762. The configuration does not utilize the large short-circuit prevention hole 761. By omitting unnecessary short-circuit prevention holes 761 on the printed wiring board 741 where the area is limited, the number of insert-mounting parts that can be mounted on the printed wiring board 741 can be increased, and the density of the board can be increased. can.

Further, except for the case of the 2-pole connector 781 in which it is unavoidable to arrange the pin 784 to be connected to the GND solid 851 at the end of the row composed of a plurality of pins 784, the pin 784 to be connected to the GND solid 851 is connected to the row. It is a configuration that is not placed at the edge. Further, the distance between the pins 784 as a reference for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the two-pole connector 781 is set wider than the distance between the pins 784 as a reference for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the one-row connector 782 and the two-row connector 783. ing. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 will occur due to the temperature of the molten solder dropping around the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851.

When the printed wiring board 741 has a plurality of rows of via holes 793, the via holes 793 located at the end of the first row and the via holes 793 located at the end of the second row different from the first row. And are arranged closer to the reference value on the printed wiring board 741 even when the distance between the centers of the adjacent via holes 793 in each row is wider than the reference value for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761. Short circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in both of the via holes 793 located at the ends of the two rows. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 will be formed between the pins 784 that are inserted into the two via holes 793, which are located at the ends of different rows and are in an environment where the amount of molten solder adhered to each is high. be able to.

<Another form of the 19th embodiment>
In the 19th embodiment described above, the direction in which the short circuit prevention holes 761 around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row are extended is not limited to the direction opposite to the adjacent pins 784. For example, in a row of pins 784 arranged along the left-right direction, the direction in which the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the pin 784 located at the right end and the pin 784 located at the left end extends is formed with respect to the left-right direction. It may be tilted at a predetermined angle. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the left-right direction is referred to as an inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861, and the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 98 (a).

The printed wiring board 863 is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment in that the back surface region 862 for one row in which the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 is formed is provided. FIG. 98 (a) is a back view of a printed wiring board 863 showing an enlarged back surface region 862 for one row provided with an inclined short circuit prevention hole 861. Here, in FIG. 98 (a), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown. Hereinafter, a case where the printed wiring board 863 is conveyed to the right in the soldering step will be described. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), two single-row connectors 782 (FIG. 89 (a)) are mounted side by side on the back surface region 862 for one row of the printed wiring board 863.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the four pins 784 (FIG. 91) included in the first connector, which is the first row connector 782, are inserted into the back surface region 862 for one row. As via holes, the first via holes 864 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction at intervals of 1.5 mm. Here, the first via hole 864 has the same configuration as the via hole 793 (FIG. 90 (b)) in the 19th embodiment.

Further, in the back surface area 862 for one row, the second via hole 865, which is a via hole for inserting the four pins 784 provided by the second connector, which is the second one-row connector 782, is spaced by 1.5 mm. They are lined up in a row in the left-right direction. Here, the second via hole 865 has the same configuration as the via hole 793 (FIG. 90 (b)) in the 19th embodiment.

Further, the centers of the four first via holes 864 and the centers of the four second via holes 865 are aligned on the same straight line. Further, the second via hole 865 is located to the right of the first via hole 864, and is located at the right end of the four first via holes 864 from the center of the first via hole 864, and is located at the left end of the four second via holes 865. The distance to the center of the second via hole 865 located in is 3 mm.

Joint holes 762 are formed around the first via hole 864 not located at both ends of the row of the first via hole 864 and around the second via hole 865 not located at both ends of the row of the second via hole 865. Then, around the first via hole 864 located at the right end in the four first via holes 864 and around the second via hole 865 located at the right end in the four second via holes 865, respectively, diagonally to the right. An inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 is formed so as to extend upward. The inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 has an elliptical shape having the same shape and size as the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the nineteenth embodiment, and its center is located diagonally to the right of the via holes 864 and 865 located at the right end. ing.

Also, around the first via hole 864 located at the left end in the four first via holes 864 and around the second via hole 865 located at the left end in the four second via holes 865, respectively, diagonally to the left. An inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 is formed so as to extend downward. The inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 has an elliptical shape having the same shape and size as the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the nineteenth embodiment, and its center is located diagonally to the lower left of the via holes 864 and 865 located at the left end. ing.

In this way, in the configuration in which the pin 784 located at the right end of the first connector and the pin 784 located at the left end of the second connector are close to each other in the transport direction, the pin 784 is located at the right end of the first connector. The inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 around the pin 784 is formed so as to extend diagonally upward to the right, and the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 around the pin 784 located at the left end of the second connector is oblique to the left. It is a configuration that extends downward and is formed. As a result, the molten solder collected in the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 at the right end of the first connector and the molten solder collected in the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 at the left end of the second connector merge to form the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)). ) Can be prevented from being formed.

In the 19th embodiment described above, the via hole 793 is located at the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the distance between the short circuit prevention hole 761 and the joint hole 762 is the same as the distance between the joint holes 762. It may be a certain configuration. A specific example of the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (b).

The printed wiring board 866 extends from the center of the rightmost via hole 793 to the center of the rightmost via hole 793 and the adjacent via hole 793, and from the center of the leftmost via hole 793 to the center of the leftmost via hole 793 and the adjacent via hole 793. Is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the 19th embodiment in that the distance is set wider than the distance between the centers of the via holes 793 inside the row. FIG. 98B is a back view of a printed wiring board 866 showing an enlarged back surface area 867 for one row. Here, in FIG. 98 (b), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 98 (b), via holes 793 for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d constituting the one-row connector 782 are formed in the left-right direction in the back surface region 867 for one row of the printed wiring board 866. It is formed side by side in a row. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 located at the right end in such a manner that the via hole 793 at the right end is located at the center, and the via hole 793 at the left end is centered around the via hole 793 located at the left end. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in an embodiment located in the above. Further, a joint hole 762 is formed around the via hole 793 located second from the right and around the via hole 793 located third from the right in such a manner that the via hole 793 is located in the center.

Here, the distance between the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the via hole 793 located at the right end and the right end of the joint hole 762 around the via hole 793 located second from the right is defined as the distance LC1 and is the second from the right. The distance between the left end of the joint hole 762 around the located via hole 793 and the right end of the joint hole 762 around the via hole 793 located third from the right is defined as the distance LC2. Further, the distance between the left end of the joint hole 762 around the via hole 793 located third from the right and the right end of the short circuit prevention hole 761 located at the left end is defined as the distance LC3.

In this case, by configuring the distance LC1, the distance LC2, and the distance LC3 to be the same distance, the molten solder adhering to the short circuit prevention hole 761 is compared with the configuration in which all the via holes 793 are evenly spaced. The center of gravity of the solder is far from the center of gravity of the molten solder adhering to the joint hole 762, and the probability that the molten solder on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and the molten solder on the joint hole 762 merge to form the solder bridge 751 is reduced. Can be done. Further, since the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are fixed to the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the strength of the solder fillet 799 formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is increased to vibrate during use. The possibility that the solder fillet 799 is damaged due to the above can be reduced, and the service life of the main control board 61 can be extended.

In the 19th embodiment described above, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 may be configured such that the via hole 793 located inside the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is located in the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761. The configuration will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 98 (c).

The printed wiring board 868 is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment in that the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided with a back surface region 869 for one row formed in a manner centered on the via hole 793. FIG. 98 (c) is a back view of the printed wiring board 868 showing an enlarged back surface area 869 for one row in the printed wiring board 868. Here, in FIG. 98 (c), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 98 (c), the printed wiring board 868 has four via holes 793 in the left-right direction at 1.5 mm intervals for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d provided in the one-row connector 782. It is formed in a line-up manner. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 located at the right end with the via hole 793 at the right end at the center, and the via hole 793 at the left end is centered around the via hole 793 located at the left end. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in this manner. A joint hole 762 is formed around the via hole 793 located second from the right with the via hole 793 at the center, and the via hole 793 is formed around the via hole 793 located third from the right. The joint hole 762 is formed in a manner centered on.

In this way, the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are inserted into the via hole 793 formed in the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and soldered, so that the pins 784a to 784d are located at both ends of the one-row connector 782. The solder fillet 799 formed around the pins 784a and 784d is stronger in the lateral force than the solder fillet 799 formed when the via hole 793 is formed at the end of the short circuit prevention hole 761. Strong against force. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be a board having a low probability of being broken even if vibration or the like is applied.

The distance between the four via holes 793 formed in the back surface region 869 for one row is 1.5 mm, which is the same as the distance between the four via holes 793 formed in the back surface region 842 for one row in the 19th embodiment. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be made into a vibration-resistant board without adjusting the distance between the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 before the soldering step.

<20th Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 19th embodiment in that a joint hole 762 and a separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 are formed in place of the short circuit prevention hole 761. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the 19th embodiment will be basically omitted.

The main control board 61 of this embodiment includes a printed wiring board 872. In the printed wiring board 872, around the pins 784a and 784d (FIG. 89 (a)) at both ends of the one-row connector 782 and around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89 (b)) of the two-pole connector 781. And around the pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends in each row of the two-row connector 783, and in each of them, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole for suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)). 871,874 are formed. The configuration around the one-row connector 782 of the printed wiring board 872 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b). FIG. 99 (a) is a back view of the printed wiring board 872 showing an enlarged back surface area 873 for one row, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged printed wiring board showing the periphery of the pin 784 of the one row connector 782. It is a vertical sectional view of 872. Here, in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown.

First, the shape of the joint hole 762 formed in the printed wiring board 872 of the main control board 61 will be described. As shown in FIG. 99A, the printed wiring board 872 is formed with four via holes 793 for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d included in the one-row connector 782. The via holes 793 are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals of 1.5 mm.

In the printed wiring board 872, a joining hole 762 is formed around the four via holes 793. The joint hole 762 is a circular hole slightly larger than the via hole 793, and the via hole 793 is formed so as to be located at the center of the joint hole 762.

With respect to the four pins 784a to 784d constituting the one-row connector 782, the pins 784 arranged nth from the right are referred to as the nth pin 784. For example, the pin 784 arranged second from the right is the second pin 784b. Further, regarding the four via holes 793 formed in the printed wiring board 872, the via hole 793 formed nth from the right is referred to as the nth via hole 793. For example, the third via hole 793 formed from the right is the third via hole 793c. Further, the joint hole 762 formed around the nth via hole 793 is referred to as the nth joint hole 762. For example, the joint hole 762 formed around the fourth via hole 793d is the fourth joint hole 762d. Here, n is a natural number of 1 to 4.

Four via holes 793a to 793d are arranged in one row in the left-right direction in the back surface region 873 for one row of the printed wiring board 872, and the first via hole 793a is formed at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. At the same time, a fourth via hole 793d is formed at the left end. A separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 which is a short-circuit prevention hole separated from the fourth joint hole 762d is formed in the vicinity of the left side of the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. The separate type short-circuit prevention hole 871 has a semi-circular reservoir 871a having a diameter larger than that of the joint hole 762, and a contraction that is continuous with the reservoir 871a and gradually narrows toward the fourth junction hole 762d. It is composed of a width portion 871b. The narrowed width portion 871b has a width substantially the same as the diameter of the reservoir portion 871a in the vertical direction of the back surface region 873 for one row in the region continuous with the reservoir portion 871a. Further, the distance LD1 from the right end of the narrowed portion 871b to the left end of the fourth joint hole 762d is shorter than the distance LD2 from the right end of the fourth joint hole 762d to the left end of the third joint hole 762c.

Further, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874, which is a short-circuit prevention hole separated from the first joint hole 762a, is formed in the vicinity of the right side of the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. The separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874 has a semi-circular reservoir portion 874a having a diameter larger than that of the joint hole 762 and a contraction that is continuous with the reservoir portion 874a and gradually narrows in width toward the first joint hole 762a. It is composed of a width portion 874b and a width portion 874b. The narrowed width portion 874b has a width substantially the same as the diameter of the reservoir portion 874a in the vertical direction of the back surface region 873 for one row in the region continuous with the reservoir portion 874a. Further, the distance LD1 from the left end of the narrowed portion 871b to the right end of the first joint hole 762a is shorter than the distance LD2 from the left end of the first joint hole 762a to the right end of the second joint hole 762b.

Next, in the soldering step, when the printed wiring board 872 is transported to the right and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is located at the rear end in the transport direction. The mechanism by which the generation of the solder bridge 751 is suppressed around the fourth pin 784d will be described below with reference to FIG. 99 (b). In the soldering step, just before the 4th pin 784d of the 1-row connector 782 comes out of the contact state with the jet 821 (FIG. 93 (b)), the 4th joint hole 762d formed around the 4th pin 784d and its rear portion thereof. The separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 formed in the vicinity is in contact with the jet 821.

Immediately after the 4th pin 784d of the 1-row connector 782 is released from the contact state with the jet 821, the molten solder adhering on the 4th joint hole 762d and the molten solder adhering on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871. The molten solder adhering to the fourth joint hole 762d and the molten solder adhering to the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 become independent of each other via the intermediate state in which the two are continuous.

In the intermediate state before the molten solder adhering on the 4th joint hole 762d becomes independent, the molten solder remaining around the 4th pin 784d is on the 4th joint hole 762d and the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871. Divided into the top. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 is not formed around the fourth joint hole 762d, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), by using the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871, the second type short circuit prevention hole 871 is used. It is possible to reduce the amount of molten solder adhering to the 4 joint holes 762d and reduce the possibility that excess molten solder, which causes the generation of the solder bridge 751, is generated on the 4th joint hole 762d.

As already described in FIG. 99 (a), the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 is formed in a manner not continuous with the fourth joint hole 762d, and the molten solder once moved onto the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 is the first. 4 The structure is such that it is difficult to move onto the joint hole 762d. With this configuration, the possibility that the molten solder cannot be completely accommodated on the fourth joint hole 762d and the solder bridge 751 is formed is reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the separate type short-circuit prevention hole 871 has a larger area than the fourth joint hole 762d. Therefore, the amount of molten solder that moves onto the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 in the intermediate state can be increased, and the amount of molten solder that moves onto the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that excess molten solder, which causes the generation of the solder bridge 751, is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the reservoir portion 871a has a larger area than the narrowed width portion 871b and has a large width in the vertical direction of the back surface region 873 for one row. As shown in b), most of the molten solder accumulated on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 moves onto the reservoir 871a due to the surface tension of the molten solder.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in order to hold most of the molten solder accumulated on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 at a position away from the molten solder accumulated on the fourth joint hole 762d, the reservoir portion 871a is provided at a position farther from the fourth joint hole 762d than the narrowed width portion 871b. As a result, the possibility that the molten solder on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 comes into contact with the molten solder on the fourth joint hole 762d and moves toward the fourth joint hole 762d is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when excess molten solder is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d, the excess molten solder is shrunk in order to move in a direction different from that of the third joint hole 762c. The distance LD1 from the width portion 871b to the fourth joint hole 762d is set shorter than the distance LD2 from the fourth joint hole 762d to the third joint hole 762c.

In the soldering step, when the printed wiring board 872 is transported to the left, the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the back surface region 873 for one row is located at the rear end in the transport direction. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), a separate short-circuit prevention hole 874 is formed in the vicinity of the right side of the first joint hole 762a in order to suppress the generation of the solder bridge 751 around the first via hole 793a. ing.

The separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874 formed in the vicinity of the right side of the first joint hole 762a has the same size and shape as the separate type short-circuit prevention hole 871 formed in the vicinity of the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d. is doing. In the separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874, the reservoir portion 874a is set from the narrowed portion 874b in order to hold most of the molten solder adhering on the separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874 at a position away from the first joint hole 762a. Is also provided so as to be located far from the first joint hole 762a.

Here, in the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine of the 19th embodiment described above is used as a reference for providing the separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 around the pin 784 (FIG. 91). In the substrate provided with 10, the same standard as the standard for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 92 (b)) around the pin 784 is applied. Specifically, in the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the one-row connector is mounted on the substrate, the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is satisfied. Separate short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 (FIG. 99 (a)) are provided around the pins at both ends of the single-row connector. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will be formed around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joining hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the one-row connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the two-pole connector is mounted on the board, the two-pole connector satisfies the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less. Separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 (FIG. 99 (a)) are provided around the two pins 784 of the above. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will be formed around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joining hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the 2-pole connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is wider than 2.5 mm.

In the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the condition that the two-row connector is mounted on the substrate and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is 1.5 mm or less, or If at least one of the conditions that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is 2.5 mm or less is satisfied, around the pins 784 located at both ends of each row of the two-row connector. Is provided with a separate type short circuit prevention hole 871,874 (FIG. 99 (a)). This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will be formed around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, if the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is wider than 2.5 mm, the area around the pins 784 A joining hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

At the left end of the back surface region 873 for one row, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is provided on the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d in a manner not continuous with the fourth joint hole 762d. As a result, the amount of molten solder adhering to the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced, and the possibility that excess molten solder that causes the solder bridge 751 to be generated can be reduced on the fourth joint hole 762d. can. Since the 4th joint hole 762d and the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 are not continuous, the possibility that the molten solder once moved onto the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 returns to the 4th joint hole 762d should be reduced. It is possible to reduce the possibility that excess molten solder is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d to form the solder bridge 751.

Since the area of the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 is set larger than the area of the fourth joint hole 762d, the molten solder that moves on the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 in the intermediate state in which the solder fillet 798 is formed. The amount can be increased to reduce the amount of molten solder moving onto the fourth joint hole 762d. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that excess molten solder, which causes the generation of the solder bridge 751, is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d.

In the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871, the reservoir portion 871a has a larger area than the narrowed width portion 871b, and holds more molten solder than the narrowed width portion 871b. The reservoir portion 871a is provided to the left of the fourth joint hole 762d with respect to the narrowed width portion 871b. Therefore, most of the molten solder accumulated on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 is held away from the molten solder accumulated on the fourth joint hole 762d. In this way, by configuring the structure so that the amount of molten solder existing on the fourth joint hole 762d does not easily increase, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from being unable to fit on the fourth joint hole 762d, and the solder bridge 751. The occurrence can be suppressed.

The distance LD1 from the narrowed portion 871b to the fourth joint hole 762d is set shorter than the distance LD2 from the fourth joint hole 762d to the third joint hole 762c. Therefore, the excess molten solder generated on the fourth joint hole 762d is merged with the molten solder on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871, and the excess molten solder is combined with the molten solder on the third joint hole 762c. It is possible to prevent them from merging. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a solder bridge 751 is formed between the pin 784d inserted through the fourth joint hole 762d and the pin 784c inserted through the third joint hole 762c.

At the right end of the back surface region 873 for one row, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874 is provided on the right side of the first joint hole 762a in a manner not continuous with the first joint hole 762a. As a result, even if the printed wiring board 872 is conveyed to the left in the soldering step, it is possible to prevent the solder bridge 751 from being generated around the first via hole 793a which is located at the rear end in the conveying direction. Can be done.

<Another form of the twentieth embodiment>
-In the twentieth embodiment described above, the number of the separate type short circuit prevention holes 871 formed in the vicinity of the fourth joint hole 762d is not limited to one. Further, the number of the separate type short circuit prevention holes 874 formed in the vicinity of the first joint hole 762a is not limited to one. For example, the left side separation type short circuit prevention hole 886, the upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875, and the lower left separation having the same size and shape as the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 of the 20th embodiment in the vicinity of the fourth joint hole 762d. A right-side separation type short-circuit prevention hole having the same size and shape as the separation-type short-circuit prevention hole 874 of the twentieth embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the first joint hole 762a with a type short-circuit prevention hole 876. It may be configured to include 887, an upper right separated type short circuit prevention hole 877, and a lower right separate type short circuit prevention hole 878. The configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (a).

FIG. 100A is a back view of a printed wiring board 879 showing an enlarged back surface area 885 for one row in which six separate type short circuit prevention holes 875 to 878, 886, 887 are formed. Here, in FIG. 100 (a), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), in the vicinity of the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d, the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed as the left side separate type short circuit prevention hole 886. There is. Further, an upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875 is formed diagonally above the left of the fourth joint hole 762d, and a lower left separation type short circuit prevention hole 876 is formed diagonally below the left of the fourth joint hole 762d. ..

The upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875 is composed of an upper left reservoir portion 875a and an upper left narrowing portion 875b, and the width of the upper left narrowing portion 875b gradually decreases toward the fourth joint hole 762d. It is provided close to the joint hole 762d. In the upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875, the upper left reservoir portion 875a is provided at a position far to the left from the fourth joint hole 762d with respect to the upper left narrowed width portion 875b. Further, the lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876 is composed of a lower left reservoir portion 876a and a lower left narrowed width portion 876b, and the width of the lower left narrowed width portion 876b gradually decreases toward the fourth joint hole 762d. It is provided close to the fourth joint hole 762d. In the lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876, the lower left reservoir portion 876a is provided at a position on the upper left side of the fourth joint hole 762d with respect to the lower left narrowed width portion 876b.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the first joint hole 762a, the separation type short circuit prevention hole 874 already described in the above 20th embodiment is formed as the right side separation type short circuit prevention hole 887. Further, an upper right separated type short circuit prevention hole 877 is formed diagonally above the first joint hole 762a, and a lower right separate type short circuit prevention hole 878 is formed diagonally below the right side of the first joint hole 762a. There is.

The upper right separation type short circuit prevention hole 877 is composed of an upper right reservoir portion 877a and an upper right narrowing portion 877b, and the width of the upper right narrowing portion 877b gradually decreases toward the first joint hole 762a. It is provided close to the joint hole 762a. In the upper right separation type short circuit prevention hole 877, the upper right reservoir portion 877a is set at a position located to the upper right of the first joint hole 762a with respect to the upper right narrowing portion 877b. Further, the lower right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 878 is composed of a lower right reservoir portion 878a and a lower right narrowed width portion 878b, and the width of the lower right narrowed width portion 878b gradually increases toward the first joint hole 762a. It is set close to the first joint hole 762a in a reduced manner. In the lower right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 878, the lower right reservoir portion 878a is set at a position lower to the lower right from the first joint hole 762a than the lower right narrowed width portion 878b.

In this way, by forming the left side separation type short circuit prevention hole 886, the upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875, and the lower left separation type short circuit prevention hole 876 around the fourth joint hole 762d, the left side separation type short circuit prevention hole 876 is formed on the fourth joint hole 762d. When excess molten solder adheres, the excess molten solder is pulled in three directions different from the third joint hole 762c adjacent to the fourth joint hole 762d, and is pulled into the three reservoirs 875a, 876a, 886a. Can be stored. Therefore, even if excess molten solder adheres to the fourth joint hole 762d, the molten solder is prevented from merging with the molten solder on the adjacent third joint hole 762c to generate the solder bridge 751. Can be done.

When the printed wiring board 879 is transported to the left in the soldering step, the first joint hole 762a is located at the rear end in the transport direction in the back surface region 885 for one row. When excess molten solder adheres to the first junction hole 762a, the excess molten solder is pulled in three directions different from the second junction hole 762b adjacent to the first junction hole 762a. It can be stored in the storage portions 877a, 878a, 887a. Therefore, even if excess molten solder adheres to the first joint hole 762a, the molten solder is prevented from merging with the molten solder on the adjacent second joint hole 762b to generate the solder bridge 751. Can be done.

-Instead of the separate type short circuit prevention hole 871 of the twentieth embodiment described above, a three-way separation type short circuit prevention hole 881 that surrounds the periphery of the fourth joint hole 762d from three directions may be set. The three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (b).

The printed wiring board 882 is different from the printed wiring board 872 of the twentieth embodiment in that it includes a back surface region 883 for one row in which two three-way separation type short-circuit prevention holes 881,884 are formed. FIG. 100B is a back view of a printed wiring board 882 showing an enlarged back surface area 883 for one row in which two three-way separation type short circuit prevention holes 881,884 are formed. Here, in FIG. 100 (b), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown.

First, in the printed wiring board 882, the configuration around the fourth joint hole 762d located at the left end of the back surface region 883 for one row will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the left side having a U-shaped shape surrounding the fourth joint hole 762d on the upper side, the left side, and the lower side of the fourth joint hole 762d. A three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 is formed. The left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 has an upper portion 881a located above the fourth joint hole 762d, a left portion 881b located to the left of the fourth joint hole 762d, and a lower portion of the fourth joint hole 762d. It is composed of a lower portion 881c located at. Between the 4th joint hole 762d and the upper portion 881a of the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881, between the 4th joint hole 762d and the left portion 881b, and between the 4th joint hole 762d and the lower portion 881c. Is shorter than the distance from the right end of the fourth joint hole 762d to the left end of the third joint hole 762c. Further, the total area of the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 is larger than the area of the joint hole 762.

In the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881, the upper portion 881a, the left portion 881b, and the lower portion 881c form a convex portion 881d extending toward the fourth joint hole 762d in a manner not continuous with the fourth joint hole 762d. I have.

If excess molten solder adheres to the 4th pin 784d of the 1-row connector 782 and cannot fit on the 4th joint hole 762d, the excess molten solder has a different direction from the 3rd joint hole 762c and is the 4th. Excess molten solder can be drawn into the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 by contacting with the molten solder on the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 which has a larger area than the joining hole 762. can.

The convex portion 881d of the upper portion 881a, the left portion 881b, and the lower portion 881c is closer to the fourth joint hole 762d from three directions, and the convex portion 881d is a fourth joint hole rather than the third joint hole 762c. It is located near 762d. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the molten solder generated on the fourth joint hole 762d will move in three directions different from those of the third joint hole 762c.

By configuring the structure so that the excess molten solder generated on the fourth joint hole 762d does not face the adjacent third joint hole 762c, the excess molten solder moves onto the third joint hole 762c and the solder bridge 751. Can be reduced.

Further, since the molten solder that comes into contact with the three convex portions 881d and is drawn in different three directions is held in the common left side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881, the solder bridge 751 is generated in the printed wiring board 882. The area occupied by the configuration for suppressing can be minimized, and the density of the printed wiring board 882 can be increased.

Next, in the printed wiring board 882, the configuration around the first joint hole 762a located at the right end of the back surface region 883 for one row will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the right side having a U-shaped shape surrounding the first joint hole 762a around the upper side, the right side, and the lower side of the first joint hole 762a. A three-way separation type short circuit prevention hole 884 is formed. The right three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884 has an upper portion 884a located above the first joint hole 762a, a right portion 884b located to the right of the first joint hole 762a, and a lower portion of the first joint hole 762a. It is composed of a lower portion 884c located at. Between the first joint hole 762a and the upper portion 884a of the right three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884, between the first joint hole 762a and the right portion 884b, and between the first joint hole 762a and the lower portion 884c. Is shorter than the distance from the right end of the first joint hole 762a to the right end of the third joint hole 762c. Further, the total area of the right three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884 is larger than the area of the joint hole 762.

In the right three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884, the upper portion 884a, the right portion 884b, and the lower portion 884c form a convex portion 884d extending toward the first joint hole 762a in a manner not continuous with the first joint hole 762a. I have.

When the printed wiring board 882 is transported to the left in the soldering step, the first joint hole 762a is located at the rear end in the transport direction in the back surface region 883 for one row. The first joint is provided by providing the right three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884 around the first joint hole 762a in the same manner as the left three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 is provided around the fourth joint hole 762d. Even if excess molten solder adheres to the hole 762a, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from merging with the molten solder on the adjacent second joining hole 762b to generate the solder bridge 751.

Since the molten solder that comes into contact with the three convex portions 884d and is drawn in different three directions is held in the common right side three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 884, the solder bridge 751 is located at the right end of the back surface area 883 for one row. The area occupied by the printed wiring board 882 by the configuration for suppressing the generation can be minimized, and the density of the printed wiring board 882 can be increased.

<21st Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 19th embodiment in that short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895, 921 to 925 are formed in place of the short-circuit prevention holes 761. Hereinafter, the description of the same configuration as that of the 19th embodiment will be basically omitted.

The main control board 61 of the present embodiment includes a printed wiring board 897. In the printed wiring board 897, around the pins 784a and 784d (FIG. 89 (a)) at both ends of the one-row connector 782 and around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89 (b)) of the two-pole connector 781. And around the pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends in each row of the two-row connector 783, and in each of them, a short-circuit prevention hole group 891 for suppressing the occurrence of a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)). To 895, 921 to 925 are formed. The configuration around the one-row connector 782 of the printed wiring board 897 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a back view of a printed wiring board 897 showing an enlarged back surface area 896 for one row in which short circuit prevention holes 891 to 895, 921 to 925 for suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 are formed. Here, in FIG. 101, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 (FIG. 92 (b)) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 101, via holes 793a to 793d for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d (FIG. 89A) of the one-row connector 782 are formed in the back surface region 896 for one row. In the back surface region 896 for one row, the four via holes 793a to 793d are arranged in one row in the left-right direction, and the distance between the via holes 793a to 793d in the row is 1.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 101, for the four via holes 793a to 793d, the via holes arranged nth from the right are referred to as the nth via hole. For example, the beer holes lined up on the far right are the first beer holes 793a. Here, n is a natural number of 1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 101, a circular joining hole 762 is formed around the second via hole 793b and the third via hole 793c. The joint hole 762 has a larger area than the via holes 793b and 793c, and is formed in such a manner that the via holes 793b and 793c are located in the center of the joint hole 762.

Short circuit prevention holes 891 to 895 are formed on the left side of the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. Further, short circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a located at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. First, the short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895 formed on the left side of the fourth via hole 793d will be described.

As shown in FIG. 101, a small short-circuit prevention hole 891 having the same size and shape as the joint hole 762 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d. The small short-circuit prevention hole 891 is formed in such a manner that the fourth via hole 793d is located at the center of the small short-circuit prevention hole 891. A large short-circuit prevention hole 892 having a larger area than the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 is formed on the left side of the small short-circuit prevention hole 891, and the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 are small short-circuit prevention holes. They are connected by a first passage area 894 having a passage width smaller than the diameter of the hole 891.

Further, medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 having a larger area than the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and a smaller area than the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 are formed on the diagonally upper right and diagonally lower right of the large short-circuit prevention hole 892. The large short-circuit prevention hole 892 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 are connected by a second passage area 895 having a passage width wider than that of the first passage area 894.

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is transported in the right direction, the fourth pin 784d (FIG. 89 (a)) located at the left end of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction. Will be done. In this case, in the one-row connector 782, when the fourth pin 784d located at the rear end in the transport direction comes out of the contact state with the jet 821 (FIG. 93 (a)), the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 , And the molten solder adheres to the large short-circuit prevention hole 892. Since a large amount of molten solder remains on a hole with a large area, the amount of molten solder remaining on the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 is the amount of the molten solder remaining on the large short-circuit prevention hole 892. Less than the amount.

The lump of molten solder remaining on the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 is connected to the lump of molten solder remaining on the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 at the first passage region 894. Further, the lump of molten solder remaining on the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 is connected to the lump of molten solder remaining on the large-sized short-circuit prevention hole 892 at the second passage region 895.

The molten solder has surface tension, and when a small molten solder mass and a large molten solder mass come into contact with each other, the molten solder moves from the small molten solder mass to the large molten solder mass. Therefore, after the 4th pin 784d of the 1-row connector 782 (FIG. 89A) comes out of contact with the jet 821, the molten solder adhering around the 4th pin 784d is cooled and solidified. In the meantime, the molten solder moves from the small short circuit prevention hole 891 and the medium short circuit prevention hole 893 toward the large short circuit prevention hole 892.

In a configuration in which a small area hole is formed around a pin located at the rear end in the transport direction and a large area hole is formed downstream of the small area hole, a small area is formed due to a dynamic factor. After the molten solder moves from the hole to the large area hole, the excess molten solder generated in the large area hole flows back toward the small area hole and solders around the pin located at the rear end in the transport direction. A bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) may be formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101, when the molten solder moves from the small short circuit prevention hole 891 to the large short circuit prevention hole 892 and then excess molten solder is generated in the large short circuit prevention hole 892, the second passage region. Since the passage width of 895 is wider than the passage width of the first passage region 894 and the area of the two medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 is larger than the area of the small short-circuit prevention hole 891, the backflow destination of the excess molten solder is mainly medium-sized. It becomes a short circuit prevention hole 893. As a result, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 toward the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 can be reduced. Then, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder flows back from the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 and the solder bridge 751 is formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782.

Next, short-circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, a small short-circuit prevention hole 921 having the same size and shape as the joint hole 762 is formed around the first via hole 793a. The small short-circuit prevention hole 921 is formed in such a manner that the first via hole 793a is located at the center of the small short-circuit prevention hole 921. A large short-circuit prevention hole 922 having a larger area than the small short-circuit prevention hole 921 is formed on the right side of the small short-circuit prevention hole 921. It is connected by a first passage area 924 having a passage width smaller than the diameter of the hole 921.

Further, medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 923 having a larger area than the small short-circuit prevention hole 921 and a smaller area than the large short-circuit prevention hole 922 are formed diagonally above and below the large short-circuit prevention hole 922. The large short-circuit prevention hole 922 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 923 are connected by a second passage area 925 having a passage width wider than that of the first passage area 924.

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is transported in the left direction, the first pin 784a (FIG. 89 (a)) located at the right end of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction. Will be done.

Since the short circuit prevention holes 921 to 925 are formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a, the small short circuit prevention hole 921 is formed when the printed wiring board 897 is conveyed to the left in the soldering process. It is possible to reduce the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short-circuit prevention hole 922 toward the large short circuit prevention hole 922. Then, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder flows back from the large short-circuit prevention hole 922 and the solder bridge 751 is formed around the first pin 784a of the one-row connector 782.

Here, in the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 19th embodiment described above is used as a reference for providing short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895, 921 to 925 around the pin 784 (FIG. 91). In the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10, the same standard as the standard for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 92 (b)) around the pin 784 is applied. Specifically, in the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the one-row connector is mounted on the substrate, the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is satisfied. Short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) are provided around the pins at both ends of the one-row connector. Therefore, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention holes 892 and 922 toward the small short circuit prevention holes 891 and 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will be formed around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joining hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the one-row connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the two-pole connector is mounted on the board, the two-pole connector satisfies the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less. Short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) are provided around the two pins 784. Therefore, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention holes 892 and 922 toward the small short circuit prevention holes 891 and 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will be formed around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, a joining hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided around the pin 784 of the 2-pole connector in which the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is wider than 2.5 mm.

In the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the condition that the two-row connector is mounted on the substrate and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is 1.5 mm or less, or If at least one of the conditions that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is 2.5 mm or less is satisfied, around the pins 784 located at both ends of each row of the two-row connector. Is provided with short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101). Therefore, the amount of molten solder flowing back from the large short circuit prevention holes 892 and 922 toward the small short circuit prevention holes 891 and 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) will be formed around the pin 784, which will be located at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, if the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is wider than 2.5 mm, the area around the pins 784 A joining hole 762 (FIG. 90) is provided.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 formed around the fourth via hole 793d are connected by the first passage region 894 with a narrow passage width, and the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 and the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 are connected. Is connected by a second passage area 895 having a wide passage width. Therefore, the molten solder remaining in the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 easily moves to the large short-circuit prevention hole 892. Further, since the excess molten solder that may occur in the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 moves preferentially to the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893, the occurrence of backflow of the molten solder from the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 to the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 is suppressed. Has been done. Therefore, in the soldering process, when the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the solder bridge 751 may be formed around the fourth pin 784d. Can be reduced.

Further, short-circuit prevention holes 921 to 925 are also set on the right side of the first via hole 793a. Therefore, in the soldering process, when the first pin 784a of the one-row connector 782 is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the backflow of the molten solder from the large short-circuit prevention hole 922 to the small short-circuit prevention hole 921 flows. It is possible to suppress the occurrence and reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the first pin 784a.

<Another form of the 21st embodiment>
The short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 of the 21st embodiment described above are from the small short circuit prevention hole 891, the large short circuit prevention hole 892, the medium short circuit prevention hole 893, and the second passage area 895 excluding the first passage area 894. It may be configured. Specifically, the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 is set not as a hole continuous with the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 but as a hole not continuous with the small short-circuit prevention hole 891. In this case, until the molten solder solidifies in the soldering step, the molten solder that adheres to the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 and becomes excess is the second passage than the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 that is not in physical contact. It is easy to move toward the medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 that is in physical contact through the region 895. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the excess molten solder adhering to the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 at the initial stage from flowing back into the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and causing the solder bridge 751 to be formed around the fourth pin 784d.

The number of medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 constituting the short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 of the 21st embodiment described above is not limited to two. For example, the number of medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 constituting the short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895 may be one. Printed wiring board while leaving one medium-sized short-circuit prevention hole 893 that prevents excess molten solder from moving to the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 on the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 before the molten solder solidifies in the soldering process. By suppressing the area occupied by the short-circuit prevention holes 891 to 895 on the 741, it is possible to cope with the increase in the density of the main control board 61.

<22nd embodiment>
The game board 931 of the present embodiment is provided with a first special figure display unit 932a corresponding to the first operating port 938, and a second special drawing display unit 932b corresponding to the second operating port 939. It is provided. In the following description, the differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 931 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 931 according to the present embodiment. On the surface of the game board 931, the guide rail is composed of the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 as in the first embodiment, and the game ball is launched by the player rotating the operation handle. The game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) launched from the mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The guide rail is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area PA on one side of the game area PA. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the operation handle by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball B1 in the upper part of the game area PA is such that the exit portion is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail is formed. It shifts to the side of the side opposite to the formed side. The outlet portion of the guide rail is provided on the left side portion of the game area PA.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game area PA is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a variable display unit 36, and the like. Here, the game board 931 of the present embodiment is described above in that the second operating port 939 is provided at a position different from that of the first operating port 938, and that a pair of through gates 935 and 936 are provided. It is different from the first embodiment. These positional relationships will be described below with reference to the position of the variable display unit 36.

The variable display unit 36 is arranged on the center side of the game area PA so that the flow area of the game ball B1 is secured in the vertical and horizontal directions thereof. That is, in the game area PA, as the flow area of the game ball B1, the flow area 941 on the upper side of the variable display unit 36, the flow area 942 on the lower side of the variable display unit 36, the flow area 943 on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and A flow area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 is provided. The center frame 252 constituting a part of the variable display unit 36 is provided at the lower part of the center frame 252 because the roof unit 253 constituting the portion extending from the upper portion to the left and right sides extends to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Except for the game ball B1 introduced to the stage, the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA does not cross or traverse the variable display unit 36.

The first actuating port 938, which is one of the pair of actuating 938s and 939s, is provided in the lower flow area 942 as the first actuating port device. The first actuating port 938 corresponds to the first actuating port 33 (FIG. 3) in the first embodiment. Here, in each of the flow-down regions 941 to 944, a dispersion member for dispersing the flow-down direction of the game ball B1 by collision with the game ball B1 is provided, and the flow-down direction of the game ball B1 is the game. A guiding member for guiding in a predetermined direction by collision with the ball B1 is provided. The dispersion member includes a nail 24b, and the guidance member includes the roof unit 253 and a decorative member 945 arranged along the lower outer edge of the game area PA. Then, the dispersion member and the guidance member may flow down toward the first operating port 938 regardless of where the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 reaches the upper portion of the game area PA. It is provided as possible.

That is, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and started to flow down on the exit portion side of the guide rail, that is, on the left side of the game area PA at the upper part of the game area PA, has the upper flow area 941 → the left side flow area 943. → The game area PA will flow down on the left side route (first route) called the lower flow area 942. In this case, the dispersion member and the guidance member are provided so that the game ball B1 that flows down the game area PA on the left side path can reach the first operating port 938 depending on the flow mode. Has been done. Further, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and started to flow down on the opposite side of the exit portion of the guide rail, that is, on the right side of the game area PA at the upper part of the game area PA, flows down from the upper flow area 941 to the right side. The game area PA will flow down on the right side route (second route) of the area 944 → the lower flow area 942. In this case, the dispersion member and the guidance member are provided so that the game ball B1 that flows down the game area PA on the right side path can reach the first operating port 938 depending on the flow mode. Has been done.

The second actuating port 939, which is the other of the pair of actuating 938s and 939s, is provided in the flow-down region 944 on the right side as the second actuating port device. The second actuating port 939 corresponds to the second actuating port 34 (FIG. 3) in the first embodiment. That is, the second actuating port 939 is provided with an electric accessory 939a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 939a operates between the closed state and the open state in the same manner as the general electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment. Since the trigger and the operation content of such an operation are the same as those of the general electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. In this case, a nail 24b is provided above the second operating port 939, and when the electric accessory 939a is in the closed state, the nail 24b wins a prize in the second operating port 939 (entry of the game ball B1). Ball) is not possible. It should be noted that the structure may be such that it is not impossible to win a prize, but it is difficult to win a prize.

Here, as described above, since the second operating port 939 is provided in the flow-down area 944 on the right side, it is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and is on the upper side of the game area PA on the opposite side to the exit portion of the guide rail, that is, the game. The game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) that has begun to flow down on the right side of the area PA can flow down toward the second operating port 939, but is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and of the game area PA. The game ball B1 that has begun to flow down on the exit portion side of the guide rail, that is, on the left side of the game area PA at the upper part cannot flow down toward the second operating port 939.

As described above, the winning of the first operating port 938 can occur regardless of whether the game ball B1 flows on the first path side or the game ball B1 flows on the second path side. On the other hand, the winning of the second operating port 939 can occur only when the game ball B1 flows to the second path side. As a result, the player can play the game aiming at winning the first operating port 938 while preventing the winning of the second operating port 939 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle. At the same time, it is possible to play a game aiming at winning a prize in the second operating port 939.

In the pair of through gates 935 and 936, one first through gate 935 is provided in the left flow area 943, and the other second through gate 936 is provided in the right flow area 944. In this case, the second through gate 936 provided in the flow-down region 944 on the right side is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 939, but is not limited to this, and is more than the second operating port 939. May be provided on the downstream side.

An internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gates 935 and 936, and the normal drawing display unit 38a of the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball B1 does not pass in the game area PA, is displayed. The variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the electric service opening state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 939a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls B1 that have won prizes in the through gates 935 and 936 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has already been described in the first embodiment so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 939a of the second operating port 939 is opened in a unit time is relatively high or low. High frequency support mode and low frequency support mode are set. In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 938 is higher than that of the second operating port 939, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning to the second operating port 939 is higher than that of the first operating port 938. The probability of winning a prize increases.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 938 or the second operating port 939. Then, the lottery result of the winning lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 932 and the variable display unit 36.

The special figure unit 932 is provided with a first special figure display unit 932a and a second special figure display unit 932b. The display area of the first special symbol display unit 932a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special symbol display unit 932b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Further, the area of the display area including the first special figure display unit 932a and the second special figure display unit 932b is also smaller than the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display unit 932a, a winning lottery is performed by using a winning prize in the first operating port 938 as a trigger, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 932b, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the second operating port 939 as a trigger, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

In the special figure unit 932, the first special figure hold display unit 932c and the second special figure hold display unit 932d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 932a and the second special figure display unit 932b. .. The number of game balls B1 winning in the first operating port 938 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 932c. Further, the number of the game balls B1 winning in the second operating port 939 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 932d.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display or a predetermined display of a pattern is performed on the first special symbol display unit 932a based on a prize in the first operating port 938, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. At the same time, when the second special figure display unit 932b performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern based on the winning of the second operating port 939, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. ..

If a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 938, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Similarly, even if a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 939, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won.

On the back surface of the game board 931, there is a discharge passage section (not shown) that guides the entered game ball B1 to the discharge ball recovery section (not shown) corresponding to each of the first actuating port 938 and the second actuating port 939. ) Is formed. As shown in FIG. 102, in the discharge passage portion through which the game ball B1 entering the first actuation port 938 passes, the first actuation port detection sensor 951 for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage portion. The second operating port detection sensor 952 for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the discharging passage portion is provided in the discharge passage portion through which the game ball B1 entering the second operating port 939 passes. Is provided.

FIG. 103A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection mode between the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first actuating port detection sensor 951 is connected to the main control board 61 via the first harness 951a, and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 is different from the first harness 951a. It is connected to the main control board 61 via a different second harness 952a. The first harness 951a is a fluorescent harness having a yellow fluorescent color, and the second harness 952a is a fluorescent harness having a green fluorescent color. The first harness 951a and the second harness 952a have a fluorescent color that can be visually identified. Here, the fluorescent yellow used in the first harness 951a and the fluorescent green used in the second harness 952a are not used in the harnesses used elsewhere in the pachinko machine 10. The color. Therefore, the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a can be visually distinguished from other harnesses.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first harness 951a is a bundle of two signal lines 958, one end of which is connected to the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the other end of which is male. It is equipped with a 2-pole connector 953. Further, the second harness 952a is a bundle of two signal lines 958, one end of which is connected to the second actuating port detection sensor 952, and the other end is provided with a male 2-pole connector 954. .. The signal line 958 is covered with an insulator.

The main control board 61 includes a first actuating port connector 955, which is a female two-pole connector for connecting the first actuating port detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61, and a second actuating port detection sensor 952. It includes a second working port connector 956, which is a female 2-pole connector for connecting to the main control board 61. The first actuating port detection sensor 951 is connected to the main control board 61 by connecting the two-pole connector 953 of the first harness 951a to the first actuating port connector 955 of the main control board 61, and the second harness. The second actuating port detection sensor 952 is connected to the main control board 61 by connecting the two-pole connector 954 of the 952a to the second actuating port connector 956 of the main control board 61.

The connector 955 for the first actuating port has a yellow fluorescent color like the first harness 951a, and the connector 956 for the second actuating port has a green fluorescent color like the second harness 952a. .. Therefore, when the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 are connected to the main control board 61, the yellow first harness 951a is connected to the yellow first actuating port connector 955, and the green color is used. The second harness 952a will be connected to the green second working port connector 956. As a result, the occurrence of a mistake in which the connection destinations of the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a are exchanged is suppressed. Here, the fluorescent yellow color used for the first actuating port connector 955 and the fluorescent green color used for the second actuating port connector 956 are connectors used elsewhere in the pachinko machine 10. Is a color that has not been used in. Therefore, the first actuating port connector 955 and the second actuating port connector 956 can be visually distinguished from other connectors, and the occurrence of connection errors is suppressed.

The two signal lines 958 extending from the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the two signal lines 958 extending from the second actuating port detection sensor 952 are bundled together and have four pins 784 (FIG. 91) at one end thereof. A configuration in which a single-row connector is provided is also conceivable. However, when this configuration is adopted, it is output from the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 only by connecting an unauthorized board that transmits an illegal signal to the main control board 61 at one place. It becomes possible to illegally operate the signal input to the main control board 61. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of connectors that need to be connected in order to use the fraudulent board is increased to two, so that fraudulent execution is difficult.

Further, when the signal lines 958 extending from the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 are configured as one bundle, there is a possibility that the illegal board cannot be found because of the bundle of signal lines 958. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the signal lines 958 are subdivided into bundles in units of the actuation port detection sensors 951 and 952, so that an unauthorized substrate can be easily found between the bundles of the signal lines 958.

The main control board 61 is an electronic circuit mounting board configured by mounting a large number of electronic components on a printed wiring board 957. An embodiment in which the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 are mounted on the printed wiring board 957 of the main control board 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b).

FIG. 103 (b) shows an enlarged view of the first actuating port region 961 to which the first actuating port connector 955 is mounted and the second actuating port region 962 to which the second actuating port connector 956 is mounted. It is a back view of the printed wiring board 957. Here, in FIG. 103 (b), in order to explain how the first actuating port connector 955 and the second actuating port connector 956 are mounted on the printed wiring board 957, the first actuating port connector 955 and the second actuating port connector 955 and the second. A state in which the solder fixing the connector 956 for the operation port to the printed wiring board 957 is removed is shown. Further, FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the main control board 61 in FIG. 103 (a) is turned upside down. Therefore, left-right inversion does not occur between the main control board 61 in FIG. 103 (a) and the main control board 61 in FIG. 103 (b). The left side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103 (a) is the left side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103 (b), and the right side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103 (a) is the main control in FIG. 103 (b). It is on the right side of the substrate 61.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the second actuating port region 962 is provided on the right side of the first actuating port region 961. The 2-pole connector 953 (FIG. 103 (a)) of the first harness 951a (FIG. 103 (a)) is provided with a first pin 784q on the right side and a second pin 784r on the left side in the region 961 for the first operating port. It is equipped with. Further, the 2-pole connector 954 (FIG. 103 (a)) of the second harness 952a (FIG. 103 (a)) is provided with the first pin 784s on the right side and the second pin 784s on the left side in the second working port region 962. It is equipped with a pin 784t.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the printed wiring board 957, the first via hole 793q in which the first pin 784q of the first harness 951a (FIG. 103 (a)) is inserted into the first actuating port region 961. It also has a second via hole 793r through which the second pin 784r is inserted. Further, the printed wiring board 957 includes a first via hole 793s through which the first pin 784s of the second harness 952a (FIG. 103 (a)) is inserted in the second working port region 962, and also has a second. It has a second via hole 793t through which the pin 784t is inserted. Here, the via holes 793q to 793t of the present embodiment are the same through holes as the via holes 793 (FIG. 90 (a)) already described in the 19th embodiment, and penetrate the printed wiring board 957 in the vertical direction. ing.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the second working port region 962, the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t are arranged in the left-right direction, and the second via hole 793t is provided on the left side of the first via hole 793s. Has been done. The distance from the center of the first via hole 793s to the center of the second via hole 793t is 2.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), around the first via hole 793s, in order to connect the first via hole 793s to an electronic component on the printed wiring board 957, FIG. 92 (b) of the 19th embodiment is described above. The wiring pattern 776 described above is formed, and the second via hole 793t is grounded around the second via hole 793t, which is already described in FIG. 92 (b) of the 19th embodiment. The GND solid 851 is formed. The solder resist 792 already described in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) of the 19th embodiment is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851. Therefore, the molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 in the soldering process.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the second working port region 962, the short circuit already described in FIG. 92 (b) of the 19th embodiment is around the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t. A prevention hole 761 is provided. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t is connected to the GND solid 851 by the connection portion 763 already described in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) of the 19th embodiment.

In addition to the connector for the first actuating port 955 and the connector for the second actuating port 956, the printed wiring board 957 is equipped with an electronic component having the terminal 775 already described in FIG. 88 (a) of the 19th embodiment. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the printed wiring board 957, a via hole 793 through which the terminal 775 of the electronic component is inserted is provided below the first actuating port region 961 and the second actuating port region 962. Has been done. The via hole 793 is a through hole already described in FIG. 90 (a) of the 19th embodiment, and is the same through hole as the via holes 793q to 793t.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the distance from the via hole 793 around the terminal 775 to the pins 784q and 784r of the first actuating connector 955 and the pins 784s and 784t of the second actuating connector 956 is the 19th. It is longer than the reference value for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 described in the embodiment. In the printed wiring board 957, around the via hole 793 through which the terminal 775 of the electronic component is inserted, the joint hole 762 already described in FIG. 92 (b) of the 19th embodiment is provided.

In the printed wiring board 957, even if the terminal 775 exists at the shortest distance from the first via hole 793q or the second via hole 793r of the first working port region 961, the terminal 775 to the first via hole 793q or the second via hole 793r. The distance is set to be longer than the reference value for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761. Further, even if the terminal 775 exists at the shortest distance from the first via hole 793s or the second via hole 793t in the second working port region 962, the distance from the terminal 775 to the first via hole 793s or the second via hole 793t is determined. It is set to be longer than the reference value for providing the short circuit prevention hole 761. Therefore, a solder bridge 751 is provided between the pins 784q, 784r of the first actuating connector 955 and the pins 784s, 784t of the second actuating connector 956 and the terminals 775 of other electronic components existing nearby. The formation is suppressed.

As described above, in the game board 931 the second operating port 939 is provided in the flow area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36. By adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle, the player can aim for a prize in the second operating port 939. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won is the second operating port 939, as compared with the case where the winning is generated in the first operating port 938 and the winning lottery is performed. It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player when the winning lottery is performed when the winning prize is generated. The details of the winning lottery will be described later. Then, in the winning lottery for each game, which will be described later, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939 has priority over the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938. Is set to. Therefore, the player aims at the second operating port 939 with higher expectations than when aiming at the first operating port 938.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the game area PA, the second actuating port detection sensor 952 provided in the flow area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 allows the player to aim at the flow area 944 on the right side of the operation handle. The game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) is detected only when the amount of rotation is adjusted. Therefore, while the player adjusts the rotation amount of the operation handle aiming at the flow-down region 943 on the left side of the variable display unit 36, the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) in the second operating port region 962. Even if is formed, it may not be known that it is short-circuited. In this case, the defect of the main control board 61 is found only when the player raises expectations and aims at the flow area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 and wins the second operating port 939. The game will be interrupted with the player having strong expectations, which will cause great disappointment to the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the second actuating port region 962 of the printed wiring board 957, around the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t, the above 19th The short-circuit prevention hole 761 already described in FIG. 92 (b) of the embodiment is provided. The area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set wider than the area of the joint hole 762 around the terminal 775 described above, and the area of the first pin 784s inserted into the first via hole 793s in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957 is set. The possibility that a solder bridge 751 is formed between the second pin 784t and the second pin 784t inserted in the second via hole 793t and short-circuits is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has an elliptical shape in which the width in the left-right direction is wider than the width in the up-down direction. By extending the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the left-right direction, the width in the vertical direction is widened, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the terminal 775 (FIG. 88 (a)) of the electronic component other than the second working port connector 956. The area is expanded in order to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784s and the second pin 784t of the second working port connector 956, while suppressing this.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793s is a second via hole in which the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is adjacent to the first via hole 793s with respect to the first via hole 793s. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t is provided so as to exist on the opposite side of the 793t, and the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is the second via hole 793t with reference to the second via hole 793t. It is provided so as to exist on the opposite side of the first via hole 793s adjacent to the first via hole. Since the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided so as to maintain a wide distance from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793s to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 The center of gravity of the molten solder collected on the top can be located in the direction opposite to the adjacent via holes 793s and 793t.

As a result, when the first via hole 793s is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the first via hole 793s is difficult to move in the direction of the adjacent second via hole 793t. When the second via hole 793t is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the second via hole 793t does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793s, and the solder bridge. The occurrence of 751 is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the region for the first operating port 961, the first via hole 793q and the second via hole 793r are arranged in the left-right direction, and the second via hole 793r is on the left side of the first via hole 793q. It is provided in. The distance from the center of the first via hole 793q to the center of the second via hole 793r is 2.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), a wiring pattern 776 is formed around the first via hole 793q as well as around the first via hole 793s of the second working port region 962 described above, and the first via hole 793s is formed. Around the 2 via hole 793r, a GND solid 851 is formed in the same manner as the 2nd via hole 793r in the second working port region 962 described above. A solder resist 792 is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851, as in the case of the second working port region 962 described above. Therefore, the molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND solid 851 in the soldering process.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the first actuating port region 961, around the first via hole 793q and the second via hole 793r, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is similar to the above-mentioned second actuating port region 962. Is provided. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r is connected to the GND solid 851 by the connecting portion 763 in the same manner as around the second via hole 793t of the second working port region 962 described above.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set wider than the area of the joint hole 762 around the terminal 775 described above, and the first via hole 793q is set in the soldering step of the printed wiring board 957. A solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784q inserted into the second pin 784q and the second pin 784r inserted through the second via hole 793r to reduce the possibility of a short circuit.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has an elliptical shape in which the width in the left-right direction is wider than the width in the up-down direction. By extending the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the left-right direction, the width in the vertical direction is widened, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the terminal 775 (FIG. 88 (a)) of the electronic component other than the connector 955 for the first operating port. The area is expanded in order to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784q and the second pin 784r of the first working port connector 955 while suppressing the above.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793q is a second via hole in which the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is adjacent to the first via hole 793q with respect to the first via hole 793q. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r is provided so as to exist on the opposite side of the 793r, and the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is the second via hole 793r with the second via hole 793r as a reference. It is provided so as to exist on the opposite side of the first via hole 793q adjacent to the first via hole. Since the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided so as to maintain a wide distance from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793q to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 The center of gravity of the molten solder collected on the top can be located in the direction opposite to the adjacent via holes 793q and 793r.

As a result, when the first via hole 793q is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the first via hole 793q does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent second via hole 793r. When the second via hole 793r is located at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the second via hole 793r does not easily move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793q, and the solder bridge. The occurrence of 751 is suppressed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for executing the winning lottery in the main CPU 63 (FIG. 5) will be described. For the winning lottery, the pending information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938 (FIG. 102) or the second operating port 939 (FIG. 102) is used.

The main CPU 63 has a hit random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, and a variable type counter CS in the lottery counter area 65b already described in FIG. 6 of the first embodiment. , It is equipped with a general electric utility opening counter C4. Further, the main CPU 63 is provided with a general electric hold area 65c, and in the hold storage area 65a, in addition to the execution area AE, as a hold area RE corresponding to the first operation port 938, the first special figure hold area (Not shown) is provided, and a second special drawing holding area (not shown) is provided as a holding area RE corresponding to the second operating port 939. In the present embodiment, the execution area AE (FIG. 6) in the hold storage area 65a (FIG. 6) will be referred to as the execution area AE for special figures below.

The first special drawing holding area includes a first area for the first special drawing, a second area for the first special drawing, a third area for the first special drawing, and a fourth area for the first special drawing, which are not shown. When a prize is generated in the first operating port 938, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved on the special figure side according to the winning history in the first operating port 938. As information, it is stored in any area.

In this case, in the first area for the first special drawing to the fourth area for the first special drawing, when the winning of the first operating port 938 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area for the first special drawing → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the second area for the first special drawing → the third area for the first special drawing → the fourth area for the first special drawing. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) to the first operating port 938 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored on hold in the first special figure holding area is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular.

The second special drawing reservation area includes a first area for the second special drawing, a second area for the second special drawing, a third area for the second special drawing, and a fourth area for the second special drawing, which are not shown. When a prize is generated in the 2 operating port 939, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved on the special figure side according to the winning history in the 2nd operating port 939. As information, it is stored in any area.

In this case, in the first area for the second special drawing to the fourth area for the second special drawing, when the winning of the second operating port 939 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area for the second special drawing → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the second area for the second special drawing → the third area for the second special drawing → the fourth area for the second special drawing. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 to the second operating port 939 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular.

In the execution area AE for the special figure, when the variable display is started on any of the special figure display units 932a and 932b, the hold information for the target for performing the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment for the special figure is stored. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 932a is started, the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area of the first special figure holding area is the execution area for the special figure. Moved to AE. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 932b is started, the hold information stored in the first area for the second special figure of the second special figure hold area is moved to the execution area AE for the special figure. Will be done.

Next, the hit / fail determination performed by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special figure holding area or the second special figure holding area will be described.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) as a winning / failing table. In the hit / fail table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit / miss result. The jackpot result is a winning / failing result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also be a trigger for shifting to at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger a transition to both the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode, while the special electric winning device 32 becomes a transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing control is controlled. The deviation result is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

In the present embodiment, the pass / fail table stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) is for the first special figure used in determining the pass / fail of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938. A pass / fail table and a pass / fail table for the second special figure used for determining the pass / fail of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939 are set. Further, the hit / fail table for the first special figure has a low probability / hit / fail table and a high probability / hit / fail table. Similarly, the hit / miss table for the second special figure also has a low probability / hit / fail table and a high probability. There is a pass / fail table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938 and the holding information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939 have different winning / failing tables. In addition to being referred to, in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes in the winning / failing lottery.

Specifically, each hit / fail table will be described. In the low probability / hit / fail table for the first special figure, the random numbers that result in big hits are two (for example, "5" and "305"), which results in small hits. The value of the random number is three (for example, "55", "355", "555"). Other than that, it is a random number value that results in a deviation.

In the high probability / failure table for the first special figure, the number of random numbers that result in big hits is set to be larger than in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure, and specifically, it is 20. (For example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting in the small hit is the same as in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure.

In the low probability / failure table for the second special figure, the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that result in small hits is set to be larger than in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure, and is specifically 40 (for example, "3", "8"). , "31", "37", "55", "68", "127", "133", "160", "166", "189", "195", "217", "223", " 242, "248", "273", "279", "302", "308", "331", "337", "355", "368", "389", "395", "417" , "423", "467", "473", "492", "498", "517", "523", "555", "561", "572", "578", "596" "598" "). The number of random numbers resulting in small hits may be the same as in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure, and may be set to be smaller than that in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. It may be configured as such.

In the high probability accuracy table for the second special figure, the value of the random number resulting in the big hit is the same as in the case of the high probability accuracy table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random numbers that result in the jackpot is larger than that in the case of the low probability / rejection table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting in the small hit is the same as in the case of the low probability / failure table for the second special figure.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 in which the big hit is won in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the distribution determination performed by using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first special figure holding area or the second special drawing holding area will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the frequency of winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32 (FIG. 102) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode already described in the first embodiment are set.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are lower in the high-frequency winning mode. The frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to be higher than that of the frequency winning mode.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5). In the distribution table, in addition to the low-accuracy jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result already described in the first embodiment, the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. ing.

The unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the open / close execution mode becomes the high-probability mode regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the transition to the open / close execution mode. be. This high-probability mode will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, while it becomes the low frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. This support mode will result in a big hit next time, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As for the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the open / close execution mode becomes the high-probability mode regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode, and the open / close execution is executed. It is a big hit result that becomes a high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until the transition to the open / close execution mode.

The main ROM 64 of the present embodiment has, as a distribution table, a distribution table for the first special drawing used for determining the distribution of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938, and the first (2) A distribution table for the second special figure used for determining the distribution of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the operating port 939 is set.

To explain each distribution table in detail, the distribution table for the first special figure has low accuracy jackpot results, unspecified high accuracy jackpot results, and explicit high accuracy as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. The jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result are all set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, among the jackpot type counters C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" is the unspecified high. Corresponding to the probability jackpot result, "15 to 19" corresponds to the explicit high accuracy jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result. In the case of the distribution table for the first special figure, the probability of a low probability jackpot result is 1/3 when the jackpot is won, and the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result and the most advantageous. The probability of a high-accuracy jackpot result such as a jackpot result is 2/3. In addition, the probability of becoming a high-frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode is 2/3, and the probability of becoming a low-frequency winning mode is 1/3.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure, only the low-accuracy jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed, and the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result and the explicit high-accuracy result are set. The jackpot result is not set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, among the jackpot type counters C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 29" is the most advantageous jackpot. Corresponds to the result. In the case of the distribution table for the second special figure, when the jackpot is won, the probability of the low probability jackpot result is 1/3, and the probability of the most advantageous jackpot result is 2/3. In addition, the open / close execution mode is always a high-frequency winning mode.

That is, in the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the probability of becoming the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the same when the big hit is won. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, whereas the distribution table for the second special drawing cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won, a prize is generated in the second operating port 939 rather than a prize in the first operating port 938 and a winning lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player when the winning lottery is performed.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, in the special figure special electric control process of the present embodiment executed for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode, the special figure special electric control process of the first embodiment (first embodiment). The points different from the timer interrupt processing of the form (processing of step S213 in FIG. 8) will be described.

First, the acquisition process of the reserved information on the special figure side in the special figure special electric control process of the present embodiment will be described. In the acquisition process, when the game ball B1 (FIG. 53 (a)) has won a prize in the first operating port 938, the number of reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area is read out. When the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), the hit random number counter C1 (FIG. 6), the jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 6), and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 6) Each value is stored in the uppermost area of the first special figure holding area where the holding information is not stored. Further, in the acquisition process, when the game ball B1 has won a prize in the second operating port 939, the number of reserved information stored in the second special figure holding area is read out, and the number of the reserved information is read. When is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), the hold information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special figure hold area. Store in the top area that is not.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information for the first special figure hold area or the hold information for the second special figure hold area is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (FIG. 5). The voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 82 (FIG. 5). By receiving the hold command, the display control device 82 changes the display of the number of hold information in the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 102) in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which of the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area has increased, the number has increased in the symbol display device 41. The display of the number of pending items corresponding to the side is changed.

Further, when the number of reserved information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the first special figure hold display unit 932c (FIG. 102) and the second special figure are held. The display control is performed so that the display content of the hold display unit 932d (FIG. 102) corresponding to the increase in the number of holds is changed to the display content corresponding to the increase in the number of holds.

In the special figure special electric control process of the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned process for acquiring the reserved information on the special figure side, a process for controlling the effect for the game round and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode ,It is included. As the process for controlling the effect for the game round, the special figure fluctuation start process, which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, the process for advancing the effect for the game round, and the process for the game round. Processing for ending the production is set.

Further, as the process for controlling the open / close execution mode, the process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32 (FIG. 102), and the special electric winning device. A process for controlling the closed state of 32 and a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state at the end of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode are set.

The main RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is provided with a special figure special electric counter as a counter for the main CPU 63 (FIG. 5) to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. Further, the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) includes a special figure special electric address table in which a start address of a program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set.

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the process. In the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, the processing corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter is executed.

Next, the special figure fluctuation start process executed by the special figure special electric control process of the present embodiment will be described. The special figure fluctuation start process includes a hit / fail determination process, a distribution determination process, and a reach determination process. The hit / fail determination process is executed on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode.

First, it is determined whether or not the common hold number, which is the total number of hold information in the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area, is 1 or more. If the number of common hold is less than 1, it means that the hold information is not stored in the 1st special figure hold area and the 2nd special figure hold area, so that the hit / fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process are not executed. .. On the other hand, when the number of common reservations is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed.

In the data setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings in the second special figure holding area is "0". When the number of holdings in the second special figure holding area is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure is executed, and when the number of holdings in the second special drawing holding area is not "0", the first 2 Execute the data setting process for special figures.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved figures in the second special figure holding area is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the second special figure display unit 932b is used for variable display. When the hold information is stored, the data stored in the second special figure hold area is set for variable display regardless of whether the number of holds in the first special figure hold area is 1 or more. I tried to do it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area, the hold is stored in the second special figure hold area corresponding to the second operation port 939. The information will be prioritized as the start target of the game round.

In the data setting process for the first special drawing, first, the data stored in the first special drawing area of the first special drawing holding area is moved to the execution area AE (FIG. 6) for the special drawing. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area for the first special figure to the fourth area for the first special figure to the lower area side.

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b. Then, a shift command is output, which is information for causing the voice emission control device 81 (FIG. 5), which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the first special figure holding area has been shifted. This data setting process ends. The voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 82 (FIG. 5), whereby the number of hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold area in the symbol display device 41 is increased. Change the display according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

Further, when the number of hold information in the first special figure hold area decreases as described above, the display control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) causes the first special figure hold display unit 932c to display. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of reserved items.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, the data stored in the first area for the second special figure in the second special figure holding area is moved to the execution area AE for the special figure (FIG. 6). After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area for the second special figure to the fourth area for the second special figure to the lower area side.

After that, "1" is set in the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 65. Then, the shift time command, which is information for causing the voice emission control device 81 to recognize that the data in the second special figure holding area has been shifted, is output, and the data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 82, the voice emission control device 81 displays the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold area in the symbol display device 41. Change in response to the decrease in.

Further, when the number of hold information in the second special figure hold area decreases as described above, the display control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) causes the second special figure hold display unit 932d to display. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of reserved items.

After executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the hit / fail determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure flag of the main RAM 65, the game times this time are in the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area. It is determined which pending information corresponds to. In addition, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Then, the hit / fail tables corresponding to these determination results are the low probability / hit / fail table for the first special figure, the high probability / hit / fail table for the first special figure, the low probability / hit / fail table for the second special figure, and the second special figure. Select from the high accuracy table for. After selecting the hit / fail table, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the winning random number counter C1, among the reserved information stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) for the special figure, is selected as described above. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the winning / failing table. If it does not match the numerical information set as the big hit result, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the small hit result in the selected hit / miss table.

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result, the distribution determination process is executed. In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure flag of the main RAM 65, the game times this time are the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area. It is determined which of the pending information corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is selected from the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure. After selecting the distribution table, the distribution determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, among the reserved information stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) for the special figure, is obtained. Understand which type of jackpot result is supported in the above-selected distribution table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special figure is selected, any of the low-accuracy jackpot result, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result is selected. Understand whether it corresponds to. In addition, when the distribution table for the second special figure is selected, it is grasped which of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to.

After that, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified this time in the main RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that it is a low probability jackpot result, "1" is set in the low probability flag, and when it is specified that it is an unspecified high probability jackpot result, "1" is set in the unspecified flag. If you specify that it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, set "1" in the explicit flag, and if you specify that it is the most advantageous jackpot result, set "1" in the most advantageous flag. set. In the following description, the determination of whether or not the result is various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not the flag corresponding to the main RAM 65 is set.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b in this game is stored in advance in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5). It is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. The main RAM 65 stores information on the mode of the pattern according to the type of the specified jackpot result.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not a big hit result, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result. If it is a small hit result, "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 65. Then, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed. Specifically, in this game, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

If it is determined that the result is not a small hit result, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b in this game is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any of the stop result setting process for the big hit result, the stop result setting process for the small hit result, and the stop result setting process for the missed result, the display duration grasping process is executed. In such processing, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the current game round is the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, if the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) for the special figure is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, the reach display is displayed. Judge that it occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the main ROM 64. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, it is determined whether or not the game round this time is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, and either of them is used. If there is, the display duration table corresponding to the result is read from the main ROM 64, and the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. In this case, at least in the game round triggered by the hold information stored in the hold area of the first special figure, it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result and the small hit result. In the embodiment, the display duration is selected so that the effect is executed by the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 102), the display light emitting unit 53 (FIG. 1), and the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1). However, since the display duration table referred to in the case of the unspecified high-accuracy big hit result and the case of the small hit result are different, the degree of expectation that the winning / failing lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode. It is possible to make the selection rate of the production with a high degree of difference different between the two cases. It's getting easier. On the other hand, if the reach display does not occur and it is neither an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, nor a small hit result, the off display duration table is read from the main ROM 64, and this time. The display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired.

In addition, the display duration information when the display duration table for disengagement is referred to is in the first special figure holding area if the game is played with the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area as a trigger. The display duration is set to become shorter as the number of stored hold information increases, and the second special figure is the second special if the game is triggered by the hold information stored in the hold area. Figure The display duration is set to become shorter as the number of hold information stored in the hold area increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the short display duration is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not change depending on the number of pending information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration when reach occurs.

After that, the grasped display duration information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main CPU 63. By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the first special symbol display unit 932a or the second special symbol display unit 932b and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, and each of these variable displays is performed. When it is terminated, the final stop is displayed over the final stop time in a state where the stop result of the game round is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line). .. In this case, the acquired display duration is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the display duration can be rephrased as the time before the final stop.

After setting the display duration information in the special figure special electric timer counter, the variable command and type command are output. The variable command contains information on the display duration. Here, as described above, the display duration acquired by referring to the display duration table for deviation is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the display duration table for reach generation, so that the command for variation is used. Even if the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence is not included in, the voice emission control device 81 can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the display duration. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. The output fluctuation command and type command are received by the voice emission control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side.

After that, among the first special figure display unit 932a and the second special figure display unit 932b, the display unit on the execution target side of the current game round starts the variable display of the pattern. Then, by adding "1" to the special figure special electric counter, the process for advancing the effect for the game round is executed in the next special figure special electric control process.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game board 931 has a configuration in which the player can separately aim for the winning of the first operating port 938 and the winning of the second operating port 939 by adjusting the rotation amount of the operation handle. .. Further, in each game, the winning lottery performed using the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939 is the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938. It is set to be more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery performed using. Then, in the winning / failing lottery of each game, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 939 is prioritized over the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 938. be. That is, when aiming for a prize in the second operating port 939 rather than aiming for a winning in the first operating port 938, the player is expected to have a better result. In this configuration, the printed wiring board 957 of the main control board 61 includes a second working port connector 956 to which the two-pole connector 954 of the second harness 952a extending from the second working port detection sensor 952 is mounted. Short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the two pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956 in the wiring board 957. Therefore, in the soldering step, the possibility that the molten solder adhering around the two pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956 merge to form a solder bridge is suppressed. As a result, the possibility that a connection failure occurs in the connection of the second operating port detection sensor 952 with the main control board 61 and the winning of the second operating port 939 is not detected is reduced. By reducing the possibility that the winning will not be detected in the second operating port 939, which the player aims at with the expectation of a good result, the possibility of giving the player a great disappointment can be reduced.

The signal lines 958 extending from the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 are subdivided into bundles in units of the actuation port detection sensors 951 and 952, and are connected to the main control board 61. Therefore, a gap is created between the bundles of the signal lines 958, and it becomes possible to detect an unauthorized substrate from the gap.

The first harness 951a extending from the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second harness 952a extending from the second actuating port detection sensor 952 are connected to separate actuating port connectors 955 and 956 on the main control board 61. be. By setting a large number of connectors to which the illegal board must be connected, assuming that the illegal board is used, it is possible to make the configuration difficult to use the illegal board in the game hall.

The fluorescent color possessed by the first harness 951a and the connector 955 for the first actuation port to which the first harness 951a is connected is for the second actuation port to which the second harness 952a and the second harness 952a are connected. It is different from the fluorescent color possessed by the connector 956. Therefore, in the work of connecting the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and the second actuating port detection sensor 952 to the main control board 61, the connection destinations of the harnesses 951a and 952a can be identified by color, and the harness 951a can be identified. , 952a can suppress the occurrence of mistakes in connecting destinations.

The printed wiring board 957 includes a first working port connector 955 to which a two-pole connector 953 of the first harness 951a extending from the first working port detection sensor 951 is mounted, and the first working port in the printed wiring board 957. Short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the two pins 784q and 784r of the connector 955. As a result, it is possible to prevent the solder bridge 751 from being formed and short-circuited in the connection of the first actuating port detection sensor 951 with the main control board 61.

<Another form of the 22nd embodiment>
In the 22nd embodiment described above, the connector 955 for the first actuation port may be configured to include four pins 784 (FIG. 91). For example, two signal lines 958 extending from the first actuating port detection sensor 951 and two signal lines extending from other electronic components connected to the main control board 61 are connected to the first actuating port connector 955. It may be configured. This has the effect of suppressing connection errors between the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a, the effect of making it difficult to use an unauthorized board in the game hall, and the effect of the second actuating port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61. While maintaining the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridge 751 in the connection, it is possible to facilitate the connection work of the electronic component including the first actuating port detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61. Further, for example, the first actuating port detection sensor 951 may be provided with four signal lines 958, and the four signal lines may be connected to the first actuating port connector 955 having four pins 784. good. By configuring the first actuating port detection sensor 951 to have a configuration in which the number of signal lines 958 is not limited to two, the types of sensors that can be used as the first actuating port detection sensor 951 are increased, and the degree of freedom in design is increased. Can be done.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, of the two signal lines 958 constituting the first harness 951a, only one has a yellow fluorescent color and the other has no fluorescent color. May be good. Further, of the two signal lines 958 constituting the second harness 952a, only one of them may have a green fluorescent color and the other may not have a fluorescent color. By visually observing the first harness 951a, the connection destination of the first harness 951a can be known in relation to the color of the connector 955 for the first actuation port, and by visually observing the second harness 952a, the connector for the second actuation port can be used. Since the connection destination of the second harness 952a can be known in relation to the color of the connector 956, it is possible to suppress a connection error between the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a.

In the second working port region 962 of the 22nd embodiment described above, the configuration for preventing the formation of the solder bridge 751 is not limited to the short circuit prevention hole 761. For example, instead of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 already described in FIG. 99 (a) of the twentieth embodiment may be used. The configuration will be described below.

A joint hole 762 (FIG. 99 (a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed around the first via hole 793s of the second working port region 962 (FIG. 103 (b)). On the right side of the joint hole 762, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874 (FIG. 99 (a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is provided. The separate type short-circuit prevention hole 874 is not continuous with the joint hole 762 around the first via hole 793s, and the narrowed portion 874b (FIG. 99 (a)) is formed so as to face the direction of the first via hole 793s. ing. Therefore, in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, when the first via hole 793s is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the pin 784s inserted through the first via hole 793s (FIG. 103 (b)). ) Is moved in the direction of the second via hole 793t, and the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) is formed is reduced.

A joint hole 762 (FIG. 99 (a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed around the second via hole 793t of the second working port region 962 (FIG. 103 (b)). On the left side of the joint hole 762, a separate type short-circuit prevention hole 871 (FIG. 99 (a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is provided. The separate type short-circuit prevention hole 871 is not continuous with the joint hole 762 around the second via hole 793t, and the narrowed portion 871b (FIG. 99A) is formed so as to face the direction of the second via hole 793t. ing. Therefore, in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, when the second via hole 793t is located at the rear end in the transport direction, the pin 784t inserted through the second via hole 793t (FIG. 103 (b)). ) Is moved in the direction of the first via hole 793s, and the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) is formed is reduced.

In this way, separate short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 are provided around the two via holes 793s and 793t in the second actuating port region 962, and a solder bridge is provided in the connection between the second actuating port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61. By reducing the possibility that the 751 is formed, even if a prize is generated in the second operating port 939, the winning is not detected, and the player who aims at the second operating port 939 with great expectation is disappointed. The possibility can be reduced.

Further, similarly to the two via holes 793s and 793t in the second actuating port region 962, around the two via holes 793q and 793r (FIG. 103 (b)) in the first actuating port region 961 (FIG. 103 (b)). By providing separate short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 (FIG. 99 (a)) in the first actuating port detection sensor 951 (FIG. 103 (b)) and the main control board 61 (FIG. 103 (b)). In, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95 (c)) is formed can be reduced.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are configured to store history information (or ball entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the target for storing the history information. It may be configured as. For example, the configuration may be such that only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating port 34 are the storage targets of the history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is the storage target of the history information. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entry portion for which the history information is stored.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the entry result of the game ball is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118c are set, the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry section is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result is the same type of ball entry section. There may be a configuration in which a plurality of ball entry detection sensors are present together with a plurality of ball entry detection sensors, or a configuration in which one type of information is transmitted may be used. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, so that the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(4) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 63 at the start of supply, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bidirectionally communicated, and the management IC 66 can be used. When a signal requesting transmission of the relational information is received, the correspondence relational information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence-related memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence-related information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the corresponding memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence-related information is mainly used. A configuration may be provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment or the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment, so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters can be performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the voice emission control device 81, the main CPU 63 uses the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to change the contents of the various parameters. It may be configured so that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation is performed. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the business day immediately before the start of business of the game hall was normal.

(8) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. May be. As a configuration for preventing the start of the game, for example, the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a may be disabled, and the first operating port may be disabled. Even if a prize is won in the 33 or the second operating port 34, the winning / failing determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasing switch turned on, and can be operated when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. It may be the operation of the operation means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

(9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management side CPU 112. May not be executed. In this case, the history information is read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation executes operations of various parameters using the read history information. Often, the reading device may be configured to execute operations of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing storage processing of history information and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side may be provided. The configuration may be provided in the CPU 92, or the configuration may be provided in the voice emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the voice emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, the information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using the history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that history information or information of various parameters can be output. As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading a program from the main ROM 64 is configured to be also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by a reading device, but the configuration is limited to this. The terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62, or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(13) The correspondence-related memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as the non-volatile storage means such as the flash memory, and are not limited to these memories, for example. One of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and hold information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the device is stopped. In this case, a backup power device dedicated to the memory may be provided, or the backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply / emission control device 78 that supplies the backup power to the main RAM 65. May be good.

(14) The game ball is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the history information is not stored and retained, and the game ball can be played by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters is high, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timings.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. A hard circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Further, when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the open / close execution mode is stored as history information is also possible. Often, the configuration may be such that the transition timing and the end timing to the open / close execution mode are stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality may be obtained. It may be configured that the occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, the configuration may be such that the transition probability to the open / close execution mode is calculated by using the history information as described above, or the transition probability to the high frequency support mode may be calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment or the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured, while the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operating port 33 are measured. With respect to the payout of the prize ball of the game ball such as the second operating port 34 and the entry into the privilege trigger entry section that triggers the winning / failing determination process, the history information including the RTC information may be stored. This makes it possible to extract the entry history of the game ball into the privilege trigger entry section, and to calculate the frequency of entry of the game ball into each privilege opportunity entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(19) The configuration may include items other than those in each of the above embodiments as targets to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information, and the tank 75 may be stored. At least one of the timing when the ball-free state is started, the timing when the ball-free state is released, and the timing when the ball-free state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment or the like, the configuration is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

(21) The number of game balls entered into a predetermined entry portion generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open is stored as history information, and the number of balls entered by using the history information is stored. May be configured to be output externally to the reader. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entry portion in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Further, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In that case, the abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is illegally opened to allow a game ball to enter a predetermined entry portion.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it is possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the confirmation processes of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are executed by the management side CPU 112 may be opposite to that in the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the change processing of the output state of each signal and the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the buffers 122a to 122o are the same.

(24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the outside by using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and the data may be selectively output to the outside, and a predetermined program may be used. It may be configured so that only can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

(25) The other information of the target to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to the history information and various parameters, for example, when an abnormality occurs. May be configured to store the history information of the abnormality occurrence and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. By summing up the number of game balls detected in the above, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, all discharged from the game area PA. There may be a configuration in which a passage area through which the game balls of the above are passed one by one is provided, and an discharge detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area is provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the same configuration as in each of the above embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of balls entered in each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entered into each entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the voice emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, the result of a lottery process of a winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of a start lever is historical information. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role by using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special gaming state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may be notified of the calculation results of the various parameters.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to twelfth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined, and the second embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined.

(30) In the thirteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the nails 213, 214, 262, 322 and the platform 351 that divide the course of the game ball B1 in two ways have the probability of one distribution result and the other distribution. The course of the game ball B1 may be distributed in such a manner that there is a significant difference from the probability of the result. For example, in the first left-right distribution nail 213 of the thirteenth embodiment, the area of the first distribution surface 217a is larger than the area of the second distribution surface 218a, so that the area is located behind the game area PA. All of the positioned game balls B1 and a part of the game balls B1 located on the front side are distributed to the right side, and only the remaining game balls B1 located on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the left side. By making it easier to hit the first distribution surface 217a than the second distribution surface 218a in this way, the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the first left and right distribution nails 213 will win the operating openings 33 and 34 is increased. , The behavior of the game ball B1 around the first left-right distribution nail 213 can attract the attention of the player.

Further, for example, in the front-rear distribution nail 262 of the 14th embodiment, the area of the first distribution surface 264a is larger than the area of the second distribution surface 265a, so that the back side of the game area PA is formed. All of the game balls B1 located on the front side and a part of the game balls B1 located on the front side are distributed to the back side, and only the remaining game balls B1 located on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the front side. .. By making the configuration easier to hit the first distribution surface 264a than the second distribution surface 265a in this way, the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the front-rear distribution nail 262 wins the operating ports 33 and 34 is increased, and the front-rear direction is increased. The behavior of the game ball B1 around the distribution nail 262 can attract the attention of the player.

Further, for example, in the repulsion nail 322 of the fifteenth embodiment, the length of the high repulsion portion 334d is longer than the length of the low repulsion member 333, so that the game ball B1 located at the back side of the game area PA And a part of the game ball B1 located on the front side collides with the repulsive nail 322 and rebounds greatly, and only the remaining game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the repulsive nail 322. It bounces a little. By making it easier to hit the high repulsion portion 334d than the low repulsion member 333 in this way, the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the repulsion nail 322 wins the operating openings 33 and 34 is increased, and the game ball around the repulsion nail 322 is increased. The behavior of B1 can attract the attention of the player.

Further, for example, in the front-rear distribution table 351 of the 16th embodiment, the area of the first downstream surface 372 is larger than the area of the second downstream surface 373, so that the area is located on the back side of the game area PA. All of the game ball B1 and a part of the game ball B1 located on the front side are distributed to the back side, and only the remaining game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is distributed to the front side. By making it easier to roll on the first downstream surface 372 than on the second downstream surface 373 in this way, the game ball B1 that rolls on the front-rear distribution table 351 wins the operating ports 33 and 34. It is possible to increase the probability of this and attract the player's attention to the behavior of the game ball B1 around the front-rear distribution table 351.

(31) The game board of each of the above embodiments is not limited to plywood, and may be an acrylic board. Further, in each of the above embodiments, a polycarbonate plate may be used as the game board. In short, it may be a plate-shaped member capable of defining the game area PA into which the game ball B1 flows down. Here, the game board includes the game board 24 (FIG. 3) in the first to twelfth embodiments, the game board 233 (FIG. 50) in the thirteenth embodiment, and the game in another embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment. Board 235 (FIG. 59), game board 236 (FIG. 60), game board 237 (FIG. 61 (b)), game board 238 (FIG. 62 (b)), game board 261 (FIG. 63) in the 14th embodiment. , Game board 321 in the fifteenth embodiment (FIG. 68), game board 341 in the sixteenth embodiment (FIG. 72), game board 381 in another embodiment of the sixteenth embodiment (FIG. 75), 17th implementation. In the game board 421 (FIG. 78) in the embodiment, the game board 451 (FIG. 82) in the eighteenth embodiment, the game board 452 (FIG. 87 (a)) in another embodiment of the eighteenth embodiment, in the twenty-second embodiment. A game board 931 (FIG. 102) is included.

(32) The solder in the 19th to 22nd embodiments is a connecting means made of a tin alloy containing a low melting point component such as lead or bismuth and silver. Lead-free solder (a tin alloy containing copper, zinc, etc. but not lead) may be used as the connecting means. In addition to solder, metals such as iron, nickel, copper, zinc, silver, indium, gold, and bismuth, or alloys of these metals may be used as the connecting means. The connecting means may be any as long as it can be attached to the terminal of the electronic component or connector and the connection region of the substrate in a molten state and solidified so that the electronic component or connector can be attached to the substrate. When using the connection means, by providing a hole around the connection area on the board to prevent a short circuit, the connection means around the adjacent terminals may communicate with each other to form a short circuit. Can be reduced. Here, the terminal includes a terminal 775 and pins 784,784a to 784t. Further, the connection area on the substrate includes the via holes 793, 793a to 793t. The connection area includes not only through holes that penetrate the substrate up and down, but also holes that are formed up to an intermediate position of the substrate and do not penetrate the substrate. Further, the holes for preventing short circuits are the short circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 92 (b)) in the 19th embodiment, the inclined short circuit prevention hole 861 (FIG. 98 (a)) in another embodiment of the 19th embodiment, and the first. Separated short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 (FIG. 99 (a)) in the 20th embodiment, and separate type short-circuit prevention holes 875 to 878,886,887 (FIG. 100 (a), 3 in another embodiment of the 20th embodiment. Direction-separated short-circuit prevention holes 881,884 (FIG. 100 (b)), short-circuit prevention holes group 891 to 895, 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) in the 21st embodiment, short-circuit prevention holes 761 in the 22nd embodiment (FIG. 101). FIG. 103 (b)) includes separable short-circuit prevention holes 871,874 (FIG. 99 (a)) in another embodiment of the 22nd embodiment.

Further, the configuration of another embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 22nd embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the specific storage execution means (main side CPU 63) executes the ball entry detection process so that the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). Function) and
A privilege to execute a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the information corresponding to the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to the storage is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the tenth embodiment). Then, the predetermined information (first) is executed in the main RAM 65) so that the number or frequency of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined storage execution means (first) for storing history information in the eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means. 9. In the ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, in the main CPU 63. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2320 and S2323).

According to the feature A1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, the player is given a privilege. Will be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means. The predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or the device outside the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for granting a privilege to the player.

According to the feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means because the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for granting the privilege to the player. It is possible to store and retain predetermined information in the form of information.

Feature A3. It is provided with specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to execute the storage of information corresponding to the case where the game ball enters the specific entry means, and the game ball enters the specific entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the game machine or a device outside the game machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature A4. All the ball-in means for discharging the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball-in means, are to be stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball in-game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is characterized by being a ball entry means.

According to the feature A4, all the ball entry means for discharging the game ball from the game area are subject to management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means is reached. Can be managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to the predetermined ball to the number of game balls discharged from the game area by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature A5, since the predetermined information includes the information corresponding to the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the predetermined information can be used to obtain the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It is possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature A6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for storing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, management. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the side CPU 112).

According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined.

Feature A8. Any of the features A1 to A7 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature A8, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to analyze the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means.

Feature A9. It is equipped with a program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102).
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. A means (mainly) for identifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63).

According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the feature A11, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased because the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained while avoiding it.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature A13. It is provided with specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means stores the information corresponding to the game ball into the specific ball entry means so that the predetermined storage means can execute the game. Specific information that enables the number or frequency of balls to be entered to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, ninth to ninth). In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means.
The first control means is
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first transmission means (first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path. Function to output either) and
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the second transmission means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the second information to the second control means by using the second signal path. Function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or A12, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A11 or A12.

According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, which is provided with a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door-opening signal).

According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, since the identification information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second control means transfers the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature A15. The first control means uses the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, which comprises a means for transmitting identification information to be transmitted (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature A16, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation where a game ball may enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature A17. The feature A15 or A16, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature A18. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. One of the features A15 to A17, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information to be stored in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature A15 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of A18.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The second control means has more information than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the feature A20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the model of the gaming machine can be used. Even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 112) and
A second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable to correspond to the specific ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 112) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A20, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A13 to A20.

According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to enter the game ball into the predetermined entry means and the game ball into the specific entry means. It is possible to specify the ball entry mode. Further, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it recognizable that the predetermined ball entry means is supported is output externally, and the specific information and the specific ball entry means are supported. Information in combination with information that makes it recognizable is output externally. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information calculation means (1st, 2nd, 6th, 8th, 9th, 9th, 3rd) that uses the predetermined information to calculate the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the gaming ball in the gaming area in the predetermined period. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112 is executed, and in the third embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2005, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). ..

According to the feature A22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature A23. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for making information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means. In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the management side. A function of executing the process of step S2203 in the CPU 112) is provided.
The information calculation means is a means (first, second, second) for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation. In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 112, A function of executing the processes of steps S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. The feature A22 is characterized in that the seventh embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and the eleventh embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation and calculate the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth implementation). The feature A22 or A23 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature A24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature A25. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means A22. Or the gaming machine according to A23.

According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game ball enters the ball. When analyzing the aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A26. The information calculation means is when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, which comprises calculating the aspect information.

According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature A27. The information calculation means is characterized in that the aspect information is calculated when an operation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A22 to A27.

According to the feature A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature A29, since the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A30, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A31. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The feature A29 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to A30.

According to the feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the information calculation means calculates the mode information.
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, which comprises a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A32, the aspect information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of mode information when managing the entering mode of the game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
A means for determining whether or not the aspect information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S1603 in the management side CPU 112) and
When the aspect information is the storage target information, a means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A32, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature A33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature A34, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature A35. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
The information calculation means according to any one of the features A22 to A34, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entry mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box.
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. A1 to the feature A1 to be characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) to externally output the corresponding information when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the feature A40, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. As a result, while simply grasping the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means and the frequency of entry by using the corresponding information, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means can be used for the predetermined entry. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entry.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature A41, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A41, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is predetermined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323) in
The information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiment) which calculates mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processes of steps S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112, and the fourth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. The function, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is a means (in the first to seventh embodiments) for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation to be the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth) by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. 9. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature B2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is predetermined, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth implementation). The feature B1 or B2 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature B4. Feature B1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game is played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B5. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B4.

According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature B6. Any of the features B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU62) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the feature B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature B8, since the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature B9, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B10. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The feature B8 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in B9.

According to the feature B10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the information calculation means calculates the mode information.
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, which comprises a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature B11, the aspect information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to feature B11.

According to the feature B12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature B13, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature B14. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
Described in any one of features B1 to B13, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature B14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box.
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17. A first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature B15 or B16, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B15 or B16.

According to the feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature B18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the tenth embodiment). Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323) in the main CPU 63).
Information calculation means (1st, 2nd, 6th, 8th, 9th, 9th) for calculating the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball in the game area by using the predetermined information. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112 is executed, and in the third embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2005, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B19, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature B20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configurations of features B1 to B20, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is predetermined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323) in
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth) for calculating mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, the seventh embodiment. Then, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. .. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

According to the feature C2, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature C3, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage execution means is a means (in the first to seventh embodiments) for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation to be the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth) by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. 9. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management in the seventh embodiment. Described in any one of features C1 to C3, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature C4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is predetermined, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature C5. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth implementation). One of the features C1 to C4, characterized in that the embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and a fourth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature C6. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means. C1 The gaming machine according to any one of C5.

According to the feature C6, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when the aspect information is calculated is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game is played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C7. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of C6.

According to the feature C7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature C8. The information calculation means is any one of the features C1 to C7, characterized in that the mode information is calculated when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU62) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C8, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to the feature C9, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature C10, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature C11, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C12. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The feature C10 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to C11.

According to the feature C12, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
Described in any one of features C1 to C12, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature C13, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature C14. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature C14, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C15. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box.
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature C15, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C16. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature C16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature C17, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the tenth embodiment). Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323) in the main CPU 63).
Information calculation means (first, first) for calculating mode information corresponding to the entry mode of a game ball in the game area in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. 2. In the sixth, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the step in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the processing of S1408, step S1413 and step S1417, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. The function, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63).
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (Function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C19. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature C19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features C1 to C19, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is predetermined. First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323 in the CPU 63).
When a specific event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, so that the specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the first In the ninth to eleventh embodiments, the second storage execution means (first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments) so that the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means. A function to execute the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main side CPU 63). ,
A first external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the predetermined information can be recognized as corresponding to the predetermined event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A second external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output externally so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that the information can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it includes means for externally outputting corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature D2, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event is externally output. As a result, the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, and the number and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be accurately grasped by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to the feature D3, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is the counting information of the number of times the specific event has occurred, so that the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information is suppressed. It is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event and the mode of occurrence of a specific event.

Feature D4. It is equipped with a program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102).
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. A selection means (selection means for specifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature D4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature D5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature D6. Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection means stores the information to be output from the information output unit in the predetermined storage means and the control program. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized by specifying which of them is.

According to the feature D6, it is specified which information should be output from the information output unit based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A chip (MPU62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance is characterized by having the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of D4 to D6.

According to the feature D7, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult for unauthorized access to the signal path to the information output unit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102), and
An information output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. A selection means (step S902 in the main CPU 63) for identifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is output externally by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. The game is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output externally. This makes it possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature E3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that it is specified.

According to the feature E3, it is specified which information should be output from the information output unit based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. One of the features E1 to E3, wherein the chip (MPU62) having the program storage means (main side ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature E4, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult for unauthorized access to the signal path to the information output unit.

For the configurations of features E1 to E4, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided.
The first control means is
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92) for granting the privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs, and
An information transmission means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs, and
Equipped with
When the predetermined event information is received, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, tenth. In the embodiment, the predetermined information (first to eighth) that enables the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine by executing the execution in the main RAM 65). , The predetermined storage executing means (first to ninth) so that the history information in the twelfth embodiment and the numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments are stored in the predetermined storage means. In the eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function for executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and the like in the main CPU 63. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2323).

According to the feature F1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a predetermined event occurs. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored will be stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means does not increase extremely. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature F3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined storage executing means executes a storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that the number or frequency of occurrence of the specific event can be determined by the gaming machine or outside the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the apparatus (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be done
The first control means is
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63, which transmits the first information to the second control means by using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs. )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature F1 or F2.

According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event but also the mode of occurrence of a specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of occurrence between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Features F4. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is characterized by having a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door-opening signal).

According to the feature F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, since the identification information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second control means transfers the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, which comprises a transmission means (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature F5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature F6, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that a predetermined event and a specific event may occur. In the situation, it is possible to make it possible for the second control means to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature F7. 5. The feature F5 or F6, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration dedicated to transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature F8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. 1 Game machine.

According to the feature F8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Features F9. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature F5 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of F8.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. The first control means (main CPU 63) and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63, which transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs. )When,
The identification information transmitting means (main side) that transmits the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means. (Function to execute recognition processing in CPU 63) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Further, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information It is not necessary to store the correspondence between the above in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature G2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature G3. The feature G1 or G2, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Features G4. When the identification information is received, the second control means makes it possible to identify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. One of the features G1 to G3, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence relation setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116). The game machine described.

According to the feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Is gone. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature G1 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of G4.

According to the feature G5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means, a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to the feature G6, since the number of signal paths provided is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be obtained according to the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature G7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make a configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 233), and the game ball (game ball B1) is a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent board. ) From upstream to downstream in a gaming machine
The game board has predetermined changing means (first left-right distribution nails 213, 242, second) that make the movement mode of the game ball after contact different depending on the position of the contacting game ball in the depth direction in the game area. Left and right distribution nails 214, reversing nails 251, front and rear distribution nails 262, repulsion nails 322, front and rear distribution tables 351, 391, 392, position change passage 423, replacement position change passages 442, inclined nails). A game machine featuring.

According to the feature H1, since the game balls in the game area can be dispersed in such a manner that the course of the game balls is different depending on the position in the depth direction of the game balls, only the lateral position of the game balls in contact with the game balls can be dispersed. Compared with a gaming machine that affects the course of a gaming ball, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the gaming ball in the gaming area and improve the interest of the game.

The game board in the present feature H1 is a plate-shaped one provided with predetermined changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Feature H2. The predetermined changing means repels the game ball by applying a drag force to the game ball that has come into contact with the game ball from the upstream side of the game area, and the movement mode of the game ball due to the bounce is brought into contact with the game ball in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to feature H1, which is characterized in that it is different depending on the position.

According to the feature H2, the movement mode of the game ball after bouncing can be changed according to the contact position in the depth direction of the game ball, and the movement mode can be changed by bouncing the game ball flowing down the game area. While adopting the conventional configuration of changing, it is possible to add a novel movement mode of changing the bounce direction according to the position in the depth direction.

Feature H3. The predetermined changing means rolls a game ball placed upward from the upstream side of the game area, and the movement mode of the game ball due to the rolling is changed according to the contact position of the game ball in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, which is characterized by being different.

According to the feature H3, since the movement mode of the game ball is changed in the process of rolling the game ball, the movement mode of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction is assumed in the game machine design stage. It becomes easier to control.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein a plurality of the predetermined changing means are arranged side by side in the gaming area.

According to the feature H4, the game ball that has reached the area where the plurality of predetermined changing means are arranged side by side is likely to come into contact with any of the predetermined changing means. As a result, the movement mode of the game ball is likely to change according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H5. Different changing means (first left and right distribution nails 213, 242, second left and right distribution nails 214) in which the movement mode of the game balls after contact according to the position of the game balls in contact in the depth direction is different from the predetermined change means. , Reversing nail 251, front and rear distribution nail 262, rear nail 271, front priority member 291, repulsion nail 322, front and rear distribution table 351, 391, 392, position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, inclined nail). Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the other changing means is arranged side by side in the predetermined changing means in the gaming area.

According to the feature H5, the game ball that has reached the area where the predetermined changing means and the different changing means are juxtaposed is placed in the contact position in the depth direction depending on, for example, which of the predetermined changing means and the different changing means is in contact. It is possible to make the movement mode of the game ball different according to the movement mode. In this case, the player pays attention to which of the predetermined changing means and the other changing means the game ball comes into contact with, while expecting that the movement mode is desired by the player. Further, for example, it is possible to make the movement mode of the game ball different depending on the position in the depth direction when one of the predetermined changing means and the other changing means is touched. .. In this case, it is possible to correlate the movement modes of the game balls by both changing means.

Feature H6. The predetermined changing means is characterized in that the lateral movement mode of the gaming ball in the gaming region after contact is different depending on the position of the gaming ball in contact in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to change the lateral movement mode of the game ball according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. This makes it possible to correlate the position of the game ball in the depth direction with the lateral movement mode of the game ball, and the player who pays attention to the movement of the game ball grasps the position of the game ball from various angles. The movement of the game ball will be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H7. The predetermined changing means is
The first predetermined changing means (first distribution surface 217a,) for changing the lateral movement mode of the game ball in contact with the first predetermined range in the depth direction (for example, the inner side of the game area PA) in the first predetermined mode. 232a, 244a, first reversing surface 254a, rear nail 271, low repulsion member 333, first inclined portion of inclined nail),
A second predetermined change in which the lateral movement mode of the game ball in contact with the second predetermined range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first predetermined range in the depth direction is changed by the second predetermined mode. Means (second distribution surface 218a, 234a, 245a, second inversion surface 254b, front priority member 291, high repulsion portion 334d, second inclined portion of inclined nail).
The gaming machine according to the feature H6, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature H7, the lateral movement mode of the game ball after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player predicts to some extent the subsequent movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction with respect to the position in the depth direction of the game ball. It is possible to make it.

Feature H8. The first predetermined changing means applies a force containing a leftward component to a game ball in contact with the first predetermined range.
The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the second predetermined changing means applies a force containing a rightward component to a gaming ball that comes into contact with the second predetermined range.

According to the feature H8, the lateral components of the force applied to the game ball are opposite to each other according to the contact position in the depth direction. This makes it possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H9. The first predetermined changing means applies a force containing a component in a predetermined direction, which is one of the leftward direction and the rightward direction, to the game ball in contact with the first predetermined range.
The second predetermined changing means applies a force containing a component in the predetermined direction to a gaming ball in contact with the second predetermined range, and exerts a larger force than the first predetermined changing means as the force in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature H7, which is characterized by being given.

According to the feature H9, regardless of whether the contact position in the depth direction is in the first predetermined range or the second predetermined range, the magnitude of the force is determined while applying the same lateral force to the game ball. It is possible to make them different. As a result, it is possible to move the game ball in the same lateral direction, but to change the amount of movement according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H10. One of the features H1 to H9, wherein the predetermined changing means changes the movement mode of the gaming ball in the depth direction after contact depending on the position of the gaming ball in contact in the depth direction. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H10, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features H11. The predetermined changing means is
A third predetermined changing means (first inverted surface 254a, first reversing surface 254a, first) for changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the third predetermined range in the depth direction (for example, the inner side of the game area PA). 1 distribution surface 264a, first downstream surface 372, back side wall surface 443a),
A fourth predetermined change in which the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the fourth predetermined range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the third predetermined range in the depth direction is changed by the fourth predetermined mode. Means (second inversion surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, second downstream surface 373, front side wall surface 422b, 443b) and
The gaming machine according to the feature H10, which comprises.

According to the feature H11, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player predicts to some extent the subsequent movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction with respect to the position in the depth direction of the game ball. It is possible to make it.

Feature H12. The third predetermined changing means gives a force containing a positive component to the game ball in contact with the third predetermined range.
The gaming machine according to feature H11, wherein the fourth predetermined changing means applies a force containing a backward component to the gaming ball in contact with the fourth predetermined range.

According to the feature H12, the components in the depth direction of the force applied to the game ball are opposite to each other according to the contact position in the depth direction. This makes it possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H13. The gaming machine according to feature H12, wherein the third predetermined range exists on the back side of the fourth predetermined range.

According to the feature H13, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side by the presence of the predetermined changing means.

Feature H14. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, wherein the predetermined changing means has a different coefficient of restitution depending on the position in the depth direction.

According to the feature H14, it is possible to apply drags of different sizes to game balls having different collision positions in the depth direction. As a result, the rebound speed of the game ball after colliding with the predetermined changing means can be made different. In this way, by increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball in the game area, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H15. The predetermined changing means is
Resin members (first left-right distribution member 215, 243, second left-right distribution member 231, reversing member 254) for changing the movement mode of the game ball in contact according to the position in the depth direction of the game ball. , Front-rear distribution member 263, plate member 292),
A metal member (fixing member 216, support member 293, 294) for fixing the predetermined changing means to the game board with the resin member exposed to the game area.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H14.

According to the feature H15, by making the member that changes the course of the game ball from a resin that can be easily molded, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the member that changes the course of the game ball. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the resin member is firmly fixed by the metal member, the durability of the predetermined changing means is improved, and maintenance of the gaming machine equipped with the predetermined changing means is frequently required. It can be avoided.

Feature H16. One of features H1 to H15 characterized in that the predetermined changing means is fixed to a base body (left side guiding member 255) provided separately from the gaming board and fixed to the gaming board. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature H16, by fixing the base body integrated with the predetermined changing means to the game board, it is possible to provide the predetermined changing means on the game board. This makes it possible to provide the predetermined changing means on the game board after carefully aligning the predetermined changing means.

Feature H17. The gaming machine according to feature H16, wherein a plurality of the predetermined changing means are fixed to the base body.

According to the feature H17, since it is possible to provide the predetermined changing means on the game board after carefully aligning the relative positioning of the plurality of predetermined changing means, the relative positioning of the plurality of predetermined changing means can be performed. It is possible to improve the accuracy.

Feature H18. 1 The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H18, a sufficient number of means for distributing the course of the game ball can be provided on the game board. When changing all the obstacle nails in the conventional game board to the predetermined change means, if the predetermined change means is manufactured larger than the obstacle nails in order to secure the strength, the number of the predetermined change means that can be provided in the game board is limited. It ends up. On the other hand, as a means for dispersing the course of the game ball in the game board, by mixing a small obstacle nail and a large predetermined changing means, the game ball that can be provided on the game board is dispersed. It is possible to suppress the decrease of means and sufficiently disperse the game balls. Then, the game board can be configured to be capable of both changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the left-right direction and changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature H19. The predetermined changing means changes the lateral movement mode of the game ball in the game area after contact depending on the position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction.
The gaming board is a specific changing means (reversing nail 251. One of the features H1 to H18 characterized in that it is provided with a front-rear distribution nail 262, a front-rear distribution table 351, 391, 392, a position change passage 423, a replacement position change passage 442, and a guide passage 461). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature H19, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction by providing the specific changing means. Further, the game board is provided with not only the specific changing means but also a predetermined changing means for changing the lateral movement mode of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction, so that the movement mode of the game ball can be varied. It becomes possible to make it.

Further, since the specific changing means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined changing means, the game ball by the predetermined changing means after that depends on whether or not the position of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by the specific changing means. It is possible to make different distribution modes in the lateral direction. This makes it possible to correlate the movement modes of the game balls by these specific changing means and the predetermined changing means.

Feature H20. The game board is provided with openings (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serve as an opportunity to provide a privilege advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
A gaming ball that comes into contact with the predetermined changing means after the movement mode in the depth direction is changed to the specific aspect by the specific changing means is more than a gaming ball that comes into contact with the predetermined changing means without becoming the specific changing means. The gaming machine according to feature H19, wherein the specific changing means and the predetermined changing means are provided so that the ball can easily enter the opening.

According to the feature H20, it is easier for the player to enter the opening when the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction is set to the specific mode by the specific change means, so that the player's attention to the specific change means is increased. It becomes possible. Further, even if the game ball has the movement mode in the depth direction set to the specific mode by the specific changing means, it will come into contact with the predetermined changing means after that, and the movement mode in the depth direction is the specific mode in the process up to the contact. Can be in a different aspect, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process until the game ball comes into contact with the predetermined changing means.

Feature H21. The game according to the feature H19 or H20, wherein the specific changing means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact depending on the position of the game ball in contact in the depth direction. Machine.

According to the feature H21, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H22. The specific changing means is
The first specific changing means (first inverted surface 254a, first reversing surface 254a, first) for changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the first specific range in the depth direction (for example, the inner side of the game area PA) in the first specific mode. 1 distribution surface 264a, back side wall surface 443a),
A second specific change in which the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first specific range in the depth direction is changed by the second specific mode. Means (second inversion surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, front side wall surface 422b, 443b) and
The gaming machine according to the feature H21, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature H22, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player predicts to some extent the subsequent movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction with respect to the position in the depth direction of the game ball. It is possible to make it.

Feature H23. The first specific changing means gives a force containing a positive component to a game ball in contact with the first specific range.
The gaming machine according to feature H22, wherein the second specific changing means applies a force containing a backward component to the gaming ball in contact with the second specific range.

According to the feature H23, the components of the drag force applied to the game ball in the depth direction are opposite to each other according to the contact position in the depth direction. This makes it possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Features H24. The gaming machine according to feature H23, wherein the first specific range exists on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the feature H24, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side due to the presence of the specific changing means.

Feature H25. The specific changing means has a guide passage (position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, guide passage 461) through which the game ball passes, and the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H19 to H24, which is characterized in that the configuration is such that the above-mentioned specific aspect can be obtained.

According to the feature H25, the player paying attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Feature H26. The gaming machine according to feature H25, wherein the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is changed according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage.

According to the feature H26, the game ball enters the guide passage by setting the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the passing mode of the game ball in the guide passage.

Feature H27. The guide passage has a feature H25 or H26 characterized in that the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is different depending on the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature H27, the game ball enters the guide passage because the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction differs depending on the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the position of the game ball when entering the entrance of the guide passage.

Feature H28. The guide passage is formed by being divided into a plurality of passage walls, and is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction.
The depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage when the game ball passing through the guide passage comes into contact with the predetermined passage wall (front side wall surface 422b, 443b, back side wall surface 443a) among the plurality of passage walls. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H25 to H27, characterized in that the movement mode of the above is the specific mode.

According to the feature H28, the configuration is such that the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by the contact with the passage wall of the guide passage, so that the excellent effect as described above can be obtained while simplifying the configuration. Is possible.

Feature H29. In the guide passage, a game ball existing in the first range in the depth direction (near the surface of the game board 421, 451) at the entrance of the guide passage is placed in front of the first range at the exit of the guide passage. The game ball existing in the second range (near the back surface of the window panel 52), which is in front of the first range at the entrance of the guide passage, is moved from the second range at the exit of the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H25 to H28, which is characterized in that it is configured to be moved to the back side.

According to the feature H29, it is possible to guide the game ball to a position opposite to the position in the depth direction at the entrance of the guide passage. This makes it possible to positively change the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature H30. The guide passage is in the depth direction at the exit of the guide passage for a gaming ball existing on the front side of the first range and on the back side of the second range at the entrance of the guide passage. The gaming machine according to feature H29, which is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a force for changing the position of.

According to the feature H30, it is possible to create a situation in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction does not change even when passing through the guide passage. This makes it possible to diversify the position of the game ball in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage.

Features H31. The guide passage is characterized in that the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is the specific mode regardless of the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature H31, since the game ball entering the guide passage surely has a specific mode of movement in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage, it is possible to increase the influence of the guide passage on the game board. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the movement of the game ball around the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H32. The guide passage is characterized in that it is provided in a passage forming body (passage forming member 422, replacement passage forming member 441, guide member 471, replacement guide member 561) provided separately from the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of H25 to H31.

According to the feature H32, since the guide passage is provided in the passage forming body provided separately from the game board, the depth of the game ball is used while using the same game board by exchanging the passage forming body. It is possible to change the movement mode in the direction.

Feature H33. The game board is provided with openings (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serve as an opportunity to provide a privilege advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
The predetermined changing means is characterized in that the movement mode of the contacting game ball after contact is divided into a movement mode in which the probability of entering the opening is high and a movement mode in which the probability of entering the opening is low. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H32.

According to the feature H33, the probability that the game ball wins the opening differs depending on the position of the game ball in the depth direction. In this way, by making the configuration in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction upstream of the opening is reflected in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features H34. The game board is provided with a guiding means (stage unit 354) for guiding the game ball to a place where the probability of entering the opening is high.
The predetermined changing means is characterized in that there are a case where the game ball is guided to the guiding means according to a position in the depth direction of the game ball and a case where the game ball is not guided to the guiding means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H34, by making the player pay attention to whether or not the game ball whose course has been changed by the predetermined changing means is guided by the guiding means, the player's interest in the movement of the game ball is raised and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the. Further, by reflecting the difference in the position of the game ball in the depth direction in the game area in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features H1 to H34, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 261), and the game ball (game ball B1) is a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent board. ) From upstream to downstream in a gaming machine
The game board is contactable with a game ball whose position in the depth direction in the game area is in a contactable range (for example, either the back side or the front side of the game area PA) and is in the depth direction. Special changing means (rear nail 271, front priority member 291 and passage forming member 422) capable of changing the movement mode of the contacted game ball because the game ball whose position does not exist in the contactable range cannot be contacted. , A gaming machine comprising a replacement passage forming member 441).

According to the feature I1, only the game ball whose position in the depth direction in the game area exists in the contactable range can come into contact with the special changing means. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to come into contact with the special changing means expects the game ball to exist in the contactable range, and the player pays attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction in the game area. It is possible to increase the degree. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game board in the present feature I1 is a plate-shaped one provided with special changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Feature I2. The special changing means is characterized in that it exists from the surface of the gaming board to an intermediate position in the depth direction of the gaming area so that the contactable range is on the inner side of the gaming area. The gaming machine described in I1.

According to the feature I2, only the game ball existing in the back side of the game area can come into contact with the special changing means. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to come into contact with the special changing means expects the game ball to exist in the back side of the game area. Further, since the special changing means exists from the surface of the game board to the intermediate position in the depth direction, the special changing means can be provided by a simple structure.

Feature I3. The game board is provided with openings (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serve as an opportunity to provide a privilege advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
The gaming ball that has reached the area provided with the special changing means may or may not enter the opening or may easily enter the opening, depending on whether or not the gaming ball comes into contact with the special changing means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that they are different.

According to the feature I3, the presence or absence of the game ball entering the opening or the ease of entering the game ball into the opening differs depending on whether or not the game ball comes into contact with the special changing means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special change means.

Feature I4. One of the features I1 to I3, wherein the gaming board is provided with an obstacle nail (obstacle nail 228) that changes the movement mode of the game ball after contact in a manner corresponding to the contact position in the left-right direction. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature I4, a sufficient number of means for distributing the course of the game ball can be provided on the game board. When changing all the obstacle nails in the conventional game board to the predetermined change means, if the predetermined change means is manufactured larger than the obstacle nails in order to secure the strength, the number of the predetermined change means that can be provided in the game board is limited. It ends up. On the other hand, as a means for dispersing the course of the game ball in the game board, by mixing a small obstacle nail and a large predetermined changing means, the game ball that can be provided on the game board is dispersed. It is possible to suppress the decrease of means and sufficiently disperse the game balls. Then, the game board can be configured to be capable of both changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the left-right direction and changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature I5. On the upstream side of the special changing means, specific changing means (front-rear distribution nail 262, obstacle nail 228, concave front-rear distribution nail) are provided so that the game ball can come into contact regardless of the position in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, the game ball that has reached the position of the specific change means surely contacts the specific change means, whereas the game ball that has reached the position of the special change means does not come into contact with the special change means. Can occur. Then, since the specific changing means is provided on the upstream side of the special changing means, the player is informed that the game ball does not come into contact with the special changing means even though the position of the special changing means has been reached. It is possible to give unexpectedness.

Feature I6. The special changing means and the specific changing means are provided so as to be arranged in a predetermined direction.
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein a plurality of the specific changing means are provided so as to sandwich the special changing means in the predetermined direction.

According to the feature I6, the game ball is guided in a predetermined direction by the special changing means and the specific changing means according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction, and the game ball in the predetermined direction at the position of the special changing means. It is possible to create a situation in which the guidance of is terminated. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to be guided in a predetermined direction pays attention to the arrangement area of these special changing means and the specific changing means, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or I6, wherein the specific changing means can change the position of the contacted gaming ball in the depth direction.

According to the feature I7, when the game ball comes into contact with the specific changing means, the position in the depth direction of the game ball before reaching the position of the special changing means is changed from the previous position. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the presence or absence of contact of the game ball with the specific changing means and the position of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the specific changing means changes the movement mode of the gaming ball in the depth direction after contact depending on the position of the gaming ball in contact in the depth direction.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I9. The specific changing means is
The first specific changing means (first distribution surface 264a) for changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the first specific range in the depth direction (for example, the inner side of the game area PA) in the first specific mode. When,
A second specific change in which the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first specific range in the depth direction is changed by the second specific mode. Means (second distribution surface 265a) and
The gaming machine according to the feature I8, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature I9, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player predicts to some extent the subsequent movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction with respect to the position in the depth direction of the game ball. It is possible to make it.

Feature I10. The first specific changing means gives a force containing a positive component to a game ball in contact with the first specific range.
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the second specific changing means applies a force containing a backward component to the gaming ball in contact with the second specific range.

According to the feature I10, the components of the drag force applied to the game ball in the depth direction are opposite to each other according to the contact position in the depth direction. This makes it possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature I11. The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the first specific range exists on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the feature I11, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side due to the presence of the specific changing means.

For the configurations of features I1 to I11, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 261), and the game ball (game ball B1) is a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent board. ) From upstream to downstream in a gaming machine
The game board has specific changing means (reversing nail 251, front-rear distribution nail 262, front-rear distribution table 351 and 391) that enable the movement mode of the contacted game ball in the depth direction in the game area to be a specific mode. , 392, position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, guide passage 461).

According to the feature J1, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction by providing the specific changing means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the game area not only in the lateral direction but also in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game board in the present feature J1 is a plate-shaped one provided with specific changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific changing means changes the movement mode of the gaming ball in the depth direction after contact depending on the position of the gaming ball in contact in the depth direction.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J3. The specific changing means is
The first specific changing means (first inverted surface 254a, first reversing surface 254a, first) for changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the first specific range in the depth direction (for example, the inner side of the game area PA) in the first specific mode. 1 distribution surface 264a, back side wall surface 443a),
A second specific change in which the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap with the first specific range in the depth direction is changed by the second specific mode. Means (second inversion surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, front side wall surface 422b, 443b) and
The gaming machine according to the feature J2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature J3, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after the contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball in the lateral direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player predicts to some extent the subsequent movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction with respect to the position in the depth direction of the game ball. It is possible to make it.

Features J4. The first specific changing means gives a force containing a positive component to a game ball in contact with the first specific range.
The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the second specific changing means applies a force containing a backward component to the gaming ball in contact with the second specific range.

According to the feature J4, the components of the drag force applied to the game ball in the depth direction are opposite to each other according to the contact position in the depth direction. This makes it possible to significantly change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J4, wherein the first specific range exists on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the feature J5, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side due to the presence of the specific changing means.

Features J6. The specific changing means has a guide passage (position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, guide passage 461) through which the game ball passes, and the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J5, which is characterized in that the configuration is such that the above-mentioned specific aspect can be obtained.

According to the feature J6, the player paying attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is changed according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage.

According to the feature J7, the game ball enters the guide passage by setting the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction according to the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the passing mode of the game ball in the guide passage.

Features J8. The guide passage is characterized in that the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is different depending on the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature J8, the game ball enters the guide passage because the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction differs depending on the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the position of the game ball when entering the entrance of the guide passage.

Features J9. The guide passage is formed by being divided into a plurality of passage walls, and is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction.
The depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage when the game ball passing through the guide passage comes into contact with the predetermined passage wall (front side wall surface 422b, 443b, back side wall surface 443a) among the plurality of passage walls. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, characterized in that the movement mode of the above is the specific mode.

According to the feature J9, the structure is such that the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by the contact with the passage wall of the guide passage, so that the excellent effect as described above can be obtained while simplifying the structure. Is possible.

Features J10. In the guide passage, a game ball existing in the first range in the depth direction (near the surface of the game board 421, 451) at the entrance of the guide passage is placed in front of the first range at the exit of the guide passage. The game ball existing in the second range (near the back surface of the window panel 52), which is in front of the first range at the entrance of the guide passage, is moved from the second range at the exit of the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J6 to J9, which is characterized in that it is configured to be moved to the back side.

According to the feature J10, it is possible to guide the game ball to a position opposite to the position in the depth direction at the entrance of the guide passage. This makes it possible to positively change the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Features J11. The guide passage is in the depth direction at the exit of the guide passage for a gaming ball existing on the front side of the first range and on the back side of the second range at the entrance of the guide passage. The gaming machine according to feature J10, which is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a force for changing the position of.

According to the feature J11, it is possible to create a situation in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction does not change even when passing through the guide passage. This makes it possible to diversify the position of the game ball in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage.

Features J12. The feature J6 is characterized in that the guide passage has a configuration in which the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction is the specific mode regardless of the passage mode of the game ball in the guide passage. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature J12, since the game ball that has entered the guide passage has a specific mode of movement in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage, it is possible to increase the influence of the guide passage on the game board. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the movement of the game ball around the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J13. The guide passage is characterized in that it is provided in a passage forming body (passage forming member 422, replacement passage forming member 441, guide member 471, replacement guide member 561) provided separately from the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of J6 to J12.

According to the feature J13, since the guide passage is provided in the passage forming body provided separately from the game board, the depth of the game ball can be used while using the same game board by exchanging the passage forming body. It is possible to change the movement mode in the direction.

Feature J14. The game board is provided with openings (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that serve as an opportunity to provide a privilege advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
The specific changing means is characterized in that the movement mode of the contacting game ball after contact is divided into a movement mode in which the probability of entering the opening is high and a movement mode in which the probability of entering the opening is low. The gaming machine according to any one of J1 to J13.

According to the feature J14, the probability that the game ball wins the opening differs depending on the position of the game ball in the depth direction. In this way, by making the configuration in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction upstream of the opening is reflected in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J15. The game board is provided with a guiding means (stage unit 354) for guiding the game ball to a place where the probability of entering the opening is high.
The specific changing means is characterized in that there are a case where the game ball is guided to the guiding means according to a position in the depth direction of the game ball and a case where the game ball is not guided to the guiding means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J15, by making the player pay attention to whether or not the game ball whose course has been changed by the predetermined changing means is guided by the guiding means, the player's interest in the movement of the game ball is raised and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the. Further, by reflecting the difference in the position of the game ball in the depth direction in the game area in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For the configurations of features J1 to J15, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board is provided with nails and a nail to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members such as wind turbines are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game ball launched from the game ball launcher flows down the game area while colliding with a nail or the like, and when the game ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operating opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are used. The game ball is paid out to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably disperse the gaming balls in the gaming area, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Insertion holes (via holes 793, via holes 793) through which terminals (pins 784a to 784t, terminals 775) of mounting parts (connectors 781 to 783, first actuating port connector 955, second actuating port connector 956, insertion mounting parts) are inserted. 793a to 793t) and a connection area (short-circuit prevention hole 761, joining hole 762) provided around the insertion hole, and the terminal of the mounting component is inserted into the insertion hole. In the state, in a gaming machine provided with a substrate (for example, a main control board 61) in which the terminals of the mounting component and the connection area are electrically connected by solder.
The substrate has a first connection area (joint hole 762) and a wider area than the first connection area as the connection area provided for the different insertion holes. A gaming machine characterized by having two connection areas (short-circuit prevention hole 761).

According to the feature K1, since the second connection area formed to have a larger area than the first connection area is provided, melting that adheres to a predetermined terminal when soldering while transporting the substrate is provided. The possibility of solder moving towards adjacent terminals is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a solder bridge will be formed.

Feature K2. The mounting component is a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are lined up in a row (row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, rows of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781, and pins 784 of the two-row connector 784g. It is provided with a row of up to 784p, a row of pins 784q and 784r of the connector 955 for the first actuation port, and a row of pins 784s and 784t of the connector 956 for the second actuation port).
The second connection area is provided so as to correspond to the insertion hole through which a terminal existing at at least one end of the terminal row (for example, the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782) is inserted. The gaming machine according to the feature K1.

According to the feature K2, a second connection area is provided corresponding to a predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row in which the amount of molten solder that adheres easily when soldering while transporting the substrate is likely to increase. There is. As a result, the possibility that the molten solder moves from the periphery of the predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row toward the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is reduced, and as a result, a solder bridge is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility of soldering.

Feature K3. The second connection area includes the insertion hole through which the terminal existing at at least one end of the terminal row is inserted and the terminal existing at the other end of the terminal row (for example, the one-row connector 782). The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the first pin 784a) is provided corresponding to each of the insertion holes into which the first pin 784a) is inserted.

According to the feature K3, when soldering is performed while transporting the substrate, the substrate can be designed before the transport direction of the substrate is determined. Further, even if the transfer direction of the substrate is reversed before soldering, the substrate can have a low probability of occurrence of solder bridge.

Features K4. The terminal row is provided with three or more terminals including a grounding terminal (pins 784c, 784e, 784i connected to the GND solid 851) for grounding.
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the grounding terminal is arranged so as to avoid the end of the terminal row.

According to the feature K4, since the grounding terminal where the temperature of the molten solder tends to drop around the terminal does not exist at the end of the terminal row, the predetermined terminal is located around the predetermined terminal existing at the end of the terminal row. The possibility that the molten solder will move toward the terminal adjacent to the terminal is reduced. By reducing the possibility of the molten solder moving in this way, it is possible to prevent the area required for the second connection region from becoming extremely large.

Feature K5. The feature K2 is characterized in that the first connection area is provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which a terminal existing at a position different from the end of the terminal row is inserted in the terminal row. The gaming machine according to any one of K4.

According to the feature K5, for terminals existing at positions different from the ends of the terminal row (for example, the second pin 784b and the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782), the first connection region is not used. By providing the connection area, it is possible to prevent the range occupied by these connection areas on the substrate from becoming extremely wide.

Features K6. In the second connection area, the dimension between the two adjacent terminals is a predetermined dimension (a reference value of 1.5 mm for the pin spacing in the row of the one-row connector, and 2.5 mm for the pin spacing of the two-pole connector. When it is less than or equal to the reference value (1.5 mm for the pin spacing in the row of the two-row connector and 2.5 mm for the row spacing), at least one of the plurality of terminals is inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that it is provided corresponding to a common hole.

According to the feature K6, by providing the second connection area only in the place where the solder bridge is likely to occur on the board, it is possible to prevent the range occupied by the connection area on the board from becoming extremely wide. It will be possible.

Feature K7. As the mounting parts, a first mounting part (for example, a 2-pole connector 781) in which the arrangement mode of the terminals is the first arrangement mode and a second mounting component (for example, one row) in which the terminal arrangement mode is the second arrangement mode. It is equipped with a connector 782) and
The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the predetermined dimensions are different between the first arrangement mode and the second arrangement mode.

According to the feature K7, only in a place where there is a high probability that a solder bridge will occur on the board due to the difference in predetermined dimensions between the terminals that are the reference for providing the second connection area according to the arrangement mode of the terminals. 2 It is possible to provide a connection area. This makes it possible to prevent the range occupied by the connection area on the substrate from becoming extremely wide.

Features K8. The first arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction (arrangement of pins 784e and 784f of a two-pole connector 781).
The second arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction (for example, an arrangement of pins 784a to 784d of a one-row connector 782).
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement embodiment is larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement embodiment.

According to the feature K8, in the case of the first arrangement mode in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction, the terminals existing at the ends in the arrangement direction are grounding terminals, so that three or more terminals are predetermined. Solder bridges are more likely to occur than in the second arrangement mode in which they are arranged in the direction. In this case, according to the feature K8, since the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is set to a size larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode, the second is for the terminal where the solder bridge is likely to occur. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals to be formed of the second connection area while providing the connection area.

Features K9. The first arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which two terminal rows in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction are present in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction (for example, an arrangement of pins 784g to 784p of a two-row connector 783). And
The second arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which only one terminal row in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction exists (for example, an arrangement of pins 784a to 784d of a one-row connector 782).
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement embodiment is larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement embodiment.

According to the feature K9, in the case of the first arrangement mode in which two terminal rows are arranged side by side, solder bridges are more likely to occur than in the second arrangement mode in which only one terminal row is arranged. In this case, according to the feature K9, since the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is set to a size larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode, the second is for the terminal where the solder bridge is likely to occur. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals to be formed of the second connection area while providing the connection area.

Features K10. The mounting component includes a predetermined terminal row (row of pins 784e and 784f of the 2-pole connector 781) in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction.
The second connection area is characterized in that the two terminals existing in the predetermined terminal row are provided so as to correspond to each of the insertion holes into which the two terminals are individually inserted. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature K10, in the case of a predetermined terminal row in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction, the terminals existing at the ends in the arrangement direction are grounding terminals, so that three or more terminals are in the predetermined direction. Solder bridges are more likely to occur than the terminal rows arranged in. In this case, according to the feature K10, the possibility that a solder bridge is generated is reduced by providing the second connection area corresponding to each of the two terminals in the predetermined terminal row. Is possible.

Features K11. The second connection area is formed so that the area on the side different from the terminal side that is closest to the terminal inserted into the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection area is large. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10.

According to the feature K11, when soldering is performed while transporting the substrate, the molten solder adhering around the predetermined terminal can be held in a direction different from that of the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal. This makes it possible to prevent the molten solder held in the second connection region from merging with the molten solder around the adjacent terminals to form a solder bridge before solidifying.

Feature K12. The area of the second connection area is the largest on the side opposite to the terminal side that is closest to the terminal inserted into the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection area. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K11, which is characterized in that it is formed.

According to the feature K12, the molten solder adhering around the predetermined terminal can be held on the side farthest from the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal, so that it becomes difficult to form the solder bridge.

Feature K13. The mounting component is a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are lined up in a row (row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, rows of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781, and pins 784 of the two-row connector 784g. It is provided with a row of up to 784p, a row of pins 784q and 784r of the connector 955 for the first actuation port, and a row of pins 784s and 784t of the connector 956 for the second actuation port).
The second connection region is characterized in that the arrangement direction of the plurality of terminals in the terminal row is formed so that the length dimension is larger than the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K12.

According to the feature K13, it is possible to provide the second connection area on the board while suppressing the influence on the board design in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the terminals in the terminal row.

Feature K14. The second connection area is
Peripheral areas (small short-circuit prevention holes 891,921) formed around the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection area, and
An external region (large short-circuit prevention hole 892, 922) provided outside the peripheral region of the substrate, and
A connecting region (first passage region 894, 924) connecting the peripheral region and the external region,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K13.

According to the feature K14, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the outer region separated by sandwiching the connecting region from the surrounding region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the peripheral region side.

Feature K15. The gaming machine according to feature K14, wherein the external region has a larger area than the peripheral region.

According to the feature K15, since the external region has a larger area than the peripheral region, the molten solder accumulated in the peripheral region is attracted toward the external region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the peripheral region side.

Feature K16. The gaming machine according to feature K14 or K15, wherein the connecting region is narrower than the external region.

According to the feature K16, the possibility that the molten solder held in the external region moves to the surrounding region through the connecting region is reduced.

For the configurations of features K1 to K16, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Insertion holes (via holes 793, via holes 793, through which the terminals (pins 784a to 784t, terminals 775) of the mounting parts (connectors 781 to 783, connector 955 for the first working port, connector 956 for the second working port, insertion mounting parts) are inserted. 793a to 793t) and a connection area (joining hole 762) provided around the insertion hole, and the mounting is made in a state where the terminal of the mounting component is inserted into the insertion hole. In a gaming machine provided with a board (main control board 61) in which the terminals of parts and the connection area are electrically connected by solder.
The substrate is provided at a position outside the connection region without communicating with the connection region, and a special region (separate short-circuit prevention holes 871,874,875 to 878,886) to which solder can be fastened is provided. A gaming machine characterized by having 887, a three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881,884).

According to the feature L1, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder adhering to the connection region in the special region when soldering is performed while transporting the substrate. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a solder bridge will be formed. In particular, by separating and holding the molten solder from the connecting region in the special region, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder moves from the special region to the connecting region.

Feature L2. As the connection area
A predetermined connection area (for example, the fourth joint hole 762d of the back surface area 873 for one row) provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which the predetermined terminal is inserted,
A specific connection area (for example, the third joint hole 762c of the back surface area 873 for one row) provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which the adjacent terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is inserted.
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the special area is provided on a side different from the specific connection area side with respect to the predetermined connection area.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to prevent the molten solder held in the special region from moving to the specific connection region side.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the special area is provided on the side opposite to the specific connection area side with the predetermined connection area as a reference.

According to the feature L3, it is possible to hold the molten solder adhering to the predetermined connection region in a direction away from the specific connection region. Further, when the predetermined connection area exists on the rear side in the transport direction with respect to the specific connection area, the special area exists on the rear side in the transport direction with respect to the predetermined connection area. As a result, the molten solder adhering to the predetermined connection region is easily held in the special region.

Feature L4. The special area is provided at a position where the distance between the predetermined connection area (distance LD1) is shorter than the distance between the predetermined connection area and the specific connection area (distance LD2). The gaming machine according to the feature L2 or L3.

According to the feature L4, the special area exists at a position closer to the predetermined connection area than the specific connection area. As a result, when soldering is performed while transporting the substrate, excess molten solder generated on the surface of the predetermined connection region is more likely to be held in the special region than in the specific connection region.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the special area has a larger area than the connection area.

According to the feature L5, since the special region has a larger area than the connection region, the molten solder is easily attracted to the special region.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the special area is formed so that the area farther from the connection area is larger than the area closer to the connection area.

According to the feature L6, since most of the molten solder held in the special region is held on the side far from the connecting region, it becomes difficult for the molten solder held in the special region to move to the connecting region side.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the special area is provided so as to exist in a plurality of directions with respect to the connection area.

According to the feature L7, since the special region is provided so as to exist in a plurality of directions with respect to the connection region, it is possible to secure a large number of movement paths of the molten solder moving from the connection region to the special region. It will be possible. Therefore, the excess molten solder generated on the surface of the connection region is likely to be held in the special region.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein a plurality of the special regions are provided around one connection region.

According to the feature L8, since a plurality of special regions for retracting excess molten solder generated on the surface of the connection region exist around the connection region, the molten solder is held in the special region. It will be easier.

Feature L9. The mounting component is a terminal row in which a plurality of terminals are lined up in a row (row of pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782, rows of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781, and pins 784 of the two-row connector 784g. It is provided with a row of up to 784p, a row of pins 784q and 784r of the connector 955 for the first actuation port, and a row of pins 784s and 784t of the connector 956 for the second actuation port).
The special area is provided for the connection area corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal existing at at least one end of the terminal row (for example, the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782) is inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8.

According to the feature L9, a special region is provided corresponding to a predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row in which the amount of molten solder that adheres when soldering is performed while transporting the substrate tends to increase. As a result, the possibility that the molten solder moves from the periphery of the predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row toward the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is reduced, and as a result, a solder bridge is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility of soldering.

Feature L10. The special area is a connection area corresponding to the insertion hole into which a terminal existing at at least one end of the terminal row is inserted, and a terminal existing at the other end of the terminal row (for example,). The gaming machine according to feature L9, wherein the first pin 784a) of the one-row connector 782 is provided for each of the connection areas corresponding to the insertion holes into which the first pin 784a) is inserted.

According to the feature L10, when soldering is performed while transporting the substrate, the substrate can be designed before the transport direction of the substrate is determined. Further, even if the transfer direction of the substrate is reversed before soldering, the substrate can have a low probability of occurrence of solder bridge.

Feature L11. The terminal row is provided with three or more terminals including a grounding terminal (pins 784c, 784e, 784i connected to the GND solid 851) for grounding.
The gaming machine according to feature L9 or L10, wherein the grounding terminal is arranged so as to avoid the end of the terminal row.

According to the feature L11, since the grounding terminal where the temperature of the molten solder tends to drop around the terminal does not exist at the end of the terminal row, the predetermined terminal is located around the predetermined terminal existing at the end of the terminal row. The possibility that the molten solder will move toward the terminal adjacent to the terminal is reduced. By reducing the possibility of the molten solder moving in this way, it is possible to prevent the area required as a special region from becoming extremely large.

Feature L12. The special region is formed in the insertion hole through which a terminal (for example, the second pin 784b and the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782) existing at a position different from the end of the terminal row in the terminal row is inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features L9 to L11, which is not provided for the corresponding connection area.

According to the feature L12, since the special area is not provided for the terminal existing at a position different from the end of the terminal row, the range occupied by the special area on the substrate is not extremely widened. It becomes possible to.

For the configurations of features L1 to L12, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area (game area PA) based on a launch operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (first operating port 938, second operating port 939) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
Ball entry detection means (first actuation port detection sensor 951, second actuation port detection sensor 952) for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry portion, and
The connection means (first actuating port connector 955, second actuating port connector 955, second actuating port connector) to which the transmission means (first harness 951a, second harness 952a) for transmitting the detection result information of the ball entry detection means is electrically connected. Specific control means (main control device 60) having a specific board (main control board 61) provided with 956), and
Equipped with
As the starting ball entering portion, at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 938) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 939) are provided.
As the ball entry detection means, a first ball entry detection means (first actuating opening detection sensor 951) for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start ball entry section and a ball entry into the second start ball entry section. It is provided with at least a second ball entry detection means (second operating port detection sensor 952) for detecting the game ball.
As the transmission means, a first transmission means (first harness 951a) for transmitting information on the detection result of the first ball entry detection means and a second transmission for transmitting information on the detection result of the second ball entry detection means. With means (second harness 952a),
As the connection means, a first connection means (first actuating port connector 955) to which the first transmission means is connected and a second connection means (second actuating port connector 956) to which the second transmission means is connected. ) And,
The first connecting means and the second connecting means are individually provided for the specific board.
The connection terminals provided in the second connection means are two, a first connection terminal (first pin 784s) and a second connection terminal (second pin 784t).
The specific substrate is
The first insertion hole (first via hole 793s) through which the first connection terminal is inserted, and
A second insertion hole (second via hole 793t) through which the second connection terminal is inserted, and
The first connection area (short circuit prevention hole 761) provided around the first insertion hole and
A second connection area (short circuit prevention hole 761) provided around the second insertion hole, and
A predetermined insertion hole (via hole 793) through which a predetermined terminal of a predetermined mounting component is inserted, and a predetermined insertion hole (via hole 793).
A predetermined connection area (joint hole 762) provided around the predetermined insertion hole and
Equipped with
With the first connection terminal inserted through the first insertion hole, the first connection terminal and the first connection area are electrically connected by solder.
With the second connection terminal inserted through the second insertion hole, the second connection terminal and the second connection area are electrically connected by solder.
With the predetermined terminal inserted into the predetermined insertion hole, the predetermined terminal and the predetermined connection area are electrically connected by solder.
In the game area, the first start ball entry portion is provided at a position where the game ball launched can reach at least when the launch operation according to the first operation mode is performed.
In the game area, the second starting ball entry portion is in a position where the game ball launched when the launch operation according to the first operation mode is performed is unreachable or difficult to reach, and the second operation mode. It is provided at a position where the game ball fired when the firing operation is performed by
The specific control means is
A first acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) to acquire special information (holding information) based on the detection of a game ball by the first ball entry detection means.
The first acquisition information storage means (the first special figure holding area, the function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) for storing the special information acquired by the first acquisition means, and
A second acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) to acquire special information based on the detection of a game ball by the second ball entry detection means.
A second acquisition information storage means (second special figure holding area, a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) for storing the special information acquired by the second acquisition means.
Grant determination means (main side CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information. (Function to execute the process of step S213) in
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. (Function to execute the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63) and
Acceptance control that allows the second start ball entry portion to be switched to either a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or is impossible to enter, or a second state in which the game ball is easier to enter. Means (a function of executing the process of step S214 in the main CPU 63) and
Equipped with
The acceptance control means has a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the second mode is more likely to occur than the first mode as the control mode of the second start ball entry unit. ) And has,
The special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination than the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination. In this case, the above-mentioned privilege that is advantageous to the player is given or is more likely to be given.
The first connection area and the second connection area are formed so as to have a larger area than the predetermined connection area.
The first connection area is formed so that the area on the side different from the second insertion hole side is larger than that of the first insertion hole.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second connection area is formed so that the area on the side different from the first insertion hole side is larger than that of the second insertion hole.

According to the feature M1, the grant determination performed when the ball enters the second start ball entry section is more advantageous to the player than the grant determination performed when the ball enters the first start ball entry section. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, the player has great expectations. A first connection area having a larger area than a predetermined connection area is provided around the first connection terminal of the second connection means, and an area larger than the predetermined connection area is provided around the second connection terminal. A large second connection area is provided. Therefore, in the soldering process of the specific substrate, it is possible to prevent a solder bridge from being formed between the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal to cause a short circuit. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the entry of the game ball into the second starting entry portion is not detected due to the poor connection. It is possible to avoid disappointing the expected player due to poor connection.

Further, a first connection means for connecting the first detection means to the specific board and a second connection means for connecting the second detection means to the specific board are individually provided for the specific board. When an illegal board is used, it is possible to make it difficult to perform illegality in the game hall by setting many connection points necessary for connecting the illegal board to the specific board.

Features M2. The first connection area and the second connection area are longer in the arrangement direction in which the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal are arranged than in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction. The gaming machine according to feature M1, which is characterized in that it is formed so as to be large.

According to the feature M2, in the specific board, the first connection area and the second connection area are provided while suppressing the influence on the board design in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal. It becomes possible.

Features M3. The first connection area is
A first peripheral region (small short circuit prevention holes 891,921) formed around the first insertion hole, and
A first external region (large short-circuit prevention hole 892, 922) provided outside the first peripheral region in the specific substrate, and
A first connecting region (first passage region 894, 924) connecting the first peripheral region and the first external region, and
Equipped with
The second connection area is
A second peripheral region (small short circuit prevention holes 891,921) formed around the second insertion hole, and
A second external region (large short-circuit prevention hole 892, 922) provided outside the second peripheral region in the specific substrate, and
A second connecting region (first passage region 894, 924) connecting the second peripheral region and the second external region,
The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or M2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature M1 or M2.

According to the feature M3, the molten solder can be separated and held in the first outer region separated by sandwiching the first connecting region from the first peripheral region, and the molten solder can be separated and held in the second peripheral region. It is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the second outer region separated by sandwiching the second connecting region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the first peripheral region side and the second peripheral region side.

Features M4. The first external region has a larger area than the first peripheral region.
The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the second external region has a larger area than the second peripheral region.

According to the feature M4, since the first outer region has a larger area than the first peripheral region, the molten solder accumulated in the first peripheral region is attracted toward the first outer region. Further, since the second outer region has a larger area than the second peripheral region, the molten solder accumulated in the second peripheral region is attracted toward the second outer region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the molten solder will move to the first peripheral region side and the second peripheral region side.

Feature M5. The first connecting region is narrower than the first external region.
The gaming machine according to feature M3 or M4, wherein the second connecting region is narrower than the second external region.

According to the feature M5, the possibility that the molten solder held in the first external region moves to the first peripheral region through the first connecting region is reduced, and the molten solder held in the second external region is reduced. The possibility that the solder will move to the second peripheral region through the second connecting region is reduced.

It should be noted that, for the configurations of the features M1 to M5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature K group, the feature L group, and the feature M group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control device that controls the main control of the game, a voice emission control device that outputs sound or light for production based on a command received from the main control device, and the like. These main control devices, voice emission control devices, and the like are provided with a board inside, and the board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs and resistors, connectors, and the like on a printed wiring board. Electronic components, connectors, etc. are fixed in a state of being electrically connected to the wiring formed on the printed wiring board by soldering.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform soldering when mounting an electronic component, a connector, or the like on a printed wiring board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... pachinko machine, 24a ... out port, 27 ... game ball launch mechanism, 31 ... general winning port, 32 ... special electric winning device, 33 ... first operating port, 34 ... second operating port, 52 ... window panel, 60 ... Main controller, 61 ... main control board, 62 ... MPU, 63 ... main CPU, 65 ... main RAM, 92 ... payout side CPU, 102 ... reading terminal, 112 ... management side CPU, 116 ... correspondence memory , 131 ... Calculation result memory, 151 ... Notification light emitting unit, 213 ... First left and right distribution nail, 214 ... Second left and right distribution nail, 215 ... First left and right distribution member, 216 ... Fixing member, 217a ... 1st distribution surface, 218a ... 2nd distribution surface, 228 ... Obstacle nail, 231 ... 2nd left and right distribution member, 232a ... 1st distribution surface, 233 ... Game board, 234a ... 2nd distribution surface, 242 ... 1st left / right distribution nail, 243 ... 1st left / right distribution member, 244a ... 1st distribution surface, 245a ... 2nd distribution surface, 251 ... reversing nail, 254 ... reversing member, 254a ... 1st reversing surface, 254b ... 2nd inversion surface, 255 ... Left side guide member, 262 ... Front and rear distribution nail, 263 ... Front and rear distribution member, 264a ... 1st distribution surface, 265a ... Second distribution surface, 271 ... Rear nail, 291 ... Front priority member, 292 ... Plate member, 293 ... First support member, 294 ... Second support member, 322 ... Repulsive nail, 333 ... Low repulsion member, 334d ... High repulsion part, 351 ... Front and rear distribution table, 354 ... Stage Unit, 372 ... 1st downstream surface, 373 ... 2nd downstream surface, 391, 392 ... Front and rear distribution table, 422 ... Passage forming member, 422b ... Front side wall surface, 423 ... Position changing passage, 441 ... Replacement passage forming member , 442 ... Replacement position change passage, 443a ... Back side wall surface, 443b ... Front side surface, 461 ... Guide passage, 462 ... Guide surface, 471 ... Guide member, 561 ... Replacement guide member, 761 ... Short circuit prevention hole, 762 ... Joint hole, 762c ... 3rd joint hole, 762d ... 4th joint hole, 775 ... Terminal, 781 ... 2-pole connector, 782 ... 1-row connector, 783 ... 2-row connector, 784a-784t ... Pin, 793, 793a- 793t ... Via hole, 891 ... Small short circuit prevention hole, 892 ... Large short circuit prevention hole, 894 ... First passage area, 851 ... GND solid, 871 ... Separate type short circuit prevention hole, 873 ... Back side area for one row, 874 ... Separate type Short-circuit prevention hole, 875 ... Upper left separation type short-circuit prevention hole, 876 ... Lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole, 877 ... Upper right separation type short-circuit prevention hole, 878 ... Lower right separation type short-circuit prevention hole, 881,884 ... Three-way separation type short circuit Prevention hole, 886 ... Left side separation type short circuit prevention hole, 887 ... Right side separation type short circuit prevention hole, 921 ... small short circuit prevention hole, 922 ... large short circuit prevention hole, 924 ... first passage area, 938 ... first operating port, 939 ... second operating port, 951 ... first operating port detection sensor , 951a ... 1st harness, 952 ... 2nd actuating port detection sensor, 952a ... 2nd harness, 955 ... 1st actuating port connector, 956 ... 2nd actuating port connector, B1 ... game ball, PA ... game area.

Claims (1)

It has an insertion hole through which the terminal of the mounting component is inserted and a connection area provided around the insertion hole, and the terminal of the mounting component is inserted into the insertion hole. In a gaming machine provided with a substrate in which the terminals of the mounted parts and the connection area are electrically connected by solder.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the substrate is provided at a position outside the connection area without communicating with the connection area, and has a special area in which solder can be fastened.

Images